Mechanical engineering and materials Books

Book SynopsisDie dritte Auflage des mittlerweile zum Standardwerk gereiften Lehrbuchs trägt den rasanten Entwicklungen in diesem interdisziplinären Gebiet umfassend Rechnung. Insbesondere die Kapitel Siliziumtechnik, Materialien und Alternative Technologien wurden stark erweitert. Außerdem sind neue Anwendungsaspekte hinzugekommen. Somit schlägt dieses Lehrbuch weiterhin in einzigartiger Weise den Bogen von den Grundlagen der Mikrosystemtechnik bis hin zu den aktuellen Anwendungen in einer Vielzahl von High-Tech Entwicklungen.Trade Review"Die völlig neu bearbeitete Auflage des ersten umfassenden Lehrbuchs der Mikrosystemtechnik berücksichtigt die Trends dieses Gebietes der Ingenieurwissenschaften. Vor allem die Kapitel zur Silizium- und LIGA-Technik wurden stark erweitert... Das Buch spricht überwiegend fortgeschrittene Studenten der Ingenieurwissenschaften an, die einen fundierten Einstieg in das aktuelle Forschungsthema suchen. Auch gestandene Fachleute können sich hier einen guten Überblick über die theoretischen und experimentellen Grundlagen der Mikrosystemtechnik verschaffen." Wirtschaft Region Fulda IHK "Das Buch ist insgesamt ein gelungener Versuch, die Grundlagen der Mikrosystemtechnik in einem Lehrwerk darzustellen." CITTable of ContentsVorwort xv 1 Allgemeine Einführung in die Mikrostrukturtechnik 1 1.1 Was ist Mikrostrukturtechnik? 1 1.2 Von der Mikrostrukturtechnik zur Mikrosystemtechnik 9 2 Parallelen zur Mikroelektronik 15 2.1 Herstellung von Einkristallscheiben 15 2.1.1 Herstellung von Silizium-Einkristallen 17 2.1.1.1 Tiegelziehverfahren (Czochralski-Verfahren) 19 2.1.1.2 Zonenziehverfahren (Float-Zone-Verfahren) 21 2.1.1.3 Segregation 23 2.1.1.4 Weiterverarbeitung der Ingots 25 2.1.2 Herstellung von GaAs-Einkristallen 28 2.1.2.1 Bridgman- und Gradient-Freeze-Verfahren 28 2.1.2.2 LEC-Verfahren (Liquid Encapsulated Czochralski) 30 2.2 Technologische Grundprozesse 31 2.2.1 Herstellung eines integrierten Schaltkreises 33 2.2.1.1 Reinigung 33 2.2.1.2 Oxidation 34 2.2.1.3 Photolithographie 34 2.2.1.4 Ionenimplantation und Diffusion 35 2.2.1.5 Ätzen 35 2.2.1.6 Beschichtung 36 2.3 Weiterverarbeitung der integrierten Schaltungen 36 2.3.1 Anforderungen an die Aufbau- und Verbindungstechnik 37 2.3.2 Hybridtechniken 38 2.3.2.1 Dickschichttechnik 38 2.3.2.2 Bestücken und Löten der Schaltung 39 2.3.2.3 Montage und Kontaktierung ungehäuster Halbleiterbauelemente 40 2.4 Reinraumtechnik 41 2.4.1 Partikelmessung im Reinraum 45 2.5 Punktfehler und Ausbeute bei Halbleiterbauelementen 45 3 Physikalische und chemische Grundlagen der Mikrotechnik 49 3.1 Kristalle und Kristallographie 49 3.1.1 Gitter und Gittertypen 50 3.1.2 Stereographische Projektion 52 3.1.3 Silizium-Einkristall 56 3.1.4 Reziprokes Gitter und Kristallstrukturanalyse 58 3.2 Methoden zur Bestimmung der Kristallstruktur 65 3.2.1 Röntgenstrahlbeugung 65 3.2.2 Elektronenstrahlbeugung 67 3.3 Grundlagen der galvanischen Abscheidung 69 3.3.1 Phasengrenze Elektrode-Elektrolyt 72 3.3.1.1 Elektrisches und elektrochemisches Potential 72 3.3.2 Polarisation und Überspannung 75 3.3.3 Mechanismen der kathodischen Metallabscheidung 77 3.3.3.1 Migration 79 3.3.3.2 Diffusion 80 3.3.3.3 Konvektion 80 3.3.3.4 Stofftransportvorgänge während der Mikrogalvanoformung 83 3.4 Grundlagen der Vakuumtechnik 84 3.4.1 Mittlere freie Weglänge 84 3.4.2 Wiederbedeckungszeit 86 3.4.3 Geschwindigkeit von Atomen und Molekülen 87 3.4.4 Gasdynamik 89 3.4.5 Einteilung des technischen Vakuums 89 3.5 Vakuumerzeugung 91 3.5.1 Pumpen für Grob- und Feinvakuum 91 3.5.1.1 Verdrängervakuumpumpen 91 3.5.2 Hochvakuum- und Ultrahochvakuumpumpen 93 3.5.2.1 Treibmittelvakuumpumpen 95 3.5.2.2 Gas bindende Vakuumpumpen (Sorptionspumpen) 96 3.6 Vakuummessung 99 3.6.1 Druckmessdose 99 3.6.2 Wärmeleitungsvakuummeter 99 3.6.3 Reibungsvakuummeter 100 3.6.4 Ionisationsvakuummeter mit unselbständiger Entladung (Glühkathode) 100 3.6.5 Ionisationsvakuummeter mit selbständiger Entladung (Penning-Prinzip) 101 3.6.6 Leckage und Lecksuche 102 3.7 Eigenschaften von Dünnschichten 103 3.7.1 Strukturzonenmodelle 103 3.7.2 Haftfestigkeit der Schicht 106 4 Materialien der Mikrosystemtechnik 109 4.1 Materialeigenschaften 111 4.1.1 Thermische Eigenschaften 112 4.1.1.1 Wärmeleitfähigkeit 113 4.1.1.2 Spezifische Wärme 113 4.1.1.3 Latente Wärme 114 4.1.1.4 Wärmeausdehnungskoeffizient 114 4.1.2 Elektrische Eigenschaften 115 4.1.2.1 Elektrische Leitfähigkeit 115 4.1.2.2 Dielektrische Konstante 116 4.1.2.3 Thermoelektrizität 116 4.1.2.4 Piezoresistivität 117 4.1.3 Mechanische Eigenschaften 119 4.2 Kunststoffe 120 4.2.1 Ordnung der Makromoleküle 121 4.2.2 Polymere für die Lithographie 122 4.2.3 Flüssigkristalle 124 4.2.4 Flüssigkristalline Polymere 125 4.2.5 Gele 127 4.2.6 Elektrorheologische Flüssigkeiten 129 4.3 Halbleiter 131 4.4 Keramiken 134 4.4.1 Keramik als Substrat 134 4.4.2 Keramik als Material für Aktoren 135 4.4.3 Keramik als Material für Gassensoren 135 4.5 Metalle 136 4.5.1 Magnetostriktive Metalle 137 4.5.2 Anwendungen der Magnetostriktion 139 4.5.3 Formgedächtnis-Legierungen 140 4.5.3.1 Einwegeffekt 141 4.5.3.2 Zweiwegeffekt 142 4.5.3.3 Unterdrücktes Formgedächtnis 143 4.5.3.4 Einsatz als Aktoren 144 4.5.3.5 Herstellung 144 4.5.3.6 Eigenschaften der Formgedächtnislegierungen 145 5 Basistechnologien der Mikrotechnik 147 5.1 Schichtabscheidung 147 5.1.1 Physikalische Beschichtungstechniken 147 5.1.1.1 Aufdampfen 147 5.1.1.2 Sputtern (Kathodenzerstäuben) 151 5.1.1.3 Ionenplattieren 153 5.1.2 Chemische Beschichtungstechniken 154 5.1.2.1 CVD-Verfahren 154 5.1.2.2 Epitaxie 160 5.1.2.3 GaAs-Epitaxie 163 5.1.2.4 Plasmapolymerisation 163 5.2 Schichtmodifikation 164 5.2.1 Thermische Oxidation 164 5.2.2 Diffusion 165 5.2.3 Ionenimplantation 167 5.3 Schichtabtragung (Ätzen) 168 5.3.1 Physikalische und chemische Trockenätzverfahren 170 5.3.1.1 Plasmaquellen 172 5.3.1.2 Charakteristika der rein physikalischen Ätzprozesse 173 5.3.1.3 Kombination chemischer und physikalischer Ätzprozesse 178 5.3.1.4 Charakteristika des reaktiven Ionen- und Ionenstrahlätzens 180 5.3.1.5 Das rein chemische Ätzen 181 5.4 Analyse von Dünnschichten und Oberflächen 184 5.4.1 Elektronenstrahl-Mikroanalyse (Electron Probe Microanalysis, Epm) 185 5.4.2 Auger-Elektronenspektroskopie (AES) 186 5.4.3 Photoelektronenspektroskopie (Electron Spectroscopy for Chemical Analysis, ESCA) 187 5.4.4 Sekundärionen-Massenspektrometrie (SIMS) 188 5.4.5 Sekundär-Neutralteilchen-Massenspektrometrie (SNMS) 188 5.4.6 Ionen-Streuspektroskopie (ISS) 189 5.4.7 Rutherford-Rückstreuungsspektroskopie (Rutherford Backscattering Spectroscopy, RBS) 189 5.4.8 Rastertunnelmikroskop (Atomic Force Microscope, AFM) 190 6 Lithographie 191 6.1 Überblick und Historie 191 6.2 Resists 196 6.3 Verfahren der Lithographie 198 6.3.1 Computer Aided Design (CAD) 199 6.3.1.1 CAD-Entwurf 200 6.3.1.2 Justiermarken und Teststrukturen 202 6.3.1.3 Organisation des Entwurfs (Hierarchie, Layers) 203 6.4 Elektronenstrahllithographie 205 6.4.1 Gauß’scher Strahl 206 6.4.2 Geformter Strahl 211 6.4.3 Postprozessor 213 6.5 Proximity-Effekt 214 6.6 Optische Lithographie 216 6.6.1 Masken 217 6.6.2 Schattenprojektion 218 6.6.3 Abbildende Projektion 221 6.6.3.1 Ganzscheiben-Belichtung 222 6.6.3.2 Moderne Lithographiemaschinen 223 6.7 Weiterentwicklungen 224 6.7.1 Phasenmasken 224 6.7.2 Spezielle Resisttechnologien 225 6.7.3 Optische Lithographie für die Mikrostrukturtechnik 226 6.8 Ionenstrahllithographie 231 6.9 Röntgenlithographie 232 6.9.1 Masken für die Röntgenlithographie 233 6.9.2 Röntgenlichtquellen 234 6.9.3 Synchrotronstrahlung 235 6.9.4 Einsatz der Röntgenlithographie 240 7 Silizium-Mikromechanik 241 7.1 Siliziumtechnologie 242 7.1.1 IC-Prozesse und -Substrate 243 7.1.2 Foundry-Technologien 247 7.2 Silizium-Bulk-Mikromechanik 248 7.2.1 Einleitung 248 7.2.1.1 Ätzrate und Anisotropie 250 7.2.1.2 Selektivität 251 7.2.1.3 Prozesskompatibilität 251 7.2.1.4 Einfachheit der Verwendung und Sicherheit 252 7.2.1.5 Kosten 253 7.2.2 Nasschemisches Ätzen 253 7.2.2.1 HNA-Ätzlösungen 253 7.2.2.2 Alkalihydroxid-Ätzlösungen 255 7.2.2.3 Ammoniumhydroxid-Ätzlösungen 259 7.2.2.4 Ethylendiamin-Brenzkatechin-Ätzlösungen 260 7.2.3 Grundlegende Ätzformen 261 7.2.3.1 Ätzgruben und -gräben 262 7.2.3.2 Membranen 264 7.2.3.3 Mesas und Spitzen 264 7.2.3.4 Cantilever 265 7.2.3.5 Brücken 267 7.2.4 Ätzkontrolle 268 7.2.4.1 Ätzstoppmechanismen 268 7.2.4.2 Elektrochemisches Siliziumätzen 271 7.2.4.3 Elektrochemische Siliziumporosifizierung 273 7.2.5 Charakterisierung von anisotropen Nassätzmitteln 274 7.2.6 Trockenätzen 276 7.2.6.1 XeF2 –Ätzen 276 7.2.6.2 Fertigung von Mikrostrukturen mit hohem Aspektverhältnis 279 7.2.6.3 Anwendungen von trockenem Siliziumätzen 281 7.3 Oberflächenmikromechanik 285 7.3.1 Polysilizium-Mikromechanik 287 7.3.2 Opferaluminium-Mikromechanik 290 7.3.3 Opferpolymer-Mikromechanik 292 7.3.4 Sticking 293 7.4 Mikrowandler und -systeme in der Siliziumtechnologie 294 7.4.1 Mechanische Bauteile und Systeme 295 7.4.1.1 Drucksensoren 296 7.4.1.2 Beschleunigungssensoren 298 7.4.1.3 Drehratensensoren 300 7.4.1.4 Stresssensoren 302 7.4.2 Thermische Mikrobauteile und -systeme 304 7.4.2.1 Temperaturmessung 304 7.4.2.2 Durchflusssensoren 308 7.4.2.3 Vakuum- und Drucksensoren 311 7.4.3 Komponenten und Systeme für Strahlungssignale 313 7.4.3.1 Ungekühlte Infrarotdetektoren 313 7.4.3.2 Thermische Szenensimulatoren 316 7.4.3.3 Lichtschalter 316 7.4.4 Magnetische Bauteile und Systeme 319 7.4.5 Chemische Mikrosensoren 321 7.4.5.1 Mikrofluidische Komponenten und Systeme 324 7.4.6 Mikromechanische Bauteile für die Signalverarbeitung 326 7.5 Zusammenfassung und Ausblick 328 8 LIGA-Verfahren 329 8.1 Überblick 329 8.2 Maskenherstellung 331 8.2.1 Prinzipieller Aufbau einer Maske 331 8.2.1.1 Absorber 331 8.2.1.2 Trägerfolie 332 8.2.2 Herstellung der Trägerfolien 334 8.2.3 Strukturierung des Resists für Röntgenzwischenmasken 335 8.2.3.1 Optische Lithographie 335 8.2.3.2 Direkte Elektronenstrahllithographie 336 8.2.3.3 Reaktives Ionenätzen 337 8.2.3.4 Vergleich der Strukturierungsmethoden zur Herstellung von Zwischenmasken 337 8.2.4 Goldgalvanik für Röntgenmasken 337 8.2.5 Herstellung von Arbeitsmasken 339 8.2.6 Justieröffnungen in Röntgenarbeitsmasken 340 8.3 Röntgentiefenlithographie 341 8.3.1 Herstellung von dicken Resistschichten 341 8.3.1.1 Strahleninduzierte Reaktionen und Entwicklung des Resists 343 8.3.2 Anforderungen an die absorbierte Strahlendosis 347 8.3.3 Einflüsse auf die Strukturqualität 350 8.3.3.1 Fresnel-Beugung, Photoelektronen 351 8.3.3.2 Divergenz der Strahlung 353 8.3.3.3 Neigung der Absorberwände zum Strahl 354 8.3.3.4 Fluoreszenzstrahlung aus der Maskenmembran 354 8.3.3.5 Erzeugung von Sekundärelektronen aus der Haft- und Galvanikstartschicht 354 8.3.3.6 Quellen des Resists 356 8.4 Galvanische Abscheidung 356 8.4.1 Galvanische Abscheidung von Nickel für die Mikrostrukturherstellung 357 8.4.2 Formeinsatzherstellung für die Mikroabformung 361 8.4.3 Galvanische Abscheidung weiterer Metalle und Legierungen 362 8.5 Kunststoffabformung im LIGA-Verfahren 364 8.5.1 Herstellung von Mikrostrukturen im Reaktionsgießverfahren 365 8.5.2 Herstellung von Mikrostrukturen im Spritzgießverfahren 368 8.5.3 Herstellung von Mikrostrukturen im Heißprägeverfahren 374 8.5.4 Herstellung von metallischen Mikrostrukturen aus abgeformten Kunststoffstrukturen (zweite Galvanoformung) 377 8.5.4.1 Zweite Galvanoformung geprägter Mikrostrukturen 377 8.5.4.2 Zweite Galvanoformung mit Hilfe einer metallischen Angussplatte 377 8.5.4.3 Zweite Galvanoformung mit Hilfe elektrisch leitfähiger Kunststoffe 379 8.5.4.4 Zweite Galvanoformung durch Beschichtung der Kunststoffstrukturen 381 8.6 Variationen und ergänzende Schritte des LIGA-Verfahrens 382 8.6.1 Opferschichttechnik 382 8.6.2 3D-Strukturierung 385 8.6.2.1 Gestufte Strukturen 385 8.6.2.2 Geneigte Strukturen 387 8.6.2.3 Konische Strukturen und Strukturen mit sphärischer Oberfläche 388 8.6.2.4 Herstellung von Strukturen mit beweglicher Maske 389 8.6.3 Herstellung Licht leitender Strukturen durch Abformung 391 8.7 Protonenlithographie (DLP) – ein weiteres Strukturierungsverfahren zur Herstellung von Mikrostrukturen mit großem Aspektverhältnis 394 8.8 Anwendungsbeispiele 399 8.8.1 Starre metallische Mikrostrukturen 400 8.8.1.1 Filter für das Ferne Infrarot 400 8.8.1.2 Mikrospulen 401 8.8.1.3 Mikrozahnräder, Mikrogetriebe 403 8.8.2 Bewegliche Mikrostrukturen, Mikrosensoren, Mikroaktoren 403 8.8.2.1 Beschleunigungssensoren 404 8.8.2.2 Elektrostatischer Linearantrieb 406 8.8.2.3 Elektromagnetischer Linearaktor 407 8.8.2.4 Mikroturbine, Strömungssensoren, Mikrofräser 412 8.8.2.5 Mikromotoren 413 8.8.3 Fluidische Mikrostrukturen 416 8.8.3.1 Mikrostrukturierte Fluidplatten 416 8.8.3.2 Mikropumpen nach dem LIGA-Verfahren 416 8.8.3.3 Mikrofluidische Schalter 416 8.8.3.4 Mikrofluidische Linearaktoren 418 8.8.4 LIGA-Strukturen für optische Anwendungen 419 8.8.4.1 Einfache optische Elemente – Linsen, Prismen 420 8.8.4.2 Mikrooptische Bank 422 8.8.4.3 Mikrooptische Bänke mit Aktoren 426 8.8.4.4 Funktionsmodule mit optisch aktiven Elementen – modulares Aufbaukonzept 429 9 Alternative Verfahren der Mikrostrukturierung 437 9.1 Ultrapräzisionsmikrobearbeitung 438 9.1.1 Anwendungsbeispiele 443 9.1.1.1 Mikrowärmeüberträger 443 9.1.1.2 Mikroreaktoren 445 9.1.1.3 Retrospiegel 446 9.1.1.4 Mikropumpen 447 9.2 Mikrofunkenerosion (von R. Förster) 448 9.2.1 Physikalisches Prinzip 448 9.2.1.1 Aufbauphase 450 9.2.1.2 Entladephase 451 9.2.1.3 Abbauphase 451 9.2.2 Funkenerosive Bearbeitung keramischer Werkstoffe 452 9.2.2.1 Siliziuminfiltriertes Siliziumcarbid (SiSiC) 453 9.2.2.2 Siliziumnitrid (Si3 N4) 454 9.2.2.3 Elektrisch nicht leitfähige Keramiken 454 9.2.3 Verfahrensvarianten 455 9.2.3.1 Funkenerosives Senken 455 9.2.3.2 Funkenerosives Schneiden 456 9.2.4 Anwendungsbeispiele 459 9.3 Präzisionselektrochemische Mikrobearbeitung (von R. Förster) 461 9.3.1 Vorgänge im Bearbeitungsspalt 462 9.3.1.1 Spannungsabfall 462 9.3.1.2 Anodische Metallauflösung 464 9.3.2 Elektrolytlösungen 466 9.3.2.1 Kenngrößen der Elektrolytlösungen 468 9.3.3 Untersuchungen verschiedener Werkstoffe 469 9.3.3.1 Eisen, Eisenlegierungen und Stähle 469 9.3.3.2 Titan und Titanlegierungen 470 9.3.3.3 Hartmetalle 470 9.3.4 ECM-Senken mit oszillierender Werkzeugelektrode 471 9.3.4.1 Prozesskenngrößen 471 9.3.4.2 Darstellung der Vorgänge im Arbeitsspalt 472 9.3.4.3 Werkzeugelektrodenwerkstoffe 473 9.3.5 Elektrochemische Bearbeitungsverfahren in der Mikro-systemtechnik 474 9.3.5.1 Elektrochemisches Mikrobohren 474 9.3.5.2 Elektrochemisches Mikrodrahtschneiden 474 9.3.5.3 Elektrochemisches Mikrofräsen 475 9.3.5.4 Weitere Anwendungsbeispiele des Verfahrens in der Mikrosystemtechnik 476 9.4 Replikationstechniken 478 9.4.1 Spritzgießen 478 9.4.2 Heißprägen 480 9.5 Laserunterstützte Verfahren 482 10 Aufbau- und Verbindungstechniken 485 10.1 Hybridtechniken 486 10.1.1 Substrate und Pasten 486 10.1.2 Schichterzeugung 489 10.1.2.1 Trocknen und Einbrennen der Pasten 490 10.1.3 Bestücken und Löten der Schaltung 490 10.1.4 Montage und Kontaktierung ungehäuster Halbleiterbauelemente 493 10.2 Drahtbondtechniken 493 10.2.1 Thermokompressionsdrahtbonden (Warmpressschweißen) 494 10.2.2 Ultraschalldrahtbonden (Ultraschallschweißen) 495 10.2.3 Thermosonicdrahtbonden (Ultraschallwarmschweißen) 495 10.2.4 Ball-Wedge-Bonden (Kugel-Keil-Schweißen) 496 10.2.5 Wedge-Wedge-Bonden (Keil-Keil-Schweißen) 497 10.2.6 Vor- und Nachteile der einzelnen Drahtbondverfahren 498 10.2.7 Prüfverfahren und Alternativen 499 10.3 Alternative Kontaktierungstechniken 500 10.3.1 TAB-Technik 500 10.3.2 Flip-Chip-Technik 501 10.3.3 Entwicklung neuer Kontaktierungssysteme 503 10.4 Kleben 503 10.4.1 Isotropes Kleben 504 10.4.2 Anisotropes Kleben 505 10.5 Anodisches Bonden 507 11 Systemtechnik 511 11.1 Definition eines Mikrosystems 511 11.2 Sensoren 513 11.3 Aktoren 517 11.4 Signalverarbeitung 519 11.4.1 Signalverarbeitung für Sensoren in Mikrosystemen 519 11.4.2 Neuronale Datenverarbeitung für Sensorarrays 523 11.5 Schnittstellen eines Mikrosystems 528 11.5.1 IE-Übertragung 531 11.5.1.1 Elektrische Mikro-/Makroankopplungen 531 11.5.1.2 Optische Mikro-/Makroankopplungen 533 11.5.1.3 Lichtwellenleiter-Ankopplungen 533 11.5.1.4 Mechanische Mikro-/Makroankopplungen 533 11.5.1.5 Ultraschallübertragung 534 11.5.2 S-Übertragung 535 11.5.2.1 Fluidische Mikro-/Makroankopplungen 535 11.5.2.2 Fluidische Mikrokomponenten 535 11.6 Entwurf, Simulation und Test von Mikrosystemen 537 11.7 Modulkonzept der Mikrosystemtechnik 540 Literatur 545 Stichwortverzeichnis 565

Read more less

Book SynopsisDas in der 3., stark überarbeiteten Auflage vorliegendeLehrbuch für die Universitäts- undFachhochschul-Ausbildung ist in seiner umfassenden, konsequentprozessorientierten und verfahrenstechnischen Darstellung derGlasproduktion ohne Konkurrenz. Es vermittelt dem Studenten fundiertes verfahrenstechnisches Wissen- unterstützt aber auch den in der Praxis tätigenIngenieur. Beginnend mit den Stoffeigenschaften - als den Zielender Glasherstellung - über die Verfahrenstechnik bis zu denfertigungstechnischen Prozessen, die die Prozesse derGlasverarbeitung einschließen, ist das Buch die umfassendeGrundlage für Ausbildung und Praxis. Erstmalig werden diemodernen Erkenntnisse über den Redoxzustand von Schmelzen vollin die Glastechnologie integriert.Table of ContentsSTOFFEIGENSCHAFTENGlaszustandStoffwerte VERFAHRENSTECHNIKGemengeherstellungSchmelzen FERTIGUNGSTECHNIKUrformenUmformenTrennenFügen (Schweißen, Löten, Kleben)BeschichtenStoffeigenschaftsändern GLASTECHNISCHE BERECHNUNGENEigenschaftenSyntheseGemenge LITERATUR SACHREGISTER

Read more less

Book SynopsisPharmazeutische Produkte und Verfahren Dieses Buch über pharmazeutische Produktionsanlagen bietet einen Überblick über die Anforderungen an pharmazeutische Herstellungsprozesse. Es beschreibt detailliert die Vorgaben an pharmazeutische Produktionsanlagen, die Produktionsprozesse wie Geräte, Maschinen und Anlagen, sowie die begleitenden Qualifizierungs- und Validierungsmaßnahmen. „[Das Buch] bietet einen Überblick über die Anforderungen und den Betrieb pharmazeutischer Produktionsanlagen und ist daher auch zur Einarbeitung in das interdisziplinäre Gebiet bestens geeignet.“ Filtrieren und Separieren 1/2008Trade Review"Es bietet einen Überblick über die Anforderungen und den Betrieb pharmazeutischer Produktionsanlagen und ist daher auch zur Einarbeitung in das interdisziplinäre Gebiet bestens geeignet." Filtrieren und Separieren Heft 1, 2008Table of ContentsAutorenverzeichnis xv 1 Einführung 1Gerd Kutz und Armin Wolff 1.1 Zielsetzungen 1 1.2 Das Buch im Überblick 2 1.3 Vom Arzneistoff zum Arzneimittel 2 1.3.1 Arzneistoffeigenschaften, Arzneiformen, Arzneimittel 2 1.3.2 Bedeutung der Grundoperationen während der Entwicklung und Herstellung 3 1.3.3 Pharmazeutische Produkte und Verfahren im Umfeld 4 2 Arzneiformen, Arzneimittel, Good Manufacturing Practices und Qualität 7 2.1 Arzneimittelrecht 7Manfred Hunz 2.2 Arzneibuch 9 2.3 Pharmazeutischer Unternehmer und Good Manufacturing Practices (GMP) 10 2.3.1 GMP – Gute Herstellungspraxis 10 2.3.2 MRA – Mutual Recognition Agreements 11 2.3.3 Weiteres internationales pharmazeutisches Recht 11 2.3.3.1 PIC – Pharmazeutische Inspections Convention 11 2.3.3.2 PIC/S und Pharmaceutical Inspection Co-operation Scheme 12 2.4 Arzneiformen im Überblick 12Guido Radtke 2.4.1 Aufbau und Funktion 12 2.4.2 Einteilung der Arzneiformen 14 2.4.2.1 Feste Arzneiformen 14 2.4.2.2 Flüssige Arzneiformen 17 2.4.2.3 Halbfeste Arzneiformen 18 2.4.2.4 Aerosole, gasförmige Darreichungsformen 20 2.4.2.5 Retard- und Depotarzneiformen 21 2.4.2.6 Neue therapeutische Systeme 22 2.5 Pharmazeutische Entwicklung 22 2.5.1 Neuer Arzneistoff oder Generikum? 22 2.5.2 Charakterisierung des Wirkstoffs 24 2.5.3 Formulierungsentwicklung 25 2.5.3.1 Entwicklung von Versuchsformulierungen 25 2.5.3.2 Entwicklung der Marktformulierung 26 2.5.3.3 Prozessentwicklung/Scale-up 26 2.5.3.4 Transfer zur Routineproduktion/Prozessoptimierung 27 2.6 Qualitätssicherung der industriellen Produktion 27 2.6.1 Allgemeine Anforderungen und Regelungen 27 2.6.2 Voraussetzungen zur Herstellung von Arzneimitteln im pharmazeutischen Produktionsbetrieb 29 2.6.2.1 Erforderliche Sachkenntnis und Qualifikation des Personals 29 2.6.2.2 Gebäude, technische Voraussetzungen und Einrichtungen 30 2.6.2.3 In-Prozess-Kontrollen und andere qualitätssichernde Maßnahmen 31 2.6.2.4 Qualifizierung von Maschinen und Geräten und Validierung von Verfahren 32 2.6.3 Transfer neuer Produkte aus der Entwicklung in die pharmazeutische Produktion 33 2.6.4 Pharmazeutische Qualitätssicherung 34Gerhard Maldener 2.6.4.1 Personal 39 2.6.4.2 Räumlichkeiten und Geräte 40 2.6.4.3 Dokumentation 42 2.6.4.4 Produktion 43 2.6.4.5 Qualitätskontrolle 47 2.6.4.6 Auftragsfertigung und Auftragsanalytik 49 2.6.4.7 Beanstandungen und Produktrückrufe 49 2.6.4.8 Selbstinspektionen 50 2.7 Literatur 50 3 Anforderungen an Produktionsanlagen und deren Betrieb 3.1 Grundlegende Begriffe und Konzepte der Qualitätssicherung 53Michael Jahnke 3.1.1 Der Validierungs-Master-Plan 54 3.1.1.1 Unterscheidung von Qualifizierung und Validierung 55 3.1.1.2 Qualifizierungsphasen 55 3.1.1.3 Lebenszyklusmodell 56 3.1.2 Reinigungsvalidierung 57 3.1.2.1 Reinigungsverfahren 58 3.1.3 Prozessvalidierung 60 3.1.3.1 Produktionsbegleitende Validierung 60 3.1.3.2 Risikoanalyse 60 3.1.3.3 Durchführung einer Risikoanalyse nach dem HACCP-Konzept 61 3.1.3.4 Dokumentation einer HACCP-Analyse 66 3.1.3.5 Produktspezifischer Validierungsplan (Corrective Action Plan) 66 3.1.3.6 Retrospektive Validierung 67 3.1.4 Grundlagen der Computervalidierung 68 3.1.4.1 Elemente der Computervalidierung – Grafische Übersicht 70 3.1.4.2 Validierung neuer und eingeführter Systeme 70 3.1.5 Validierung von analytischen Prüfverfahren 72 3.1.6 Definitionen 73 3.1.7 Literatur 77 3.2 Qualifizierung 79Ingo Ebeling 3.2.1 Grundlagen 79 3.2.2 Rechtliche Vorgaben 79 3.2.3 Voraussetzungen 80 3.2.3.1 Qualifizierungsteam 80 3.2.3.2 Qualifizierungsplanung 81 3.2.3.3 Auswahl des Lieferanten 81 3.2.4 Qualifizierungsablauf 82 3.2.4.1 Design-Qualifizierung 83 3.2.4.2 Installations-Qualifizierung (IQ) 85 3.2.4.3 Funktions-Qualifizierung (OQ) 87 3.2.4.4 Leistungs-Qualifizierung (PQ) 88 3.2.5 Aufrechterhaltung des Qualifizierungsstatus 88 3.2.6 Altanlagen-Qualifizierung 89 3.2.7 Literatur 89 3.3 Prozessvalidierung 90Ingo Ebeling 3.3.1 Grundlagen 90 3.3.2 Rechtliche Vorgaben 90 3.3.3 Voraussetzungen 91 3.3.4 Lebenszyklus 91 3.3.5 Arten der Prozessvalidierung 92 3.3.6 Validierungsteam 93 3.3.7 Validierungsumfang 93 3.3.8 Durchführung der Validierung 94 3.3.8.1 Prospektive Validierung 94 3.3.8.2 Prozessvalidierungsplan 94 3.3.8.3 Prozessvalidierungsbericht 96 3.3.8.4 Begleitende Validierung 97 3.3.8.5 Retrospektive Validierung 98 3.3.9 Aufrechterhaltung des validierten Status 98 3.3.9.1 Revalidierung 99 3.3.9.2 Änderungskontrolle (Change Control) 99 3.3.10 Literatur 101 3.4 Risikoanalyse 102Ingo Ebeling 3.4.1 Grundlagen 102 3.4.2 Arten der Risikoanalyse 102 3.4.2.1 Formlose Vorgehensweise 102 3.4.2.2 FMEA 103 3.4.2.3 HACCP 104 3.4.3 Literatur 104 3.5 Reinigungsvalidierung 105Norbert Nierycholk 3.5.1 Einleitung 105 3.5.2 Richtlinien 105 3.5.3 Mikrobiologische Kontamination 105 3.5.4 Reinigungsverfahren 106 3.5.5 Validierungsaufwand 107 3.5.5.1 Dedicated Equipment 107 3.5.5.2 Produktgruppierung 108 3.5.5.3 Equipmentgruppierung 108 3.5.6 Grenzwerte 108 3.5.6.1 Visual-Clean-Kriterium 109 3.5.6.2 10-ppm-Kriterium 109 3.5.6.3 0,1%-Dosis-Kriterium 109 3.5.6.4 Problemprodukte 110 3.5.7 Validierungsplan 110 3.5.7.1 Stellen für die Probenahme 112 3.5.7.2 Probenahmeverfahren 112 3.5.7.3 Analysenmethode 113 3.5.8 Validierungsbericht 114 3.5.8.1 Revalidierung und Change Control 114 3.5.8.2 Korrektive Maßnahmen 115 3.5.9 Abschlusswort 115 3.5.10 Literatur 116 3.6 Computervalidierung 116Holger Röpken 3.6.1 Grundlagen 116 3.6.2 Rechtliche Vorgaben 117 3.6.3 Was ist ein computergestütztes System? 118 3.6.4 Computervalidierung als Projekt 119 3.6.4.1 Planungs- und Bedarfsermittlungsphase 120 3.6.4.2 Entwicklungsphase 122 3.6.4.3 Systemerstellungsphase 123 3.6.4.4 Installations- und Akzeptanzphase 123 3.6.4.5 Implementierungsphase 124 3.6.4.6 Phasenübergreifende Projektaktivitäten 125 3.6.5 Valider Systembetrieb (Betriebs- und Wartungsphase) 126 3.6.5.1 Vorgaben zur Bedienung des Systems und zur Schulung 126 3.6.5.2 Periodische Überprüfung 126 3.6.5.3 Zugriffssicherheit des Systems 127 3.6.5.4 Änderungskontrolle (Change Control) 129 3.6.5.5 Überwachung der Leistung des Systems 129 3.6.5.6 Datensicherung und -wiederherstellung (Backup und Recovery) 129 3.6.5.7 Planung der Geschäftskontinuität 130 3.6.6 Risikoklassifizierung und Einteilung der Systeme 130 3.6.7 Zusammenspiel CS-Validierung mit der Qualifizierung von Anlagen 132 3.6.8 IT-Infrastruktur 132 3.6.9 Definitionen 133 3.6.10 Literatur 134 3.7 Produktionsanlagen 134Wilhelm Lehr 3.7.1 Betrieb pharmazeutischer Anlagen 134 3.7.2 Verantwortung und Organisation 135 3.7.2.1 Produktion 136 3.7.2.2 Technik 136 3.7.2.3 Qualitätssicherung 136 3.7.3 Wartungs- und Instandhaltungsmanagement 137 3.7.4 Investitionsmanagement 142 3.7.4.1 Make or buy – selbst machen oder kaufen? 143 3.7.4.2 Time to market – Zeit, um auf den Markt zu gehen 143 3.7.4.3 Neue Technik 143 3.7.4.4 Rationalisierung 143 3.7.4.5 Kostendruck 144 3.7.4.6 Strategie 144 3.7.4.7 Regulatorisches 144 3.7.4.8 Finanzen und Steuerpolitik 144 3.7.4.9 Verfügbarkeit von Arbeitskräften und Arbeitskosten 145 3.7.4.10 Laufende Kosten und Folgekosten 145 3.7.4.11 Arbeitsklima 145 3.8 Anlagen- und Arbeitssicherheit 145Achim Böttcher 3.8.1 Die Störfallverordnung (12. BImSchV) 146 3.8.2 Verordnung über genehmigungsbedürftige Anlagen 148 3.8.3 Betriebssicherheitsverordnung 149 3.8.4 Arbeitssicherheit 149 3.8.5 Berufsgenossenschaftliche Regeln (BGR) 151 3.8.6 Chemikalienrecht 152 3.8.6.1 Sicherheitsdatenblatt 153 3.8.7 Verantwortlichkeiten im Arbeitsschutz 154 3.9 Reinraumtechnik, Barrieretechniken und Isolatortechnik 156Georg Reiber und Heinz Schenk 3.9.1 Einleitung und geschichtliche Entwicklung von 1964 bis heute 156 3.9.2 Konventionelle Reinraumtechnik – Modultechnik 157 3.9.3 Barrieretechniken für den Personen- und/oder Produktschutz 161 3.9.4 Isolatortechnik – Konzepte, Ausführungsvarianten, Abnahme und Qualifizierung 167 3.9.4.1 Definitionen, Anwendung, geschichtliche Entwicklung 167 3.9.4.2 Isolatoren in der Mikrobiologie, Biotechnik und bei der SPF-Tierhaltung der Pharma-Forschung 168 3.9.4.3 Isolatoren für das aseptische Arbeiten in der Pharmafertigung 170 3.9.4.4 Isolatoren in der Produktion von Kleinmengen hochwirksamer Arzneistoffe und bei der Handhabung gefährlicher Substanzen 177 3.9.5 Standardisierung Reinraumtechnik/Stand 2005 183 3.9.6 Literatur 184 3.10 Produktion steriler Arzneiformen –Aseptische Fertigung mittels H2O2-Dekontamination 184Udo J. Werner 3.10.1 Bedeutung der Anlage im Prozessablauf der Herstellung 184 3.10.2 Definition 184 3.10.3 Beschreibung des Geräts, der Maschine und der Anlage 185 3.10.4 Spezifische pharmazeutische Anforderungen an die Anlage 188 3.10.5 Technische Umsetzung anhand typischer Beispiele 189 3.10.6 Zugehörige Produktionsanlage und deren einzelne Elemente, einschließlich peripherer Instrumentierung und Automation 190 3.10.7 Bewertungskriterien für alternative Prozesse und Anlagen 192 3.10.8 Literatur 194 3.11 Herstellung und Verteilung von pharmazeutischem Reinstdampf 195Stefan Schrankler und Michael Bönisch 3.11.1 Verwendung 195 3.11.2 Begriffsdefinition 195 3.11.3 Herstellungsverfahren 196 3.11.3.1 Bauarten von RD-Erzeugern 196 3.11.3.2 Fallfilmverdampfer 197 3.11.3.3 Naturumlaufverfahren 198 3.11.4 Reinstdampfentnahme aus einer Mehrstufen-Druckkolonnen-Destillationsanlage 199 3.11.5 Qualitätsanforderung an Reinstdampf 199 3.11.6 Auswahl des geeigneten Dampfs 202 3.11.7 Praxis der Reinstdampfherstellung – Industrie und ISPE-Baseline 203 3.11.8 Verfahren zur Einhaltung und zum Nachweis der Qualität 204 3.11.8.1 Grundlagen der Sterilisation 204 3.11.8.2 Prüfung der Dampfqualität 208 3.11.8.3 Entgasung 210 3.11.8.4 Tröpfchenabscheidung 212 3.11.8.5 Messung der Leitfähigkeit 212 3.11.8.6 Endotoxin-Challenge-Test 213 3.11.9 Reinstdampfsysteme 213 3.11.9.1 Material- und Oberflächenanforderungen an Reinstdampferzeuger und Reinstdampfsysteme 213 3.11.9.2 Design von Reinstdampfnetzen 214 3.11.9.3 Passivierung von Reinstdampfsystemen 215 3.11.9.4 Qualifizierung von Reinstdampferzeugern und Reinstdampfsystemen 219 3.11.10 Abkürzungsverzeichnis 221 3.11.11 Literatur 222 3.12 Messdatenerfassung und statistische Datenanalyse 222Rüdiger Gössl 3.12.1 Datenerfassung und -management 223 3.12.2 Statistische Datenanalysen 225 3.12.3 FDA Process Analytical Technology – PAT 229 3.12.4 Literatur 230 4 Pharmazeutische Produktionsprozesse für ausgewählte Arzneiformen 233Hans Brogli 4.1 Zerkleinerungsmaschinen und Mühlen 233 4.1.1 Bedeutung 233 4.1.2 Definition 233 4.1.3 Beschreibung 234 4.1.3.1 Mühlen zur Trockenvermahlung 234 4.1.3.2 Mühlen zur Nassvermahlung 235 4.1.3.3 Rührwerkskugelmühlen (RWKM), Ringspaltkugelmühlen 237 4.1.4 Spezifische pharmazeutische Anforderungen 239 4.1.5 Technische Umsetzung 240 4.1.5.1 O-Ring-Abdichtungen 240 4.1.5.2 Wellenabdichtungen 240 4.1.5.3 Rohrleitungen 241 4.1.5.4 Metallische Werkstoffe 241 4.1.6 Zugehörige Elemente, Armaturen und Instrumentierung 242 4.1.7 Bewertungskriterien für alternative Mahlprozesse 242 4.1.8 Literatur 243 4.2 Produktion fester Arzneiformen 243Jochen Thies 4.2.1 Produktionsablauf 243 4.2.2 Herstellung von Tabletten 245Guido Radtke 4.2.2.1 Direkttablettierung 245 4.2.2.2 Granulierung 246 4.2.2.3 Tablettierprozess 247 4.2.2.4 Filmtabletten 248 4.2.3 Herstellung vonKapseln 249 4.2.4 Mischen, hier Freifallmischer 252Jochen Thies 4.2.4.1 Definitionen 253 4.2.4.2 Beschreibung verschiedener Mischer 254 4.2.4.3 Spezifische pharmazeutische Anforderungen 257 4.2.4.4 Periphere Elemente, Instrumentierung, Automation 259 4.2.4.5 Alternative Prozesse 260 4.2.5 Sieb- und Mahlmaschinen 261 4.2.5.1 Beschreibung 262 4.2.5.2 Spezifische pharmazeutische Anforderungen 264 4.2.6 Granulation und Trocknung 264 4.2.6.1 High-Shear-Granulation 265 4.2.6.2 Trocknung mit Luft 266 4.2.6.3 Trocknung im Vakuum 266 4.2.6.4 Aspekte der Fluidisation in Wirbelschichten 270 4.2.6.5 Der High-Shear-Granulierer 270 4.2.6.6 Wirbelschichttrockner 275 4.2.6.7 Der Trockenschrank 280 4.2.6.8 Der Ein-Topf-Granulierer 281 4.2.6.9 Wirbelschichtgranulierer 285 4.2.7 Coating und Dragieren 289 4.2.7.1 Durchmischung 290 4.2.7.2 Flüssigkeitszerstäubung 291 4.2.7.3 Theorie der feuchten Luft 293 4.2.7.4 Dragierkessel 295 4.2.7.5 Teilperforierte Trommel 297 4.2.7.6 Vollperforierte Trommel 297 4.2.7.7 Spezifische pharmazeutische Anforderungen 301 4.2.8 Periphere Elemente 303 4.2.8.1 Zuluft- und Abluftaufbereitung 303 4.2.8.2 Sicherheit und Explosionsschutz 304 4.2.9 Spezielle pharmazeutische Anforderungen – Reinigung 305 4.2.9.1 Manuelle Reinigung und Washing-in-Place 305 4.2.9.2 Cleaning-in-Place-Systeme 306 4.2.9.3 Trocknung von Coatern und Wirbelschicht 307 4.2.9.4 CIP-Wasser-Aufbereitung 308 4.2.10 Spezielle pharmazeutische Anforderungen – Steuerung 310 4.2.10.1 Reproduzierbare Prozessführung 310 4.2.10.2 Bedienerebenen 311 4.2.10.3 Chargenprotokoll 313 4.2.11 Literatur 313 4.3 Produktion flüssiger und halbfester Arzneiformen 314Reinhold Bucher und Ralph Diodone 4.3.1 Homogenisatoren, Dispergiersysteme, Prozessanlagen 314 4.3.1.1 Bedeutung der Produktionsanlage im Prozessablauf bei der Herstellung 314 4.3.1.2 Homogenisieren 315 4.3.1.3 Pulverdosierung 316 4.3.1.4 Dispergieren, Deagglomerieren und Emulgieren 316 4.3.1.5 Wärmeübergang 317 4.3.1.6 Produktentlüftung/Entgasung 317 4.3.1.7 Beschreibung des Geräts, der Maschine und der Anlage 318 4.3.1.8 Spezifische pharmazeutische Anforderungen an die Anlage 321 4.3.1.9 Technische Umsetzung 326 4.3.1.10 Ausführungsbeispiele für Prozessanlagen 329 4.3.1.11 Bewertungskriterien für alternative Prozesse und Anlagen 332 4.3.1.12 Literatur 332 4.3.2 Flüssige Arzneiformen 333Fritjof Evers 4.3.2.1 Lösungen 333 4.3.2.2 Suspensionen (Schüttelmixturen) 337 4.3.2.3 Lotionen (Emulsionen) 340 4.3.2.4 Literatur 346 4.3.3 Halbfeste Arzneiformen 346Heinrich Koch 4.3.3.1 Salben 346 4.3.3.2 Gele 350 4.3.3.3 Pasten 353 4.4 Produkte steriler und aseptischer Arzneiformen 354Oliver Kayser 4.4.1 Biotechnologische Herstellung rekombinanter Arzneimittel 354 4.4.1.1 Herstellung biotechnologischer Produkte 356 4.4.1.2 Produktionslinien 356 4.4.1.3 Vektorsysteme 357 4.4.1.4 Produktion und Bioprozesstechnik 358 4.4.1.5 Extraktion und Anreicherung 360 4.4.1.6 Validierung des Herstellungsprozesses 360 4.4.1.7 Literatur 363 4.4.2 Blutpräparate 363Andreas Greinacher 4.4.2.1 Erythrocytenkonzentrate 365 4.4.2.2 Thrombocytenkonzentrate 369 4.4.2.3 Granulocytenkonzentrate 370 4.4.2.4 Gefrorenes Frischplasma (GFP) 371 4.4.2.5 Plasmafraktionierung 372 4.4.2.6 Literatur 379 4.4.3 Gefriertrocknung 380Peter Haseley 4.4.3.1 Bedeutung der Produktionsanlage im Prozessablauf der Herstellung 380 4.4.3.2 Definition 380 4.4.3.3 Beschreibung der Maschine und der Anlage 382 4.4.3.4 Spezifische pharmazeutische Anforderungen an die Anlage 383 4.4.3.5 Technische Umsetzung anhand typischer Beispiele 393 4.4.3.6 Einzelne Elemente der Produktionsanlage und periphere Anlagen 395 4.4.3.7 Bewertungskriterien für alternative Prozesse und Anlagen 397 4.4.3.8 Abkürzungen 398 4.4.3.9 Literatur 398 4.4.4 Füll- und Verschließmaschine zur Produktion flüssiger und steriler Arzneiformen – Beispiel für Zweikammerspritzensysteme 399Sigrid Lieb 4.4.4.1 Bedeutung einer Füll- und Verschließmaschine im Prozessablauf einer sterilen Herstellung 399 4.4.4.2 Prozessablauf Produktion Zweikammerspritzen 400 4.4.4.3 Beschreibung einer Spritzenfüll- und Verschließmaschine 402 4.4.4.4 Spezifische pharmazeutische Anforderungen 413 4.4.4.5 Technische Umsetzung anhand typischer Beispiele 415 4.4.4.6 Isolatortechnik 417 4.4.4.7 Abkürzungen 421 4.4.4.8 Literatur 421 Glossar 423 Sachregister 429

Read more less

Book SynopsisSurveying and comparing all techniques relevant for practical applications in surface and thin film analysis, this second edition of a bestseller is a vital guide to this hot topic in nano- and surface technology. This new book has been revised and updated and is divided into four parts - electron, ion, and photon detection, as well as scanning probe microscopy. New chapters have been added to cover such techniques as SNOM, FIM, atom probe (AP),and sum frequency generation (SFG). Appendices with a summary and comparison of techniques and a list of equipment suppliers make this book a rapid reference for materials scientists, analytical chemists, and those working in the biotechnological industry. From a Review of the First Edition (edited by Bubert and Jenett) "... a useful resource..." (Journal of the American Chemical Society)Trade Review"...a useful resource..." Journal of the American Chemical SocietyTable of ContentsPreface INTRODUCTION PART I: Electron Detection X-RAY PHOTOELECTRON SPECTROSCOPY (XPS) Principles Instrumentation Spectral Information and Chemical Shifts Quantification, Depth Profiling, and Imaging The Auger Parameter Applications Ultraviolet Photoelectron Spectroscopy (UPS) AUGER ELECTRON SPECTROSCOPY (AES) Principles Instrumentation Spectral Information Quantification and Depth Profiling Applications Scanning Auger Microscopy (SAM) ELECTRON ENERGY-LOSS SPECTROSCOPY (EELS) AND ENERGY-FILTERING TRANSMISSION ELECTRON MICROSCOPY (EFTEM) Principles Instrumentation Qualitative Spectral Information Quantification Imaging of Element Distribution Summary LOW-ENERGY ELECTRON DIFFRACTION (LEED) Principles and History Qualitative Information Quantitative Structural Information Low-Energy Electron Microscopy OTHER ELECTRON-DETECTING TECHNIQUES Ion (Excited) Auger Electron Spectroscopy (IAES) Ion Neutralization Spectroscopy (INS) Inelastic Electron Tunneling Spectroscopy (IETS) PART II: Ion Detection STATIC SECONDARY ION MASS SPECTROMETRY (SSIMS) Principles Instrumentation Quantification Spectral Information Applications DYNAMIC SECONDARY ION MASS SPECTROMETRY (SIMS) Principles Instrumentation Spectral Information Quantification Mass Spectra Depth Profiles Imaging Three-Dimensional (3-D)-SIMS Applications ELECTRON-IMPACT (EI) SECONDARY NEUTRAL MASS SPECTROMETRY (SNMS) Introduction General Principles of SNMS Instrumentation and Methods Spectral Information and Quantification Element Depth Profiling Applications LASER SECONDARY NEUTRAL MASS SPECTROMETRY (LASER-SNMS) Principles Instrumentation Spectral Information Quantification Applications RUTHERFORD BACKSCATTERING SPECTROSCOPY (RBS) Introduction Principles Instrumentation Spectral Information Quantification Figures of Merit Applications Related Techniques LOW-ENERGY ION SCATTERING (LEIS) Principles Instrumentation LEIS Information Quantification Applications of LEIS ELASTIC RECOIL DETECTION ANALYSIS (ERDA) Introduction Fundamentals Particle Identification Methods Equipment Data Analysis Sensitivity and Depth Resolution Applications NUCLEAR REACTION ANALYSIS (NRA) Introduction Principles Equipment and Depth Resolution Applications FIELD ION MICROSCOPY (FIM) AND ATOM PROBE (AP) Introduction Principles and Instrumentation Applications OTHER ION-DETECTING TECHNIQUES Desorption Methods Glow-Discharge Mass Spectroscopy (GD-MS) Fast-Atom Bombardment Mass Spectroscopy (FABMS) PART III: Photon Detection TOTAL-REFLECTION X-RAY DLUORESCENCE (TXRF) ANALYSIS Principles Instrumentation Spectral Information Quantification Applications ENERGY-DISPERSIVE X-RAY SPECTROSCOPY (EDXS) Principles Practical Aspects of X-Ray Microanalysis and Instrumentation Qualitative Spectral Information Quantification Imaging and Element Distribution Summary GRAZING INCIDENCE X-RAY METHODS FOR NEAR-SURFACE STRUCTURAL STUDIES Principles Experimental Techniques and Data Analysis Applications GLOW DISCHARGE OPTICAL EMISSION SPECTROSCOPY (GD-OES) Principles Instrumentation Spectral Information Quantification Depth Profiling Applications SURFACE ANALYSIS BY LASER ABLATION Introduction Instrumentation Depth Profiling Near-Field Ablation Conclusion ION BEAM SPECTROCHEMICAL ANALYSIS (IBSCA) Principles Instrumentation Spectral and Analytical Information Quantitative Analysis by IBSCA Applications REFLECTION ABSORPTION IR SPECTROSCOPY (RAIRS) Instrumentation Principles Applications Related Techniques SURFACE RAMAN SPECTROSCOPY Principles Surface-Enhanced Raman Scattering (SERS) Instrumentation Spectral Information Quantification Applications Nonlinear Optical Spectroscopy UV-VIS-IR ELLIPSOMETRY (ELL) Principles Instrumentation Applications SUM FREQUENCY GENERATION (SFG) SPECTROSCOPY Introduction to SFG Spectroscopy SFG Theory SFG Instrumentation and Operation Modes Applications of SFG Spectroscopy and Selected Case Studies Conclusion OTHER PHOTON-DETECTING TECHNIQUES Appearance Potential Methods Inverse Photoemission Spectroscopy (IPES) and Bremsstrahlung PART IV: Scanning Probe Microscopy INTRODUCTION ATOMIC FORCE MICROSCOPY (AFM) Principles Further Modes of AFM Operations Instrumentation Applications SCANNING TUNNELING MICROSCOPY (STM) Principles Instrumentation Lateral and Spectroscopy Information Applications SCANNING NEAR-FIELD OPTICAL MICROSCOPY (SNOM) Introduction Instrumentation and Operation SNOM Applications Outlook APPENDIX Summary and Comparison of Techniques Surface and Thin-Film Analytical Equipment Suppliers

Read more less

Book SynopsisZunächst stehen bei der Havarie technischer Systeme die Fragen nach Sicherheit und Kosten im Vordergrund. Aber erst durch die systematische Analyse der schadensauslösenden Mechanismen bekommt man den Schlüssel zur nachhaltigen Prophylaxe in die Hand. Das defekte Bauteil ist der „Datenträger“ für den Werkstoff und seinen Zustand sowie für die Beanspruchungen, die er erfahren hat und für den Mechanismus seines Versagens. Die Untersuchungsmethoden der Materialwissenschaft und Werkstofftechnik sind in der Lage, diese Informationen zu entschlüsseln. Durch einen Ist/Soll-Vergleich lässt sich der Schadensauslöser dingfest machen. Das vorliegende Buch ist aus einem gleichnamigen Seminar hervorgegangen. Dieses Seminar hat in mehr als 30 Jahren gezeigt, dass Schadensfälle in überwiegender Zahl auf Zuwiderhandeln gegen bekannte Regeln der Technik beruhen. Daher liegt der Fokus dieses Nachschlagewerks auf der systematischen Gliederung des Fachgebietes und der anschaulichen Erklärung der Schadensmechanismen in der Theorie sowie durch die praktische Darstellung realer Schadensfälle. Diese Kenntnisse sind für Konstrukteure und Produktionstechniker ebenso von Interesse wie für Qualitäts- und Schadensanalytiker.Trade Review"Der Band gilt als Standardwerk, und die Herausgeber (...) garantieren höchste Praxisrelevanz. Sie kommen aus der Praxis, erläutern bestens verständlich das umfassende Thema und wissen einfach, woraus es ankommt." Wotech-technical-media.de (07.01.2016) "Das Buch sei allen Werkstofffachleuten und an Werkstofffragen interessierten Maschinenbauingenieuren auch in seiner 6.Auflage wärmstens als Lehrbuch und als Nachschlagewerk empfohlen." Konstruktion (01.03.2015) "Das zusammengetragene Wissen ist für Konstrukteure, Ingenieure und Techniker ebenso interessant und nützlich wie für Schadensanalytiker und Verantwortliche im Qualitäts-Management." Materials and Corrosion (2014, Nr. 8) "In der 6. Auflage gibt es nun noch mehr Beispiele aus der Praxis." Konstruktion (#5-2014, 01.05.2014)Table of ContentsVorgehensweise bei der Bearbeitung eines Schadensfalles Einteilung, Ursachen und Kennzeichen der Bruche Werkstoffuntersuchungen Elektronenmikroskopie bei der Schadensanalyse Mikroskopische und makroskopische Erscheinungsformen des duktilen Gewaltbruchs Mikroskopische und makroskopische Erscheinungsformen des Spaltbruchs Makroskopische Erscheinungsformen des Schwingbruchs Mikroskopische Erscheinungsformen des Schwingbruchs Thermisch induzierte Bruche Korrosionsschaden an metallischen Werkstoffen ohne mechanische Beanspruchung Korrosionsschaden bei zusatzlicher mechanischer Beanspruchung Schaden durch Wasserstoff Schaden durch Hochtemperaturkorrosion Werkstoffschaden durch Verschlei? Schaden an Schwei?nahten Bruchmechanik in der Schadensanalyse Schaden an Druckbehaltern Schadensuntersuchungen und Problemlosungen mit Oberflachenanalyse

Read more less

Book SynopsisDieses praxisorientierte Lehrbuch für Ingenieurstudenten der höheren Semester gibt einen Überblick über die ganzheitliche und vertiefte Betrachtungsweise des Apparate Entwurfes. Wärmeübertragung/Wärmeübertrager sind elementare Bestandteile in den Studienrichtungen Verfahrenstechnik und Maschinenbau, aber auch angrenzenden Studienrichtungen. Für diese Studienfächer steht eine ausreichende Anzahl guter Fachliteratur zur Verfügung, die die Lehre bei der wärmetechnischen Auslegung, der Druckverlustberechnung und dem konstruktiven Entwurf unterstützt. Für darüber hinausgehende Themen steht wenig Zeit zur Verfügung oder sie sind nicht Inhalt des Lehrstoffes. Diese Begrenzung der Stoffvermittlung soll mit vorliegendem Fachbuch etwas gelockert werden und im Sinne einer ganzheitlichen Betrachtung den Studierenden einen kleinen Einblick in Themenkreise gewähren, die den Lebenslauf eines Wärmeübertragers charakterisieren. Anhand eines praktischen Beispiels werden nach der üblichen Auslegung des Apparates Grundlagen für den konstruktiven Entwurf diskutiert, die festigkeitsmäßige Bemessung der Bauteile behandelt und die Konstruktion vorgestellt. Anschließend erfolgt ein Überblick über die Fertigung und Montage des Wärmeübertragers und endet mit der Instandhaltung/Instandsetzung und ihren Problemen und Anforderungen. Neben der Anwendung von Wissen aus den Grundlagenfächern soll aber vor allem die Themenhandlung den Studierenden als Ergänzung zum Vorlesungsstoff dienen und ihren Gesichtskreis erweitern. Dadurch wird dieses Buch ein unverzichtbares Lehrbuch für alle Dozenten und Studenten höheren Semesters der Verfahrenstechnik, Maschinenbau, sowie für Ingenieure der Chemie, Maschinenbau und Verfahrenstechnik.Trade Review"eine ganzheitliche und exemplarisch vertiefte Betrachtungsweise des Apparate-Entwurfs" PROCESS (9/2013, 01.09.2013), process.vogel.de (19.07.2013)Table of ContentsVorwort XI 1 Aufgabenstellung „Auslegung und Konstruktion eines Rohrbündel-Wärmeübertragers (RWÜ)“ 1 1.1 Allgemeine Voraussetzungen für die Auslegung eines RWÜ 1 1.2 Hinweise zur Aufgabenstellung 1 1.3 Aufgabenstellung mit Detailangaben: 2 1.4 Hinweise zur Lösungsmethodik 4 2 Wärmetechnische Auslegung des RWÜ 7 2.1 Allgemeines 7 2.2 Verwendete Formelzeichen und Kenngrößen 11 2.3 Ausgangsdiskussion 14 2.3.1 Gegebene Größen 15 2.3.2 Stoffwerte aus der erweiterten Aufgabenstellung 17 2.4 Überschlägige Berechnung der erforderlichen Wärmeübertragungsfläche 17 2.4.1 Ermittlung des abzuleitenden Wärmestromes Q_ 17 2.4.2 Berechnung der erforderlichen Kühlwassermenge m_ 2 18 2.4.3 Wahl des Wärmedurchgangskoeffizientenk 19 2.4.4 Ermittlung der mittleren logarithmischen Temperaturdifferenz Ddm 20 2.4.5 Berechnung der erforderlichen Wärmeübertragungsfläche Aerf 24 2.4.6 Begründung der Medienführung 24 2.4.7 Aussagen zur Verschmutzung von Wärmeübertragungsflächen 25 2.5 Grundlagen für die konstruktive Ausführung 29 2.5.1 Anordnung und Abmessung der Innenrohre 30 2.5.2 Anzahl der Rohre und Länge des Rohrbündels 34 2.6 Nachweise für den Rohrraum und den Mantelraum 38 2.6.1 Wärmeübertragung im Rohrraum 39 2.6.1.1 Ermittlung der Reynoldszahl Re 40 2.6.1.2 Ermittlung der Nusselt-Zahl Nui 40 2.6.1.3 Ermittlung der Wärmeübergangszahl ai 43 2.6.2 Wärmeübertragung im Mantelraum ohne Einbauten 43 2.6.3 Wärmeübertragung im Mantelraum mit Einbauten 45 2.6.3.1 Auswahl der Einbauelemente 45 2.6.3.2 Notwendige Ergebniskorrekturen 47 2.6.3.3 Auslegung der Umlenksegmente 49 2.6.3.4 Ermittlung der Reynoldszahl Rea 52 2.6.3.5 Ermittlung der Nusselt-Zahl Nua 54 2.6.3.6 Ermittlung der Wärmeübergangszahl aa im Außenraum 62 2.6.3.7 Ermittlung der Wärmedurchgangszahlk 63 2.7 Nachweis der Wandtemperatur 65 2.8 Korrektur der Wärmeübertragungsfläche 67 2.9 Kompensatorkriterium 69 2.9.1 Festlegungen in WN 75-0094 Höchst AG [37] 70 2.9.1.1 Kaltes Medium um die Rohre 70 2.9.1.2 Warmes Medium um die Rohre 71 2.9.2 Vorgehensweise in der Fachliteratur 72 2.9.3 Berechnung nach AD 2000-Merkblatt S 3/7 [45] 75 2.10 Zusammenfassung der wärmetechnischen Auslegung 78 3 Druckverlustberechnung im Mantel- und im Rohrraum des RWÜ 83 3.1 Druckverlust im Rohrraum DpRR 84 3.1.1 Druckverlust beim Einströmen in die Eintrittskammer DpE 85 3.1.2 Druckverlust beim Einströmen in die Rohre DpER 88 3.1.3 Druckverlust beim Durchströmen der Rohre DpR 90 3.1.4 Druckverlust beim Ausströmen aus den Rohren DpAR 93 3.1.5 Druckverlust infolge Umlenkung in den Kammern DpU 94 3.1.6 Druckverlust beim Ausströmen aus der Austrittskammer DpA 94 3.1.7 Gesamtdruckverlust im Rohrraum DpRR 95 3.2 Druckverlust im Mantelraum des RWÜ mit Einbauten 97 3.2.1 Druckverlust in den Mantelstutzen DpS 104 3.2.2 Druckverlust in einer Endzone DpQE 105 3.2.3 Druckverlust in der Querströmungszone DpQ 112 3.2.4 Druckverlust in einer Fensterzone DpF 117 3.2.5 Gesamtdruckverlust im Mantelraum 120 3.3 Ergebnis der strömungstechnischen Berechnungen 120 4 Überlegungen zum konstruktiven Entwurf 125 4.1 Allgemeine Vorgehensweise 125 4.2 Berücksichtigung von Gestaltungsanforderungen 127 4.2.1 Funktionsgerechte Gestaltung des RWÜ 127 4.2.2 Werkstoffgerechte Gestaltung des RWÜ 128 4.2.3 Beanspruchungsgerechte Gestaltung des RWÜ 130 4.2.4 Fertigungsgerechte Gestaltung des RWÜ 131 4.2.5 Prüfgerechte Gestaltung und Prüfungen im Lebenslauf des RWÜ 134 4.2.6 Transport- und montagegerechte Gestaltung des RWÜ 135 4.2.7 Wartungs- und instandhaltungsgerechte Gestaltung des RWÜ 139 5 Konstruktive Aufgabenstellung 141 6 Rechnerische Nachweise für die Apparateelemente 145 6.1 Grundlagen 145 6.2 Formelzeichen und Einheiten 147 6.3 Ermittlung von Berechnungswerten [6] 148 6.3.1 Berechnungsdruck p 148 6.3.2 Berechnungstemperatur #, T 149 6.3.3 Festigkeitskennwert K 149 6.3.4 Sicherheitsbeiwert S 149 6.3.5 Ausnutzung der zulässigen Berechnungsspannung in Fügeverbindungen, Faktor zur Berücksichtigung von Verschwächungen n 150 6.3.6 Zuschläge 150 6.3.6.1 Zuschlag zur Berücksichtigung der Wanddickenunterschreitung c1 150 6.3.6.2 Abnutzungszuschlag c2 151 6.4 Werkstoffauswahl 151 6.5 Berechnungsparameter 151 6.6 Berechnung der Apparateelemente 153 6.6.1 Zylindrische Wandung (Mantel) unter innerem Überdruck 153 6.6.2 Gewölbte Böden unter innerem Überdruck 156 6.6.3 Rohrbündelrohre 158 6.6.3.1 Bemessung auf inneren Überdruck 158 6.6.3.2 Bemessung auf äußeren Überdruck 159 6.6.4 Berechnung der Rohrböden 161 6.6.5 Bemessung der Flanschverbindungen 165 6.7 Stabilitätsberechnung 167 6.7.1 Lokale Lasteinleitung durch die Sattellager 168 6.7.1.1 Tragfähigkeitsnachweis für den Zylinder 170 6.7.1.2 Nachweis des Sattellagers 172 6.7.2 Tragfähigkeitsnachweis für die Tragösen und ihren Anschluss 172 6.7.3 Zusatzbelastungen durch Einzelkräfte 177 7 Konstruktion des RWÜ 181 7.1 Konstruktionszeichnung 181 7.2 Entwurfsprüfung 181 8 Fertigung des Rohrbündel-Wärmeübertragers 185 8.1 Wesentliche Einzelteile zur RWÜ-Fertigung 186 8.1.1 Gewölbte Böden 186 8.1.2 Ebene Böden 190 8.1.3 Flanschverbindungen 197 8.1.4 Rohre 202 8.2 Wesentliche allgemeine Fertigungsschritte 203 8.2.1 Fertigung des Mantels 203 8.2.2 Verbindung Rohre/Rohrboden 205 8.2.2.1 Einschweißen der Rohre 206 8.2.2.2 Einwalzen der Rohre 212 8.2.2.3 Hydraulisches Aufweiten der Rohre 216 8.2.2.4 Verbindung Rohr/Rohrboden durch Kombination verschiedener Befestigungsarten 217 8.3 Schlussprüfung und Druckprüfung 219 8.3.1 Schlussprüfung 219 8.3.2 Druckprüfung 220 8.4 Oberflächensauberkeit und Oberflächenschutz 220 8.5 Korrosionsschutzanstrich 224 8.6 Fertigungstechnologie des RWÜ DN 400 225 8.6.1 Fertigung der Ein- und Austrittshauben 225 8.6.2 Fertigung des Mantels 226 8.6.3 Fertigung des Rohrbündels 226 8.6.4 Zusammenbau 227 8.6.5 Abschlussarbeiten 227 9 Transport und Montage des RWÜ 229 9.1 Transport 229 9.2 Montage 231 10 Wärmedämmung 233 10.1 Allgemeine Aussagen 233 10.2 Dämmung als Berührungsschutz für den RWÜ DN 400 238 11 Instandsetzung von Rohrbündel-Wärmeübertragern – Schadensbehebung durch Reinigung 241 11.1 Allgemeines 241 11.2 Logistische Vorleistungen für die mechanische Reinigung von RWÜ 243 11.3 Mechanische Reinigung von RWÜ 248 11.3.1 Hochdruckwasserstrahlreinigung 249 11.3.2 Hochdruckreinigung unter Einsatz entsprechender Reinigungskörper 254 11.3.3 Reinigungsverfahren mit rotierenden Werkzeugen 262 11.4 Chemische Reinigung von RWÜ 262 11.4.1 Allgemeines 262 11.4.2 Anwendung auf den RWÜ DN 400 263 11.5 Thermische Reinigung 266 11.6 Trockeneisreinigung 267 11.7 In-situ-Reinigung von RWÜ 270 12 Instandsetzung von Rohrbündel-Wärmeübertragern – Schadensbehebung durch Verstopfen, Rohraustausch oder Neuberohrung 273 12.1 Allgemeines 273 12.2 Schäden an Rohrbündel-Wärmeübertragern und Schadensbehebung 273 12.2.1 Einsetzen von Stopfen 276 12.2.2 Ersatz einzelner Rohre 281 12.2.3 Neuberohrung 284 12.2.4 Sanierung von Rohrböden 288 Anhang 1 Bezeichnungen und Begriffe für Werkstoffe Kurzzeichen in Werkstoffbezeichnungen 293 Anhang 2 Zusammenstellung der Prüfbescheinigungen nach EN 1024:2004 (D) 295 Anhang 3 Kennwerte für die Bemessung der Rohre nach DIN EN 10 216-1, und DIN EN 10 217-1 (AD 2000-Merkblatt W 4 Tafel A 2) 297 Anhang 4 Kennwerte für Flacherzeugnisse nach DIN EN 10 028-2, Mindestwerte der Dehngrenze Rp0,2 bei erhöhten Temperaturen 299 Anhang 5 Verschwächungsbeiwert vA bei sA=Di ¼ 0,01 AD 2000-Merkblatt B 9 301 Anhang 6 Verschwächungsbeiwert vA bei sA=Di ¼ 0,05 AD 2000-Merkblatt B 9 303 Anhang 7 Verschwächungsbeiwert vA für sA= Di 2 ¼ 0,10 AD 2000-Merkblatt B 9 305 Anhang 8 Berechnungsbeiwerte b für gewölbte Böden in Klöpperform nachAD 2000-Merkblatt B 3 307 Anhang 9 Einsatzgrenzen für Stahlflansche nach DIN EN 1092-1 309 Anhang 10 Diagramme zur Ermittlung der Beiwerte K für Tragösen nach TGL 32903/17 [47] und RKF BR – A 62 [48] 311 Schlussbetrachtung 313 Index 315

Read more less

Book Synopsis"Nanowerkstoffe für Einsteiger" hält, was der Titel verspricht: Eine leichtverständliche Einführung zu Nanowerkstoffen für alle, die sich mit den Grundlagen und dem Potential dieser vielseitigen Materialklasse vertraut machen möchten, ohne allzu tief in die physikalischen und chemischen Details einzusteigen. Nanowerkstoffe sind Materialien wie Metalle, Legierungen, Keramiken oder Polymere, in denen mindestens eine Längendimension kleiner als 100 Nanometer ist. In diesem Längenbereich zeigen diese Materialien ganz besondere und fein einstellbare optische, elektrische und mechanische Eigenschaften, die auf der makroskopischen Skala nicht zutage treten. Eine Vielzahl von Anwendungen an der Schnittstelle zwischen Materialwissenschaft, Chemie, Physik und Biologie ist bereits in kommerziell erhältliche Produkte umgesetzt worden. Jedes Kapitel beginnt mit einer Einführung in den Lernstoff "In diesem Kapitel" und endet mit einer Zusammenfassung "Wichtig zu wissen". In die Tiefe gehende Erklärungen sind in Boxen aufgenommen und können so leicht ausgelassen werden.Trade Review"Das kompakte Buch führt in die Grundlagen des Themas verständlich ein." Allgemeines Ministerialblatt (30.09.2015) "Das Buch macht neugierig, vermittelt die Grundlagen zu den Nanowerkstoffen und gibt Hinweise für ein vertiefendes Studium." Materials and Corrosion (2015/66/Nr.3) "(D)er Einsteiger (wird) mit leicht verständlichen Zusammenfassungen zu jedem Abschnitt und illustrierenden Beispielen an das Thema herangeführt." BGRCI.magazin (01.05.2015/Nr.5-6) "Das Buch Nanowerkstoffe für Einsteiger hält, was der Titel verspricht: eine leichtverständliche Einführung zu Nanowerkstoffen für alle, die sich mit den Grundlagen und dem Potential dieser vielseitigen Materialklasse vertraut machen möchten, ohne allzu tief in die physikalischen und chemischen Details einzusteigen." Giesserei (02.05.2015/Nr.6.) "Nanowerkstoffen gehört die Zukunft, ermöglichen sie doch eine enorme Bandbreite an Anwendungen für unterschiedlichste Bereiche. Eine Einführung in die Thematik fehlte aber bisher, die das Thema für Quereinsteiger oder Ingenieure, kompakt und verständlich erläuterte - ohne dabei zu tief in chemische oder physikalische Details einzusteigen. Diese Lücke schließt dieser Band in hervorragender Weise." METALL (Juni 2015) "Nanowerkstoffe für Einsteiger ist eine gut lesbare Einführung in viele aktuelle Gebiete der Nanotechnologie und deren interdisziplinären Einfluss auf die Chemie, Physik, Biologie und die Materialwissenschaften." Kunststoffe (Mai 2015) "Ein ideales Werk, das in das hochaktuelle Fachgebiet der Nanowerkstoffe kompetent einführt." Materials Testing MP (15.05.2015) Table of ContentsVorwort EINFUHRUNG NANOMATERIALIEN Nanoteilchen - Nanokomposite Elementare Konsequenzen der kleinen Teilchengro?en Makroskopische Nanowerkstoffe OBERFLACHEN VON NAONOWERKSTOFFEN Allgemeine Betrachtungen Oberflachenenergie Einfluss der Krummung auf den Dampfdruck - Dampfdruck kleiner Teilchen Technische Anwendung der Oberflachenenergie - Hypothetische Nanomotoren GASPHASENSYNTHESE VON NANOTEILCHEN UND NANOKOMPOSITEN Grundlegende Betrachtungen Syntheseverfahren ohne zusatzliches elektrisches Feld Plasmaverfahren Flammensynthesen Synthese beschichteter Teilchen EIN- UND ZWEIDIMENSIONALE NANOTEILCHEN Grundsatzliche Betrachtungen Beispiele ein- und zweidimensionaler Teilchen Nanostrukturen aufgebaut aus in Schichten kristallisierenden Materialien NANOFLUIDE Grundlagen Nanofluide zur Verbesserung des Warmeuberganges Ferrofluide THERMODYNAMIK VON NANOTEILCHEN Thermodynamik kleiner Teilchen Phasentransformationen bei Nanoteilchen Warmekapazitat von Nanoteilchen Thermische Instabilitaten in Verbindung mit Phasentransformationen MAGNETISCHE NANOMATERIALIEN - SUPERPARAMAGNETISMUS Magnetische Materialien Physikalische Grundlagen des Superparamagnetismus Magnetische Anisotropie der Werkstoffe Superparamagnetische Werkstoffe in der experimentellen Realitat Mo?bauer-Spektrum superparamagnetischer Teilchen Ausgewahlte Anwendungen von superparamagnetischen Teilchen Austauschgekoppelte magnetische Nanowerkstoffe OPTISCHE EIGENSCHAFTEN Einfuhrende Anmerkungen Einstellung des Brechungsindex und visuell transparente optische UV-Absorber Gro?enabhangige optische Eigenschaften - Quanteneinschlussphanomene Halbleitende Nanoteilchen - Quanteneinschluss Lumineszenz wechselwirkender Teilchen Lumineszierende Nanokomposite Metallische Nanoteilchen - Plasmonenresonanz Auswahl eines Luminophors oder Absorbers in Hinblick auf technische Anwendungen Elektrolumineszenz Foto- und elektrochromeMaterialien Magnetooptische Anwendungen ELEKTRISCHE EIGENSCHAFTEN Elektrische Leitfahigkeit nanoskaliger Systeme: Diffusive und ballistische Leitfahigkeit Experimentelle Befunde zur Leitung des elektrischen Stromes in nanoskaligen Systemen Kohlenstoff-Nanorohrchen und Graphen Weitere eindimensionale elektrische Leiter Elektrische Leitfahigkeit von Nanokompositen MECHANISCHE EIGENSCHAFTEN Einfuhrende Anmerkungen Mechanische Eigenschaften nanokristalliner Materialien Verformungsmechanismen bei nanokristallinen Werkstoffen Superplastizitat Schwingungen von Nanostabchen und Nanorohrchen-Ma?stabsgesetze fur Schwingungen Nanokompositemit Polymer-Matrix CHARAKTERISIERUNG VON NANOMATERIALIEN Spezifische Oberflache Bestimmung der Kristallstruktur Elektronenmikroskopie Stichwortverzeichnis

Read more less

Book SynopsisZu den Polymeren gehören allgegenwärtige Kunststoffe wie Plexiglas, Dichtmassen, Klebestreifen und viele Verpackungsmaterialien. Daher bildet die Vermittlung der Grundlagen polymerer Werkstoffe einen integralen Bestandteil der Curricula der Studienfächer Chemie, Materialwissenschaften und der Ingenieur- und Lebenswissenschaften. Dieses Buch ermöglicht einen leichten Einstieg in die Polymerwissenschaften. Die Polymerklassen Thermoplaste, Duroplaste und Elastomere werden mit ihren Eigenschaften vorgestellt, und den Studierenden wird vermittelt, welche Synthesestrategie zu dem Produkt mit den gewünschten Eigenschaften führt. Die am häufigsten verwendeten Polymere werden anhand alltagsbezogener Beispiele eingeführt. Zahlreiche Tipps und Übungsaufgaben unterstützen beim Lernen. Trade ReviewDieses Lehrbuch bietet nun einen hervorragenden Überblick über die Vielfalt dieser Stoffe. Themen sind Thermoplaste, Duroplaste und Elastomere sowie die entsprechenden Synthesestrategien. METALL, 23.09.2020 Für einen leichten Einstieg in die Polymerwissenschaft en: Vorstellung der wichtigsten Polymerklassen mit den dazugehörigen Synthesestrategien. Alltagsnahe Beispiele und zahlreiche Tipps und Übungsaufgaben unterstützen beim Lernen. Zu den Polymeren gehören allgegenwärtige Kunststoffe wie Plexiglas, Dichtmassen, Klebestreifen und viele Verpackungsmaterialien. Daher bildet die Vermittlung der Grundlagen polymerer Werkstoff e einen integralen Bestandteil der Curricula der Studienfächer Chemie, Materialwissenschaft en und der Ingenieur- und Lebenswissenschaften. Dieses Buch ermöglicht einen leichten Einstieg in die Polymerwissenschaft en. Die Polymerklassen Thermoplaste, Duroplaste und Elastomere werden mit ihren Eigenschaften vorgestellt, und den Studierenden wird vermittelt, welche Synthesestrategie zu dem Produkt mit den gewünschten Eigenschaft en führt. Die am häufigsten verwendeten Polymere werden anhand alltagsbezogener Beispiele eingeführt. Zahlreiche Tipps und Übungsaufgaben unterstützen beim Lernen. Galvanotechnik 12/2023 Eugen G. Leuze VerlagTable of ContentsGeleitwort ix Vorwort xi 1 Grundlagen 1 1.1 Geschichte 1 1.2 Einleitung 4 1.2.1 Begriffe 4 1.2.2 Der Polymerisationsgrad 5 1.2.3 Nomenklatur 7 1.3 Aufbau von Makromolekulen 9 1.3.1 Abfolge derWiederholungseinheiten 9 1.3.2 Topologie 9 1.3.3 Homo- oder Copolymere 10 1.3.4 Isomerie 12 1.4 Molare Massen 23 1.5 Eigenschaften von Polymeren als Festkorper 28 Literatur 30 2 SynthesevonPolymeren 33 2.1 Uberblick und Einteilung 33 2.1.1 Mechanismen der Polymerisation 33 2.1.2 Thermodynamische Voraussetzungen 34 2.2 Kettenpolymerisation 45 2.2.1 Teilreaktionen 45 2.2.2 Lebende Polymerisation 47 2.2.3 Abbruch, Ubertragung und langsamer Start 51 2.3 Ionische Polymerisationen 63 2.3.1 Anionische Polymerisation 65 2.3.2 Kationische Polymerisation 77 2.4 Radikalische Polymerisation 101 2.4.1 Allgemeines 101 2.4.2 Start 102 2.4.3 Wachstum 105 2.4.4 Abbruch 108 2.4.5 Stationarer Zustand und Polymerisationsgrad 110 2.4.6 Ubertragung und Polymerisationsgrad 116 2.4.7 Kontrollierte radikalische Polymerisation 136 2.4.8 Polymerisation in heterogenen Systemen 142 2.5 Polyinsertion 145 2.5.1 Einleitung 145 2.5.2 Cossee-Arlman-Mechanismus 147 2.5.3 Orientierung der Monomere 148 2.5.4 Ziegler-Natta-Katalysatoren 154 2.5.5 Metallocen-Katalysatoren 161 2.5.6 Metathese 173 2.6 Polyaddition und Polykondensation 178 2.6.1 Einleitung 178 2.6.2 Reaktanten 181 2.6.3 Kinetik der Stufenreaktion 184 2.6.4 Polymerisationsgrad und Verteilung 188 2.6.5 Verzweigte und vernetzte Systeme 197 2.7 Copolymerisation 203 2.7.1 Synthese von Copolymeren 203 2.7.2 Statistische Copolymere 205 2.7.3 Block- und Pfropfcopolymere 225 2.8 Reaktionen von Polymeren 234 2.8.1 Polymeranaloge Reaktionen 234 2.8.2 Abbaureaktionen 239 Literatur 241 3 Eigenschaften von Polymeren in Losung 255 3.1 Modelle zur Beschreibung der Abmessungen von Makromolekulen 255 3.1.1 Einleitung 255 3.1.2 Statistisches Knauel und flexible Kette 257 3.1.3 Starres Stabchen und wurmartige Kette 266 3.1.4 Tragheitsradius 271 3.2 Thermodynamik von Polymerlosungen 275 3.2.1 Einfuhrung 275 3.2.2 Ideale Losung 275 3.2.3 Regulare Losung 285 3.2.4 Verhalten idealer Mischungen 300 3.2.5 Verhalten regularer Mischungen 308 3.2.6 Phasendiagramme regularer Mischungen 320 3.2.7 Grenzen des Flory-Huggins-Modells und Exzessgrosen 326 3.2.8 Virialkoeffizienten und Qualitat des Losungsmittels 329 3.2.9 Hydrodynamischer Radius 335 3.2.10 Konzentrationsregime von Polymeren in Losung 338 3.3 Verteilungen 342 3.3.1 Anzahl, Masse und Anteil 342 3.3.2 Mittelwerte und Gewichte 354 3.3.3 Breite der Verteilung 367 3.4 Methoden zur Bestimmung der molaren Massen 371 3.4.1 Einleitung 371 3.4.2 Bestimmung der Endgruppen 371 3.4.3 Osmose 375 3.4.4 Lichtstreuung 384 3.4.5 Ultrazentrifuge 397 3.4.6 Viskositat 415 3.4.7 Methoden zur Bestimmung der Verteilung 423 3.4.8 Zusammenfassung und Vergleich 437 Literatur 439 4 Eigenschaften von Polymeren als Festkorper 445 4.1 Thermische Eigenschaften 445 4.1.1 Einleitung 445 4.1.2 Schmelzen und Kristallisieren 446 4.1.3 Der Glasubergang 450 4.1.4 Kristallisation bei Polymeren 457 4.1.5 Experimentelle Bestimmung der Phasenubergange 458 4.2 Mechanische Eigenschaften 465 4.2.1 Elastisches und plastisches Verhalten 465 4.2.2 Elastische Verformung 465 4.2.3 Plastisches Fliesen 472 4.2.4 Elastizitat und Viskositat 480 4.2.5 Kautschukelastizitat 489 4.3 Grundlagen der Streuung 495 4.3.1 Einleitung 495 4.3.2 Weitwinkelstreuung 507 4.3.3 Kleinwinkelstreuung 514 4.3.4 Zusammenfassung 521 4.4 Mikroskopische Verfahren 522 4.4.1 Einleitung 522 4.4.2 Elektronenmikroskopie 523 4.4.3 Rasterelektronenmikroskopie (REM) 524 4.4.4 Transmissionselektronenmikroskopie (TEM) 528 4.4.5 Rasterkraftmikroskopie (AFM) 533 4.4.6 Zusammenfassung 535 Literatur 536 5 Herstellung und Verwendung von Polymeren alsWerkstoffe 539 5.1 Einleitung 539 5.2 Thermoplaste 541 5.2.1 Amorphe Thermoplaste 541 5.2.2 Semikristalline Thermoplaste 547 5.3 Duroplaste (Harze) 563 5.3.1 Epoxidharz (EP) 563 5.3.2 Ungesattigtes Polyesterharz (UP) und Alkydharze 567 5.3.3 Phenol-Formaldehydharz (PF) 568 5.3.4 Harnstoff- und Melamin-Formaldehydharz (UF und MF) 572 5.3.5 Polyurethan (PUR) 574 5.3.6 Polyimid (PI) 577 5.4 Elastomere 579 5.4.1 Naturkautschuk („natural rubber“, NR) und Synthesekautschuk (Isopren-Rubber, IR) 579 5.4.2 Styrol-Butadien-Kautschuk (SBR) 581 5.4.3 Acrylnitril-Butadien-Kautschuk („nitrile-butadiene rubber“,NBR) 582 5.4.4 Chloropren-Kautschuk („chloroprene rubber“, CR) 583 5.4.5 Ethylen-Propylen-Dien-Kautschuk (EPDM) 583 5.4.6 Polysiloxane/Siliconkautschuk (Q) 584 5.5 Additive und Hilfsmittel 586 5.5.1 Gleitmittel 586 5.5.2 Full- und Verstarkungsstoffe 587 5.5.3 Weichmacher 588 5.5.4 Flammschutzmittel 589 5.5.5 Farbemittel 590 Literatur 591 6 Ausblick: Dendrimere als aktuelles Gebiet der Forschung 595 6.1 Grundlagen 595 6.2 Synthese 596 6.2.1 Divergente Synthese 597 6.2.2 Konvergente Synthese 601 6.3 Eigenschaften der Dendrimere 611 6.4 Anwendungen in der Pharmazie 614 6.4.1 Wirkstoff-Freisetzung 614 6.4.2 Einsatz in bildgebenden Verfahren 615 6.4.3 Einsatz als Mikrobiozide 615 6.5 Zusammenfassung 619 Literatur 619 Stichwortverzeichnis 623

Read more less

Book SynopsisFilling the gap for an up-to-date reference that presents the field of organophosphorus chemistry in a comprehensive and clearly structured way, this one-stop source covers the chemistry, properties, and applications from life science and medicine. Divided into two parts, the first presents the chemistry of various phosphorus-containing compounds and their synthesis, including ylides, acids, and heterocycles. The second part then goes on to look at applications in life science and bioorganic chemistry. Last but not least, such important practical aspects as 31P-NMR and protecting strategies for these compounds are presented. For organic, bioinorganic, and medicinal chemists, as well as those working on organometallics, and for materials scientists. The book, a contributed work, features a team of renowned scientists from around the world whose expertise spans the many aspects of modern organophosphorus chemistry.Table of Contents1 Phosphines and Related Tervalent Phosphorus Systems 1Piet W. N. M. van Leeuwen 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Synthesis of Phosphorus Ligands 3 1.3 Ligand Properties 18 1.4 Rhodium-Catalyzed Hydroformylation with Xantphos-Type Ligands 29 1.5 Cross-Coupling Catalysis with Mono- and Bidentate Phosphines 33 2 Recent Developments in Phosphonium Chemistry 59Mathieu Berchel and Paul-Alain Jaffrès 2.1 Introduction 59 2.2 Synthesis of Phosphonium Salts 60 2.3 Phosphonium Salts as a Tool for Organic Synthesis 70 2.4 Phosphonium Salts for Biological and Medical Applications 84 2.5 Conclusion 102 3 Phosphorus Ylides and Related Compounds 113Alejandro Presa Soto and Joaquín García-Álvarez 3.1 Introduction 113 3.2 Preparation of Phosphorus Ylides 115 3.3 Applications of Phosphorus Ylides in Organic Synthesis 130 3.4 Conclusions 148 Acknowledgments 148 References 148 4 Low-Coordinate Phosphorus Compounds with Phosphaorganic Multiple Bond Systems 163Dietrich Gudat 4.1 Introduction 163 4.2 General Considerations on Structure and Bonding of PC Multiple Bond Systems 165 4.3 Synthetic Approaches 171 4.4 Reactivity 177 4.5 Applications of Phosphorus–Carbon Multiple Bond Systems 184 References 209 5 Pentacoordinate Phosphorus Compounds 219Masaaki Yoshifuji 5.1 History of Pentacoordinate Phosphorus Compounds 219 5.2 Preparation of Pentacoordinate Phosphorus Compounds 221 5.3 Structure of Trigonal Bipyramid and Square Pyramid 228 5.4 Interconversion of Pentacoordinate Phosphorus Compounds 229 5.5 Apicophilicity 232 5.6 Hydrolysis of Phosphate Esters 233 References 235 6 Hexacoordinate Phosphorus Compounds 239Masaaki Yoshifuji 6.1 Preparation and Structure of Hexacoordinate Phosphorus Compounds 239 6.2 Stereochemistry of Hexacoordinate Phosphorus Compounds 241 6.3 Hexacoordinate Compounds with Intramolecular Coordination 242 6.4 Theoretical Studies on Hexacoordinate Phosphorus Compounds 245 6.5 Hexacoordinate Phosphates as Counter Anions for Complex Ligands 245 References 247 7 Methods for the Introduction of the Phosphonate Moiety into Complex Organic Molecules 249Wouter Debrouwer, IrisWauters, and Christian V. Stevens 7.1 Introduction 250 7.2 P—C (sp3) Bond Formation 252 7.3 P—C (sp2) Bond Formation 261 7.4 P—C (sp) Bond Formation 278 7.5 Conclusion 285 References 286 8 Phosphorus Heterocycles 295Viktor Iaroshenko and SatenikMkrtchyan 8.1 Introduction 295 8.2 Five-Membered Phosphorus Heterocycles 296 8.3 Five-Membered Phosphorus Heterocycles with One Phosphorus Atom: 1H-Phospholes and Fused Aromatic Systems Containing Phosphole Ring 296 8.4 Aromaticity of 1H-Phospholes and 1H-Phosphole-Containing Heterocyclic Systems 303 8.6 Synthesis of 1H-Phospholes Following [4+1] and [2+2+1] Synthetic Strategies 307 8.7 Synthesis of Phospholes by [3+2] Cyclization Reaction 312 8.8 Synthesis of 1H-Phospholes by Intramolecular Cyclization Reactions 312 8.9 Synthesis of Phosphorus-Containing Porphyrin Hybrids 316 8.10 Fused Heterocycles with 1H-Phosphole Structural Fragment 317 8.11 Synthesis-Fused 1H-Phospholes Following [4+1] and [2+2+1] Synthetic Strategies 320 8.12 Synthesis of Fused Phospholes Following [3+2] Synthetic Strategies 324 8.13 Synthesis of Fused Phospholes Following Intramolecular Cyclization Strategies 329 8.14 Application of C—H Bond Activation Protocols for the Synthesis of Benzo[b]phosphindoles via Intramolecular Cyclization 339 8.15 Synthesis of π-Conjugated Benzo[b]phosphindoles Following [2+2+2] Cycloaddition Synthetic Strategy 341 8.16 Five-Membered Phosphorus Heterocycles with One Heteroatom 342 8.17 Synthesis of 1,2- and 1,3-Heterophospholes: General Overview 345 8.18 1,2-Azaphospholes 347 8.19 Synthesis of 1,2-Azaphospholes Following [3+2] Synthetic Strategies 351 8.20 Synthesis of Fused 1,2-Azaphospholes via Intramolecular Cyclization Strategy 353 8.21 Synthesis of 1,2-Oxophospholes, 1,2-Thiaphosphols, and 1,2-Selenophosphols 356 8.23 Synthesis of 1,3-Azaphospholes by Intramolecular Cyclization Reactions 362 8.24 Synthesis of 1,3-Oxaphospholes, 1,3-Thiaphospholes, and 1,3-Selenophospholes 365 8.25 Six-Membered Phosphorus Heterocycles 372 8.26 Phosphinines: General Overview 372 8.27 Synthesis of λ3- and λ5-Phosphenines: General Overview 376 8.28 Synthesis of Phosphenines Following [5+1] Synthetic Strategy 378 8.29 Synthesis of Phosphenines Following [4+2] Synthetic Strategy 381 8.30 Synthesis of Phosphenines from Phospholes 388 8.31 Synthesis of Phosphenines Following 1,6-Electrocyclization Strategy 393 8.32 Synthesis of Fused λ3- and λ5-Phosphenines: General Overview 396 8.33 Synthesis of Fused Phosphenines Following [4+2] Synthetic Strategy 397 8.34 Synthesis of Fused Phosphenines by Intramolecular Cyclization 400 8.35 Synthesis of Fused Phosphenines Following [5+1] Synthetic Strategy 401 8.36 Six-Membered Phosphorus Heterocycles with One Heteroatom 404 8.37 Synthesis 1,2-, 1,3-, and 1,4-Heterophosphinines 408 8.38 1,2-Azaphosphenines 408 8.39 Synthesis of 1,2-Azaphosphenines Following [3+1+1+1] Synthetic Strategy 409 8.40 Synthesis of 1,2-Azaphosphenines Following [3+3] Synthetic Strategy 414 8.41 Synthesis of 1,2-Azaphosphenines Following [3+2+1] Synthetic Strategies 414 8.42 Synthesis of 1,2-Azaphosphenines Following [5+1] Synthetic Strategies 414 8.43 Synthesis of 1,2-Azaphosphenines Following [4+2] Synthetic Strategies 415 8.44 Synthesis of 1,2-Azaphosphenines Following Intramolecular Cyclization Strategies 417 8.45 1,3-Azaphosphenines 419 8.46 Synthesis of 1,3-Azaphosphenines Following [5+1] Synthetic Strategy 419 8.47 Synthesis of 1,3-Azaphosphenines Following [4+2] Synthetic Strategies 419 8.48 1,4-Azaphosphenines 421 8.49 Oxygen- and Sulfur-Containing Heterophosphinines 424 8.50 Application and Synthesis of Phosphoborine Systems 429 8.51 Application and Synthesis of 1,4-Phosphasiline System 432 8.52 Synthesis of Germanium- and Tin-Containing Heterophosphinines 437 References 441 9 Modern Aspects of 31P NMR Spectroscopy 457David S. Glueck 9.1 Introduction 457 9.2 Chemical Shifts 459 9.3 Coupling Constants 464 9.4 Two-Dimensional (2D) 31P NMR Techniques 469 9.5 Analytical Methods 471 9.6 Diffusion-Ordered NMR Spectroscopy (DOSY) 476 9.7 Solid-State (SS) 31P NMR 479 9.8 Physical and Chemical Processes of Organophosphorus Compounds 483 9.9 Identification of Intermediates and Monitoring Their Reactivity 488 9.10 Conclusion 490 Acknowledgment 490 References 490 10 Phosphorus in Chemical Biology and Medicinal Chemistry 499Marlon Vincent V. Duro, Dana Mustafa, Boris A. Kashemirov, and Charles E.McKenna 10.1 Phosphorus and Life: An Introduction 499 10.2 Unnatural Nucleotides as Chemical Tools in Biology 500 10.3 Prodrugs of Nucleoside Phosphates and Phosphonates 516 10.4 Synthesis and Medical Applications of Bisphosphonates 522 10.5 Conclusion: The Future of Phosphorus in Chemical Biology and Medicinal Chemistry 531 References 531 11 Future Trends in Organophosphorus Chemistry 545Shin-ichi Kawaguchi and Akiya Ogawa 11.1 Introduction 545 11.2 Facile C—P Bond Formation Methods 545 11.3 Utilization of Organophosphorus Compounds 551 References 553 Index 557

Read more less

Book Synopsis"Mathematische Statistik" hat wegen des großen Anwendungsbedarfes stetig an Attraktivität gewonnen - und auch theoretisch sind neue Ansätze entwickelt worden. Ein besonderer Schwerpunkt liegt auf der Versuchsplanung, die häufig gegenüber der Auswertung vernachlässigt wird. Unter konsequenter Berücksichtigung der Entwicklungen der letzten Jahrzehnte ist ein neues Buch entstanden. Kenntnisse in der Maßtheorie und der Wahrscheinlichkeitsrechnung sind hilfreich, aber nicht notwendig, da die Autoren die Materie leicht verständlich beschrieben haben. Ein Schwerpunkt liegt auf der Versuchsplanung, die zu oft vernachlässigt wird und oft neben der Auswertung benachteiligt ist. Konsequenterweise nimmt in diesem Buch die Planung des Stichprobenumfangs und die Beschreibung von Versuchsanlagen einen großen Raum ein - immer eingebettet in die passenden Auswertungsverfahren wie die Varianz- und Regressionsanalyse. Ein Muss für alle Natur- und Ingenieurwissenschaftler, die empirisch arbeiten und daneben auch an der Begründung der Methoden interessiert sind.Trade Review "Wer die Zeit und Muße hat, seine statistischen Kenntnisse zu vertiefen oder zu erweitern, dem sei dieses Buch ausdrücklich ans Herz gelegt." Krankenhauspharmazie (01.12.2016) "Fazit: Empfehlenswert." Einschlag (15.06.2016) "Das vorliegende Werk bietet nun empirisch arbeitenden und zugleich an der Begründung der Methoden interessierten Mathematikern wie Natur- und Ingenieurwissenschaftlern eine umfassende Darstellung der aktuellen statistischen Auswertungsverfahren mitsamt Theorie unter besonderer Berücksichtigung der zugrundeliegenden Versuchsplanung." ekz.bibliotheksservice (15.02.2016) "An eternal challenge for authors of statistics textbooks is to establish a credible relationship between data = the real world and the abstract concepts from which the mathematical theory of statistics evolves. The present book does this better than most. Its presumed audience are graduate students (with a good knowledge of probability) in natural sciences, engineering, but also mathematics. [...]" Walter Krämer, Statistical Papers (10.02.2016)Table of ContentsVorwort XI 1 Grundbegriffe der mathematischen Statistik 1 1.1 Grundgesamtheit und Stichprobe 2 1.2 Mathematische Modelle fur Grundgesamtheit und Stichprobe 7 1.3 Suffizienz und Vollstandigkeit 9 1.4 Der Informationsbegriff in der Statistik 20 1.5 Statistische Entscheidungstheorie 27 1.6 Ubungsaufgaben 31 Literatur 36 2 Punktschätzung 39 2.1 Optimale erwartungstreue Schatzfunktionen 41 2.2 Varianzinvariante Schatzung 52 2.3 Methoden zur Konstruktion und Verbesserung von Schatzfunktionen 56 2.4 Eigenschaften von Schatzfunktionen 68 2.5 Ubungsaufgaben 75 Literatur 78 3 Statistische Tests und Konfidenzschätzungen 81 3.1 Grundbegriffe der Testtheorie 81 3.2 Das Neyman-Pearson-Lemma 89 3.3 Tests fur zusammengesetzte Alternativhypothesen und einparametrische Verteilungsfamilien 98 3.4 Tests fur mehrparametrische Verteilungsfamilien 112 3.5 Konfidenzschatzungen 135 3.6 Sequentielle Tests 143 3.7 Bemerkungen zur Interpretation 166 3.8 Ubungsaufgaben 167 Literatur 172 4 Lineare Modelle – Allgemeine Theorie 175 4.1 LineareModelle mit festen Effekten 175 4.2 Lineare Modelle mit zufalligen Effekten – gemischte Modelle 194 4.3 Ubungsaufgaben 198 Literatur 198 5 Varianzanalyse – Modelle mit festen Effekten (Modell I der Varianzanalyse) 201 5.1 Einfuhrung 201 5.2 Varianzanalyse in einfaktoriellen Versuchen (einfache Varianzanalyse) 209 5.2.1 Das Modell und Auswertungsverfahren 209 5.3 Klassifikation nach zwei Faktoren (zweifache Varianzanalyse) 225 5.4 Dreifache Klassifikation 264 5.5 Ubungsaufgaben 283 Literatur 284 6 Varianzanalyse – Schätzung von Varianzkomponenten (Modell II der Varianzanalyse) 285 6.1 Einfuhrung – lineareModelle mit zufalligen Effekten 285 6.2 Einfache Klassifikation 289 6.3 Schatzfunktionen fur Varianzkomponenten und ihre Spezialfalle der zweifachen und dreifachen Klassifikation 306 6.4 Versuchsplanung 329 6.5 Ubungsaufgaben 331 7 Varianzanalyse – Modelle mit endlichen Stufengesamtheiten und gemischte Modelle 335 7.1 Einfuhrung – Modelle mit endlichen Stufengesamtheiten 335 7.2 Regeln zur Ableitung von SQ, FG, DQ und E(DQ) im balancierten Fall fur beliebige Klassifikationen und Modelle 338 7.3 Varianzkomponentenschatzung in gemischten Modellen 343 7.4 Varianzkomponentenschatzung in speziellen gemischten Modellen 348 7.5 Tests fur feste Effekte und Varianzkomponenten 362 7.6 Ubungsaufgaben 366 Literatur 366 8 Regressionsanalyse – Lineare Modelle mit nicht zufälligen Regressoren und zufälligen Regressoren 367 8.1 Einfuhrung 367 8.2 Parameterschatzung 370 8.3 Hypothesenprufung 386 8.4 Konfidenzbereiche 395 8.5 Modelle mit zufalligen Regressoren 398 8.6 Gemischte Modelle 405 8.7 Abschliesende Bemerkungen zu den Modellen der Regressionsanalyse 406 8.8 Ubungsaufgaben 408 Literatur 409 9 Regressionsanalyse – Eigentlich nichtlineares Modell I 411 9.1 Bestimmung der Schatzwerte nach der Methode der kleinsten Quadrate 414 9.2 Geometrische Betrachtungen 422 9.3 Asymptotische Eigenschaften und die Verzerrung der MKQ-Schatzung 432 9.4 Konfidenzschatzungen und Tests 436 9.5 Optimale Versuchsplanung 443 9.6 Spezielle Regressionsfunktionen 448 9.7 Ubungsaufgaben 471 Literatur 472 10 Kovarianzanalyse 475 10.1 Einfuhrung 475 10.2 AllgemeinesModell I–I der Kovarianzanalyse 476 10.3 Spezielle Modelle der Kovarianzanalyse fur die einfache Klassifikation 483 10.4 Ubungsaufgaben 488 Literatur 488 11 Statistische Mehrentscheidungsprobleme 489 11.1 Auswahlverfahren 490 11.2 Multiple Vergleichsprozeduren 511 11.3 Veranschaulichung derMethoden an einem Zahlenbeispiel 531 11.4 Ubungsaufgaben 536 Literatur 537 12 Versuchsanlagen 539 12.1 Einfuhrung 540 12.2 Blockanlagen 543 12.3 Zeilen-Spalten-Anlagen 573 12.4 Programme zur Konstruktion von Versuchsanlagen 577 12.5 Ubungsaufgaben 577 Literatur 578 13 Lösungen und Lösungsansätze zu den Übungsaufgaben 581 Anhang A Symbolik 607 Anhang B Abkürzungen 611 Anhang C Wahrscheinlichkeits- bzw. Dichtefunktionen von Verteilungen 613 Anhang D Tabellen 615 Sachverzeichnis 623

Read more less

Book SynopsisDas Buch beginnt mit einer Einführung in die Physik der Nanotechnologie und der Nanostrukturen sowie deren Herstellung und Charakterisierung. Der zweite Teil befasst sich mit dem faszinierenden Element Kohlenstoff, das den Ausgangspunkt für alle weiteren Betrachtungen darstellt: Dank der besonderen Eigenschaften des Kohlenstoffs kann dieser in verschiedenen Formen auftreten, etwa in Form von transparentem Diamant oder opakem Graphit. Der dritte Teil des Buches widmet sich ungewöhnlicheren Kohlenstoffnanostrukturen wie den Kohlenstoffnanoröhrchen, Fullerenen, Kohlenstoff-"Zwiebeln" und dem Super-Material Graphen, einem heißen Kandidaten für bessere, schnellere und zuverlässigere Elektronik. Das Buch schließt mit einem Ausblick auf strukturell den Kohlenstoffnanostrukturen verwandte Materialien.Trade Review"Dieses Sachbuch gibt einen guten Einblick in das komplexe Thema der Nanotechnologie." Materials and Corrosion (11/2017) "Didaktisch sehr gelungen und mit hochwertigen Abbildungen ergänzt, stellt der Autor die vielfältigen Arten von Nanostrukturen dar und erläutert zahlreiche Herstellungs- und Charakterisierungsmethoden." Physik in unserer Zeit (04.09.2017) "Das anschauliche und wissenschaftlich fundierte Lehrbuch beginnt mit einer Einführung in die Physik der Nanotechnologie und der Nanostrukturen sowie deren Herstellung und Charakterisierung (...)." Allgemeines Ministerialblatt (06.06.2017) Obwohl in dem Buch Einsatzmöglichkeiten und damit verbundene Probleme der Nanotechnologie im Lebensmittel- und Ernährungsbereich nicht diskutiert werden, ist es für Studierende ein didaktisch klug aufgebauter Einstieg in die interdisziplinäre Wissenschaft Nanotechnologie. Es gibt kaum Literatur, in der vor allem didaktisch geschickt und gut lesbar begründet wird, warum sich Nanomaterialien im Verhalten deutlich von makroskopischen Materialien unterscheiden. Da nanoskalierte Materialien bei der Herstellung von Lebensmitteln und kosmetischen Mitteln immer wichtiger werden, empfehle ich das Buch besonders auch den Studierenden der Lebensmittelchemie und ? technologie als didaktisch gut gemachten Einstieg in das Thema. Prof. Dr. Steinhart, Universität Hamburg Das Buch basiert auf den erfolgreichen Vorlesungen des Autors und wurde hinsichtlich von Stil und Niveau geschrieben für Studenten mit nur geringen Vorkenntnissen der Festkörperphysik. (...) Der Autor kombiniert dabei wissenschaftliche Fachkenntnis mit guter Didaktik und studentengerechtem Schreibstil. Zielgruppe sind speziell Master-Studenten der Materialwissenschaften, Master-Studenten und Dozenten der Physik, Chemie und Biologie sowie Bibliotheken. Konstruktion (01.04.2017) Die einzelnen Kapitel sind sehr gut für das jeweilige Thema aufgebaut, wobei die entsprechende Thematik sehr gut erklärt und mit geeigneten Bildern untermauert wird. Dabei wird vor allem viel Wert auf Verständnis gelegt. (...) Das Buch bietet einen guten Einstieg in die Materie der Nanotechnologie und alles in allem einen schönen Überblick. Somit hält der Titel, was er verspricht und macht mehr Lust auf das Thema. ChemlsTry20 (14.03.2017) Ein sehr gut geschriebenes Werk, das einem die Grundzüge anschaulich darlegt. Fachschaft Medizin Universität Marburg (06.03.2017) "Das Buch kommt ansatzweise schon für Oberstufenschüler, hauptsächlich für Studenten naturwissenschaftlicher Fachrichtungen infrage." Ekz.Bibliotheksservice (30.01.2017)Table of ContentsVorwort XI 1 Einführung 1 1.1 Nanowissenschaften und Nanotechnologie 1 1.2 Nanowissenschaften sind interdisziplinär 3 1.3 Nanotechnologie – Heilsbringer oder Risiko? 3 1.4 Kohlenstoffnanostrukturen 4 1.5 Der Aufbau dieses Buchs 5 Literatur 7 Teil I Nanotechnologie und Nanostrukturen 9 2 Nanostrukturen 11 2.1 Definition 11 2.2 Physik und Chemie im Nanometerbereich 12 2.2.1 Der Einfluss der Oberfläche 13 2.2.2 Platzersparnis 14 2.2.3 Kritische Längen 16 2.2.4 Quantenmechanik 22 2.3 Arten von Nanostrukturen 25 2.4 Vorbilder in der Natur 31 2.5 Wissen testen 34 Literatur 35 3 Herstellung von Nanostrukturen 37 3.1 Grundlegende Ansätze zur Herstellung von Nanostrukturen 37 3.2 Top-down-Verfahren 37 3.2.1 Erzeugung von Nanopartikeln durchMahlen 39 3.2.2 Mechanische Oberflächenermüdung 40 3.2.3 Lithografie und Ätzen 41 3.3 Irgendwo dazwischen: die weiche Lithografie 44 3.3.1 Nanokontaktdruck 45 3.3.2 Weitere auf Stempeln beruhende Verfahren der weichen Lithografie 46 3.3.3 Dip-Pen-Nanolithografie 47 3.4 Bottom-up-Verfahren 48 3.4.1 Selbstassemblierte Systeme und Schichten 50 3.4.2 Verwendung von Templates 52 3.4.3 Verwendung von DNA 54 3.4.4 Prozessführung 55 3.5 Funktionalisierung 55 3.5.1 Möglichkeiten zur Funktionalisierung 56 3.5.2 Verleihung von Funktionalitäten 59 3.6 Wissen testen 62 Literatur 62 4 Charakterisierung von Nanostrukturen 65 4.1 Kann man Atome sehen? 65 4.1.1 Das Rayleigh-Kriterium 65 4.1.2 Reduzierung derWellenlänge elektromagnetischer Strahlung 66 4.1.3 Die Lösung: Teilchenstrahlen 67 4.2 Elektronenstrahlverfahren 68 4.2.1 SEM 68 4.2.2 TEMund HRTEM 70 4.2.3 TED und EELS 71 4.3 Charakterisierung mittels Nanosystemen: Rastersondenmikroskopie 72 4.3.1 Rastertunnelmikroskopie 73 4.3.2 AFM 76 4.3.3 Weitere Verfahren 79 4.4 Makroskopische Verfahren 82 4.4.1 Raman-Spektroskopie 82 4.4.2 Weitere spektroskopische Verfahren 85 4.4.3 Verfahren zur Bestimmung der Zusammensetzung 85 4.4.4 Beugungsverfahren zur Ermittlung der Kristallinität 88 4.5 Wissen testen 90 Literatur 90 Teil II Das Element Kohlenstoff 93 5 Das Element Kohlenstoff 95 5.1 Vorkommen 95 5.1.1 Die Entstehung von Kohlenstoff 96 5.1.2 Bedeutung als Energieträger 97 5.1.3 Bedeutung in der Biologie 97 Inhaltsverzeichnis VII 5.2 Die besondere Chemie des Kohlenstoffs 98 5.2.1 Hybridisierung 98 5.2.2 Ring- und Kettenbildung 100 5.2.3 Polymere 103 5.2.4 Fremdatome und funktionelle Gruppen 104 5.3 Wissen testen 107 Literatur 108 6 Kohlenstofffestkörpermodifikationen 109 6.1 Diamant 111 6.1.1 Vorkommen und Herstellung 111 6.1.2 Physikalische Eigenschaften 118 6.1.3 Chemische Eigenschaften 121 6.1.4 Anwendungen 121 6.2 Graphit 122 6.2.1 Struktur 122 6.2.2 Gewinnung bzw. Herstellung 123 6.2.3 Physikalische Eigenschaften 123 6.2.4 Chemische Eigenschaften 124 6.2.5 Anwendungen 125 6.3 Weitere Modifikationen 127 6.3.1 Glaskohlenstoff 127 6.3.2 Ruß 128 6.3.3 Amorpher Kohlenstoff 129 6.4 Wissen testen 130 Literatur 131 Teil III Kohlenstoff-Nanostrukturen 133 7 Punktförmige Kohlenstoffnanostrukturen: Fullerene 135 7.1 Entdeckung 135 7.2 Struktur 137 7.2.1 Die große Varietät der Fullerene 137 7.2.2 C60 und C70 139 7.2.3 Nomenklatur 140 7.3 Fullerite 140 7.4 Fullerene mit Fremdatomen 141 7.4.1 Heterofullerene 141 7.4.2 Endohedrale Komplexe 142 7.5 Herstellung 144 7.5.1 Laserablation 144 7.5.2 Thermische Zersetzung 144 7.5.3 Vakuum-Bogenentladung 146 7.5.4 Pyrolyse 146 7.5.5 Verbrennungsverfahren 147 7.5.6 Vergleich der Verfahren 147 7.6 Weiterverarbeitung 148 7.6.1 Reinigung und Anreicherung 148 7.6.2 Funktionalisierung 149 7.6.3 Polymerisation 150 7.7 Eigenschaften von Fullerenen 150 7.7.1 Chemische Eigenschaften 151 7.7.2 Mechanische Eigenschaften 151 7.7.3 Optische Eigenschaften 152 7.8 Anwendungen 152 7.8.1 Wasserstoffspeicherung 155 7.8.2 Härtung vonMaterialien 155 7.8.3 Medizin 155 7.9 Wissen testen 159 Literatur 160 8 Eindimensionale Kohlenstoffnanostrukturen: Nanoröhrchen 163 8.1 Entdeckung 163 8.2 Beschreibung, Klassifizierung und Nomenklatur 164 8.2.1 Armchair-, Zigzag- und chirale Röhrchen 164 8.2.2 Singlewall- andMultiwall-Röhrchen 167 8.2.3 Die Enden der Nanoröhrchen 168 8.2.4 Spezielle Arten von CNTs 168 8.2.5 Nanoröhrchenmit Fremdatomen 170 8.2.6 Nanoröhrchen aus anderenMaterialien 172 8.3 Herstellung 172 8.3.1 Physikalische Verfahren 172 8.3.2 CVD-Verfahren 173 8.3.3 Ein spezielles Beispiel: das HiPCO-Verfahren 177 8.3.4 Zusammenfassender Vergleich 178 8.3.5 Reinigung, Trennung und Aufbereitung 179 8.3.6 CNT-Bündel, -Fasern und -Filme 181 8.4 Eigenschaften 185 8.4.1 Mechanische Eigenschaften 186 8.4.2 Elektrische und elektronische Eigenschaften 186 8.4.3 Thermische Eigenschaften 187 8.4.4 Chemische Eigenschaften 188 8.5 Anwendungen 188 8.5.1 Nanoverbundwerkstoffe 189 8.5.2 Anwendungen in elektronischen Bauelementen 190 8.5.3 Feldemission 196 8.5.4 Sensoren 197 8.5.5 Anwendung von CNTs in der Medizin 198 8.5.6 Weitere Anwendungen 200 8.5.7 Gegenwärtige Probleme 200 8.6 Wissen testen 201 Literatur 201 9 Zweidimensionale Kohlenstoffnanostrukturen: Graphen 205 9.1 Entdeckung 205 9.2 Struktur 206 9.3 Herstellung 207 9.3.1 Ablöseverfahren 208 9.3.2 CVD-Verfahren 208 9.3.3 Direktes epitaktischesWachstum durch Segregation 209 9.3.4 Transfer auf geeignete Substrate 210 9.3.5 Graphenwachstum auf SiC 211 9.3.6 Reduktion von Graphenoxid 212 9.4 Eigenschaften 214 9.4.1 Mechanische Eigenschaften 215 9.4.2 Elektrische und elektronische Eigenschaften 215 9.4.3 Thermische Eigenschaften 216 9.4.4 Optische Eigenschaften 216 9.4.5 Chemische Eigenschaften 217 9.4.6 Weitere Eigenschaften 217 9.5 Anwendungen 218 9.5.1 Graphentransistor 218 9.5.2 Chemische Sensoren und Biosensoren 219 9.5.3 Nanoverbundwerkstoffe 221 9.6 Wissen testen 221 Literatur 223 10 Dreidimensionale Kohlenstoffnanostrukturen 225 10.1 Kohlenstoffnanozwiebeln 225 10.1.1 Struktur 225 10.1.2 Herstellung 227 10.1.3 Eigenschaften 230 10.1.4 Anwendungen 230 10.2 Kohlenstoffnanohörner 231 10.3 Weitere graphitische dreidimensionale Kohlenstoffnanostrukturen 234 10.4 Zusammenfassung: graphitähnliche dreidimensionale Kohlenstoffnanostrukturen 236 10.5 Diamantnanopartikel 236 10.5.1 Herstellungsverfahren 237 10.5.2 Struktur, Aufbereitung und Funktionalisierung 239 10.5.3 Anwendungen 240 10.6 Nano- und ultrananokristalline Diamantschichten 240 10.7 Diamantnanosäulen und Nanostäbe 243 10.8 Wissen testen 243 Literatur 244 11 Verwandte Nanostrukturen aus anderen Elementen 247 11.1 Bornitrid 247 11.1.1 Herstellung von BN 249 11.1.2 Eigenschaften von BN 249 11.1.3 BN-Nanostrukturen 250 11.1.4 BN-Nanoröhrchen 251 11.1.5 Weitere BN-Nanostrukturen 255 11.2 Silizium 260 11.2.1 Siliziumnanodrähte 261 11.2.2 Siliziumquantenpunkte 262 11.2.3 Mesoporöse SiO2-Nanoteilchen 264 11.3 Wissen testen 265 Literatur 266 Richtig gelöst 269 Stichwortverzeichnis 283

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe first book of its kind?providing comprehensive information on oxide thermoelectrics This timely book explores the latest research results on the physics and materials science of oxide thermoelectrics at all scales. It covers the theory, design and properties of thermoelectric materials as well as fabrication technologies for devices and their applications. Written by three distinguished materials scientists, Oxide Thermoelectric Materials reviews: the fundamentals of electron and phonon transport; modeling of thermoelectric modules and their optimization; synthetic processes, structures, and properties of thermoelectric materials such as Bi2Te3- and skutterudite-based materials and Si-Ge alloys. In addition, the book provides a detailed description of the construction of thermoelectric devices and their applications. -Contains fundamentals and applications of thermoelectric materials and devices, and discusses their near-future perspectives -Introduces new, promising materials and technologies, such as nanostructured materials, perovskites, and composites -Paves the way for increased conversion efficiencies of oxides -Authored by well-known experts in the field of thermoelectrics Oxide Thermoelectric Materials is a well-organized guidebook for graduate students involved in physics, chemistry, or materials science. It is also helpful for researchers who are getting involved in thermoelectric research and development. Table of ContentsForeword ix Part I Theories and Fundamentals 1 1 Electron Transport Model in Nano Bulk Thermoelectrics 3 1.1 History of Conducting Oxides 3 1.2 Structural Characteristics of Oxides 8 1.3 Band Structure of Conventional Oxides 11 1.4 Electrical Properties 11 1.5 Model for Thermoelectric Oxides 15 1.6 Effect of Interface on Electron Transport 17 References 22 2 Controlling the Thermal Conductivity of Bulk Nanomaterials 25 2.1 Bonding and Lattice Vibration 25 2.2 Lattice Distortions in Determining Thermal Properties 25 2.2.1 Point Defects and Dislocations 25 2.2.2 Peierls Distortion 27 2.2.3 Octahedral Distortion in Manganite Perovskites 28 2.3 Callaway Model and the Minimum Thermal Properties 30 2.4 Temperature Relationship in Thermal Properties 32 2.5 Model for Lattice Thermal Conductivity 36 2.5.1 Kinetic Theory 36 2.5.2 Boltzmann Equation 36 2.5.3 Phonon–Phonon Collisions 38 2.6 Interfacial Thermal Conductivity 40 2.7 Model for Nano Bulk Materials 43 2.8 Minimum Value for Oxides 48 References 49 Part II Materials 53 3 Nonoxide Materials 55 3.1 Bi2Te3-Based Materials 55 3.2 Skutterudite-Based Materials 59 3.3 Si–Ge Alloys 62 3.4 Other Alloy Materials 66 References 71 4 Binary Oxides 77 4.1 Introduction for ZnO 77 4.2 Property of ZnO 77 4.2.1 Structure 77 4.2.2 Lattice Parameters 77 4.2.3 Electronic Band Structure 77 4.2.4 Mechanical Properties 79 4.2.5 Thermal Expansion Coefficients 79 4.2.6 Thermal Conductivity 80 4.2.7 Specific Heat 80 4.2.8 Electrical Properties of Undoped ZnO 81 4.3 Doping for ZnO-Based Thermoelectric Materials 81 4.4 ZnO Nanostructures 84 4.5 Introduction for In2O3 87 4.6 Property of In2O3 88 4.6.1 Structure 88 4.6.2 Electronic Band Structure 89 4.6.3 Thermal Properties and Electrical Properties 89 4.7 Doping for In2O3-BasedThermoelectricMaterials 90 4.8 In2O3 Nanostructures 94 4.9 TiO2 and Others 98 References 101 5 Perovskite-Type Oxides 105 5.1 Introduction for Perovskite-Type Oxides 105 5.2 Crystal Structure and Electronic Structure of Perovskite-Type Oxides 106 5.2.1 Crystal Structure 106 5.2.2 Electronic Structure 107 5.3 A- and B-Sites Doping for Perovskite-Type Oxides 108 5.3.1 SrTiO3 108 5.3.2 CaMnO3 109 5.3.3 LaCoO3 111 5.4 Double Perovskites 112 5.4.1 Structure of Double Perovskites 112 5.4.2 Thermoelectric Properties of A′A′′B2O5+𝛿 113 5.4.3 Thermoelectric Properties of A2B′B′′O6 113 5.4.4 Doping Modulation 115 5.4.5 Composite Ceramics 118 5.5 Nanostructure Property Relationships in Perovskite-Type Oxides 120 References 124 6 Oxide Cobaltites 133 6.1 Introduction 133 6.2 NaxCoO2 133 6.3 Ca3Co4O9 138 6.3.1 Single Dopants of Ca3Co4O9 139 6.3.2 Dual Dopants of Ca3Co4O9 144 6.3.3 Texture for Ca3Co4O9 147 6.3.4 Nanocomposites for Ca3Co4O9 147 6.4 New Concepts for Oxide Cobaltites 150 References 151 7 Promising Complex Oxides for High Performance 155 7.1 Crystal Structure–Property Relationships 155 7.2 History of Complex Superconductors 156 7.3 Ternary Oxyselenides 158 7.3.1 Donor Doping on [Bi2O2]2+ Layers 158 7.3.2 Donor Doping on [Se]2− Layers 160 7.3.3 The Solid Solution of Bi2O2Se and Bi2O2Te 160 7.4 Quaternary Oxyselenides 164 7.4.1 Thermoelectric Properties 166 7.4.2 Band Gap Tuning 168 7.4.3 Texturing 168 7.4.4 Modulation Doping 169 7.4.5 Nanocompositing 171 7.5 Complexity Through Disorder in the Unit Cell 173 7.6 Complex Unit Cells 174 References 176 8 New Thermoelectric Materials and Nanocomposites 179 8.1 Nanocomposite Design 180 8.1.1 Energy-filtering Design 180 8.1.2 All-Scale Hierarchical Architectures 181 8.1.3 Quantum Nanostructured Bulk Materials 183 8.2 Organic Thermoelectric Materials 183 8.2.1 p-Type Organic Thermoelectric Materials 184 8.2.2 PEDOT 184 8.2.3 PANI 187 8.2.3.1 The Molecular Structure of PANI 188 8.2.3.2 Conductive Mechanism of PANI 188 8.2.3.3 Synthesis of PANI 188 8.2.3.4 Electrochemical Method 189 8.2.4 Doping of PANI 189 8.2.5 Tuning the Work Function of Polyaniline 190 8.2.6 n-Type Thermoelectric Materials 192 8.3 Organic/Inorganic Thermoelectric Nanocomposites 192 8.3.1 0D Nanoparticles/Polymer 192 8.3.2 1D Nanowires or Nanotubes/Polymer 193 8.3.3 2D Nanosheets/Polymer 197 References 201 Part III Devices and Application 207 9 Oxide Materials Preparation 209 9.1 Synthesis Method of Nanopowder 209 9.1.1 Solid-State Reaction 209 9.1.2 Solution Preparation 210 9.1.2.1 Sol–Gel Method 211 9.1.2.2 Precipitation and Coprecipitation Method 211 9.1.2.3 Hydrothermal Method 213 9.1.3 Gas-Phase Reaction 214 9.2 Advanced Bulk Technology 214 9.2.1 Spark Plasma Sintering 215 9.2.2 Hot-Press Sintering 215 9.2.3 Microwave Sintering 217 9.2.4 Two-Step Sintering 218 9.2.5 Phase-Transformation Sintering 219 9.3 Sintering Conditions on the Properties of Bulk 219 9.3.1 Effect of Sintering Temperature 219 9.3.2 Effect of Sintering Atmosphere 220 9.3.3 Effect of the Addition for Sintering 220 References 221 10 Modeling and Optimizing of Thermoelectric Devices 229 10.1 Introduction to Thermoelectric Devices 229 10.2 The Theoretical Analysis 230 10.3 The Model Design 232 10.4 The Interfaces in Thermoelectric Modules 236 10.5 The Simulation and the Optimization 238 10.6 The Measurement Theories and Systems 241 10.7 All-oxide Thermoelectric Device 242 References 245 11 Photovoltaic Application of Thermoelectric Materials and Devices 247 11.1 Introduction 247 11.2 Photovoltaic–Thermoelectric Integration Devices 248 11.3 Photoelectric–Thermoelectric Composite Materials 253 References 260 Index 263

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis volume in the "Advances in Electrochemical Sciences and Engineering" series focuses on problem-solving, illustrating how to translate basic science into engineering solutions. The book's concept is to bring together engineering solutions across the range of nano-bio-photo-micro applications, with each chapter co-authored by an academic and an industrial expert whose collaboration led to reusable methods that are relevant beyond their initial use. Examples of experimental and/or computational methods are used throughout to facilitate the task of moving atomistic-scale discoveries and understanding toward well-engineered products and processes based on electrochemical phenomena.Table of ContentsSeries Preface xi Preface xiii 1 Introductory Perspectives 1A. Paul Alivisatos andWojciech T. Osowiecki References 4 2 The Joint Center for Energy Storage Research: A New Paradigm of Research, Development, and Demonstration 7Thomas J. Carney, Devin S. Hodge, Lynn Trahey, and Fikile R. Brushett 2.1 Background and Motivation 7 2.2 Lithium-ion Batteries: Current State of the Art 8 2.3 Beyond Li-Ion Batteries 9 2.4 JCESR Legacies and a New Paradigm for Research 9 2.5 The JCESR Team 13 2.6 JCESR Operational Tools 16 2.7 Intellectual Property Management 17 2.8 Communication Tools 17 2.9 JCESR Change Decision Process 17 2.10 Safety in JCESR 19 2.11 Battery Technology Readiness Level 20 2.12 JCESR Deliverables 21 2.13 Scientific Tools in JCESR 22 2.14 Techno-economic Modeling 23 2.14.1 Techno-economic Modeling of a Metal–Air System for Transportation Applications 23 2.14.2 Techno-economic Modeling of Flow Batteries for Grid Storage Applications 25 2.15 The Electrochemical Discovery Laboratory 27 2.15.1 The Effect of TraceWater on Beyond Li-ion Devices 27 2.15.2 Stability of Redox Active Molecules 28 2.16 Electrolyte Genome 28 2.16.1 Screening of Redox Active Molecules for Redox Flow 29 2.16.2 Examination of Multivalent Intercalation Materials 30 2.17 Combining the Electrolyte Genome with Techno-economic Modeling 31 2.18 Prototype Development 31 2.19 Legacy of JCESR 33 2.20 Conclusion 34 Acknowledgments 34 References 34 3 Determination of Redox Reaction Mechanisms in Lithium–Sulfur Batteries 41Kevin H.Wujcik, Dunyang R.Wang, Alexander A. Teran, Eduard Nasybulin, Tod A. Pascal, David Prendergast, and Nitash P. Balsara 3.1 Basics of Lithium–Sulfur Chemistry 41 3.2 End Products of Electrochemical Reactions in the Sulfur Cathode 44 3.3 Intermediate Products of Electrochemical Reactions in the Sulfur Cathode 45 3.3.1 Reactions of S8 45 3.3.2 Reactions of Li2S8 46 3.3.3 Reactions of Li2S4 47 3.3.4 Reactions of Li2S2 48 3.3.5 Production of Radical Anions 49 3.4 Fingerprinting Lithium Polysulfide Intermediates 49 3.4.1 X-ray Absorption Spectroscopy 50 3.4.2 Electron Paramagnetic Resonance Spectroscopy 53 3.4.3 UV–Vis Spectroscopy 54 3.4.4 Raman Spectroscopy 57 3.4.5 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy 57 3.5 In Situ Spectroscopic Studies of Li–S Batteries 58 3.5.1 X-ray Absorption Spectroscopy 58 3.5.2 Electron Paramagnetic Resonance Spectroscopy 59 3.5.3 UV–Vis Spectroscopy 60 3.5.4 Raman Spectroscopy 60 3.5.5 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy 61 3.6 Practical Considerations 62 3.7 Concluding Remarks 64 Acknowledgment 68 References 68 4 From the Lab to Scaling-up Thin Film Solar Absorbers 75Hariklia Deligianni, Lubomyr T. Romankiw, Daniel Lincot, and Pierre-Philippe Grand 4.1 Introduction 75 4.2 State-of-the-art Electrodeposition for Photovoltaics 79 4.2.1 Electrodeposited CuInGaSe2 (CIGS) 80 4.2.1.1 Metal Layers 80 4.2.1.2 Electrodeposition of Copper 81 4.2.1.3 Electrodeposition of Indium 82 4.2.1.4 Electrodeposition of Gallium 85 4.2.2 Single Cu—In—Ga—Se—O Multicomponent Chemistries 89 4.2.2.1 Cu—In—Se Co-deposition 89 4.2.2.2 Cu—In—Ga—Se Co-deposition 91 4.2.2.3 Cu—In—Ga—O Co-deposition 92 4.2.2.4 Cu—In—Ga Co-deposition 93 4.2.3 AnnealingMethods 93 4.2.4 Fabrication of Solar Cells 95 4.3 Electrodeposited Cu2ZnSn(Se,S)4 (CZTS) and Emerging Materials 97 4.3.1 Cu2ZnSn(Se,S)4 (CZTS) 97 4.4 From the Rotating Disk to the Paddle Cell as a Scale-up Platform 99 4.4.1 Introduction to Scale-up 99 4.4.2 Entirely New Solution Agitation Method 100 4.4.3 The Paddle Agitation Technique Is More Readily Scalable 101 4.4.4 Electrical Contact Between the Thin Seed Layer and the Source of Current 103 4.4.5 Previous Scale-up of the Paddle Cell 103 4.4.6 Scale-up of the Paddle Cell to 15 cm× 15 cm 104 4.4.7 Scale-up of the Paddle Cell to 30 cm× 60 cm 107 4.4.8 ImprovingWithin-Wafer Uniformity, Reproducibility, and Demonstration of Scalability 108 4.4.8.1 Within-Wafer Uniformity 108 4.4.8.2 Wafer-to-Wafer Reproducibility 109 4.5 Scaling-up to 60 cm× 120 cm from Tiny Electrodes to Meters 110 4.5.1 A 1 m2 min−1 Continuous Industrial Scale 110 4.5.2 Bath Control 116 4.5.2.1 Insoluble Anode 118 4.5.2.2 Soluble Anode 118 4.5.2.3 Bath Maintenance and Reproducibility and Steady-State Operation 119 4.6 Conclusions 121 Acknowledgments 122 References 123 5 Thin-film Head and the Innovator’s Dilemma 129Keishi Ohashi 5.1 Introduction 129 5.2 Thin-film Head Technology 130 5.2.1 Magnetic Properties for HDD 130 5.2.2 Permalloy 130 5.2.3 Thin-film Head 132 5.2.4 Magnetic Domain Noise 133 5.3 Data Storage Business in Japan 137 5.3.1 MagneticThin-films for HDD in the 1980s 137 5.3.2 Use of Optics 138 5.3.3 High-Moment Head Core Material 138 5.3.4 High-Ms Write Heads 141 5.4 The Innovator’s Dilemma 142 5.4.1 Thin-film Head is not Disruptive 142 5.4.2 Small HDD 143 5.4.3 MR Head 144 5.4.4 GMR Head 145 5.5 TMR Head 147 5.5.1 Infinite MR Ratio 147 5.5.2 Suspicions Surrounding the TMR Head 147 5.5.3 Low-Resistance TMR Head 148 5.5.4 MGO:The Final Push 150 5.5.5 Exploring New Markets 151 5.6 Discussion 151 Acknowledgments 152 References 153 6 Development of Fully-Continuous Electrokinetic Dewatering of Phosphatic Clay Suspensions 159Rui Kong, Arthur Dizon, Saeed Moghaddam, andMark E. Orazem 6.1 Introduction 159 6.1.1 Phosphatic Clay Suspensions 160 6.1.2 Industrial Scope 160 6.1.3 Why is Separation ofWater from Clay Difficult? 161 6.2 Current Methods 162 6.2.1 Flocculation 162 6.2.2 Mechanical Dewatering 163 6.2.3 Electrokinetic Separation 163 6.3 Development of Dewatering Technologies for Phosphatic Clays 164 6.3.1 Lab-scale Batch Dewatering 165 6.3.2 Semi-continuous Operation to Recover Clear Supernatant 168 6.3.3 Semi-continuous Operation to Recover Solids 170 6.3.4 Continuous Operation 172 6.3.5 Energy and Power Requirements for All Prototypes Tested 175 6.4 Economic Assessment for On-site Implementation 179 6.4.1 Hydrogen Emission 179 6.4.2 Capital and Operation Costs 180 6.4.2.1 Power and Energy consumption for On-site Operations 181 6.4.2.2 Operation cost 181 6.4.2.3 Capital Cost 183 6.4.3 Results 184 6.5 Our Next Prototype: Dual-zone Continuous Operation 185 6.6 Conclusions 186 Acknowledgments 187 References 187 Contents ix 7 Breaking the Chemical Paradigm in Electrochemical Engineering: Case Studies and Lessons Learned from Plating to Polishing 193E. Jennings Taylor, Maria E. Inman, Holly M. Garich, Heather A. McCrabb, Stephen T. Snyder, and Timothy D. Hall 7.1 Introduction 193 7.1.1 Perspective 194 7.2 A Brief Overview of Pulse Reverse Current Plating 196 7.2.1 Mass Transport Effects in Pulse Current Plating 198 7.2.2 Current Distribution Effects in Pulse Current Plating 200 7.2.3 Grain Size Effects in Pulse Current Plating 204 7.2.4 Current Efficiency Effects in Pulse Current Plating 205 7.2.5 Concluding Remarks for Pulse Current Plating 205 7.3 Early Developments in Pulse Plating 206 7.3.1 LevelingWithout Levelers Using Pulse Reverse Current Plating 207 7.3.2 DuctilityWithout Brighteners Using Pulse Current Plating 210 7.4 Transition of Pulse Current Plating Concepts to Surface Finishing 211 7.4.1 Pulse Voltage Deburring of Automotive Planetary Gears 212 7.4.2 Transition to Pulse Reverse Voltage Electropolishing of Passive Materials 214 7.4.3 Sequenced Pulse Reverse Voltage Electropolishing of Semiconductor Valves 216 7.4.4 Pulse Reverse Voltage Electropolishing of Strongly Passive Materials 220 7.4.5 Pulse Reverse Voltage Electropolishing of Niobium Superconducting Radio Frequency Cavities 223 7.4.6 Transition Pulse Reverse Voltage Electropolishing to Niobium Superconducting Radio Frequency Cavities 226 7.5 ConcludingThoughts 232 Acknowledgments 233 References 234 8 The Interaction Between a Proton and the Atomic Network in Amorphous Silica Glass Made a Highly Sensitive Trace Moisture Sensor 241Yusuke Tsukahara, Nobuo Takeda, Kazushi Yamanaka, and Shingo Akao 8.1 Unexpected Long Propagation of Surface AcousticWaves Around a Sphere 241 8.2 Invention of a Ball SAWDevice and Application to Gas Sensors 243 8.3 Unexpected Fluctuations in the Output Signal of the Gas Sensor Leading to the Development of Trace Moisture Sensors 249 8.4 Sol–Gel Silica Film for the Trace Moisture Sensors 253 8.5 A Thermodynamic Model of Interaction ofWater Vapor with Amorphous Silica Glass 254 8.6 Concluding Remarks 257 References 257 9 From Sensors to Low-cost Instruments to Networks: Semiconducting Oxides as Gas-Sensitive Resistors 261David E.Williams 9.1 Overview 261 9.2 Basic Science of Semiconducting Oxides as Gas-Sensitive Resistors 266 9.2.1 Multiscale Modeling of Gas-Sensitive Resistors 266 9.2.1.1 Introduction 266 9.2.1.2 Effective Medium Model 1: Rationalization of Composition Effects on Response 268 9.2.1.3 Effective Medium Model 2: Diffusion–Reaction Effects on Response; Effects of Electrode Geometry and “Self-Diagnostic” Devices 270 9.2.1.4 Microstructure Model: Percolation and Equivalent Circuit Representation 277 9.2.2 Surface Segregation and Surface Modification Effects 284 9.2.2.1 Surface Modification by “Poisoning” 284 9.2.2.2 Surface Modification by Segregation 286 9.2.2.3 Surface Grafting as a Means for Altering Response 288 9.2.3 Surface Defect and Reaction Models 288 9.3 Commercial Development of Sensors and Instruments 291 9.3.1 Introduction 291 9.3.2 Development of a Low-Cost Instrument for Measurement of Ozone in theAtmosphere 298 9.3.3 Signal Drift Detection 303 9.3.4 A Low-Cost Instrument for Measurement of Atmospheric Nitrogen Dioxide 304 9.3.5 Networks of Instruments in the Atmosphere 306 9.4 Conclusion and Prospects 311 Acknowledgment 313 References 314 Index 323

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn integral overview of the theory and design of printheads, authored by an expert with over 30 years' experience in the field of inkjet printing. Clearly structured, the book presents the design of a printhead in a comprehensive and clear form, right from the start. To begin with, the working principle of piezo-driven drop-on-demand printheads in theory is discussed, building on the theory of mechanical vibrations and acoustics. Then the design of single-nozzle as well as multi-nozzle printheads is presented, including the importance of various parameters that need to be optimized, such as viscosity, surface tension and nozzle shape. Topics such as refilling the nozzle and the impact of the droplet on the surface are equally treated. The text concludes with a unique set of worked-out questions for training purposes as well as case studies and a look at what the future holds. An essential reference for beginning as well as experienced researchers, from ink developers to mechanical engineers, both in industry and academia.Table of ContentsPreface xi List of Symbols xv 1 Introduction 1 References 10 2 Single Degree of Freedom System 13 2.1 Introduction 13 2.2 Governing Equations and Solution for Square Pulse Driving 15 2.2.1 Entrance and Exit Effects (Entrance Pressure Drop, Exit Loss) 22 2.2.2 Corrected Speed of Sound 34 2.2.3 Effect of Surface Tension on Resonance Frequency 36 2.2.4 Rayleigh’s Method for Calculating the Resonance Frequency 37 2.2.5 Logarithmic Decrement Method to Estimate Damping 38 2.2.6 Bulk Viscosity 40 2.2.7 First Estimate on the Frequency Dependence of Damping 41 2.3 Solution for Ramped Pulse Driving 42 2.4 Solution for Exponential Pulse Driving 47 2.5 Solution for Harmonic Driving and Fourier Analysis 50 2.5.1 Frequency-dependent Damping (Full Solution) 56 2.6 Non-linear Effects Associated with Non-complete Filling of the Nozzle 61 References 71 3 Two Degrees of Freedom System 75 3.1 Introduction 75 3.1.1 Rayleigh’s Method to Determine Approximately the Resonance Frequencies of a Two Degrees of Freedom System for the Case with Surface Tension 79 3.1.2 Calculation of the Damping of Two Degrees of Freedom System with Low Viscosity Using the Logarithmic Decrement Method 84 3.1.3 FlowThrough a Conical Nozzle 87 3.1.4 FlowThrough a Bell-mouth-shaped Nozzle 91 3.2 Governing Equations and Solutions for Square Pulse Driving 98 3.2.1 Special Cases 101 3.2.2 Solutions for the Low Viscosity Inks to Square Pulse Driving 105 3.2.3 Solutions for Inks with a Moderate Viscosity to Square Pulse Driving 111 3.2.4 Solutions for a High Viscosity Ink to Square Pulse Driving 115 3.3 Solutions for Ramped Pulse Driving 119 3.3.1 Solutions for Low Viscosity Inks to Ramp Actuation 121 3.3.2 Solutions for Moderate Viscosity Inks to Ramp Actuation 122 3.3.3 Solution for Large Viscosity Inks to Ramp Actuation 122 3.3.4 Solution to Ramped Pulse Driving 123 3.4 Solutions for Exponential Pulse Driving 128 3.4.1 Solution for Low Viscosity Inks to Exponential Ramp Driving 130 3.4.2 Solution for Moderate Viscosity Inks to Exponential Ramp Driving 131 3.4.3 Solution for Large Viscosity Inks to Exponential Ramp Actuation 131 3.4.4 Solutions to Exponential Pulse Driving (Pulse Consisting of Two Exponential Ramps) 132 3.5 Solution for Harmonic Driving and Fourier Analysis 134 3.5.1 Frequency Dependent Damping (Full Solution) 144 3.6 Non-linear Analysis 148 3.6.1 Capillary Pressure and Force in Conical Nozzle 157 3.6.2 Capillary Pressure and Force in Bell-mouth-shaped Nozzle 161 References 163 4 Multi-cavity Helmholtz Resonator Theory 167 4.1 Introduction 167 4.2 Governing Equations 169 4.2.1 Speed of Sound in Main Supply Channel 172 4.3 Solutions for Ramped Pulse Driving for Low Viscosity Inks 174 4.4 Solution for Harmonic Driving and Fourier Analysis 183 References 192 5 Waveguide Theory of Single-nozzle Print Head 193 5.1 Introduction 193 5.2 Long Waveguide Theory 197 5.2.1 Characteristics of a Closed End/Closed Pump of the Waveguide Type Without Connecting Ducts 202 5.2.2 Characteristics of an Open End/Closed End Pump of the Waveguide Type Without Connecting Ducts 204 5.2.3 Viscous Drag in Non-circular Channels 206 5.3 Solutions for Ramped Pulse Driving of the Waveguide-type Inkjet Pump 207 5.3.1 The Closed End/Closed End Case 207 5.3.2 Damping of the Closed End/Closed End Print Head 216 5.3.3 Open End/Closed End Case 219 5.4 Solutions for Harmonic Driving and Fourier Analysis Including the Effect of Damping 221 5.4.1 Solution of Wave Equation with Poiseuille Damping in Nozzle and Throttle 224 5.4.2 Sample Calculation and Results for Closed End/Closed End Print Head Channel Arrangement 227 5.4.3 Sample Calculation and Results for Open End/Closed End Print Head Channel Arrangement 230 5.4.4 Full Solution of Wave Equation Including Frequency-dependent Damping 233 5.4.5 Closed End/Closed End Case 238 5.4.6 Open End/Closed End Case 240 5.5 Non-linear Analysis of the Waveguide Type of Print Head Including Inertia, Viscous, and Surface Tension Effects in the Nozzle 243 5.5.1 Results for the Closed End/Closed End Arrangement 245 5.5.2 Results for the Open End/Closed End Type of Waveguide Pump 246 5.5.3 High Frequency Pulsing, Start-up, and Nozzle Front Flooding 249 5.5.4 Effect of an Air Bubble on the Internal Acoustics of a Print Head 252 5.5.5 Higher Order Meniscus Oscillations 254 5.6 Means and Methods to Enhance Fluid Velocity in Nozzle 258 References 259 6 Multi-cavity Waveguide Theory 263 6.1 Introduction to Multi-cavity Acoustics 263 6.2 Analysis of Cross-talk in an Open End/Closed End Linear Array Print Head with Alternately Activated and Non-activated Pumps 266 6.3 Analysis of Cross-talk in an Open End/Closed End Linear Array Print Head with Alternately One Pump Activated and Two Pumps Idling 277 6.4 Analysis of Cross-talk in an Open End/Closed End Linear Array Print Head with Alternately One Pump Activated and Three Pumps Idling 285 6.5 Analysis of Cross-talk in an Open End/Closed End Linear Array-shared Wall Shear-mode Print Head with Alternately One Pump Activated and Two Pumps Non-activated 297 6.6 Analysis of Cross-talk in a Closed End/Closed End Linear Array Print Head with Alternately Activated and Non-activated Pumps 302 References 307 7 Droplet Formation 309 7.1 Introduction 309 7.2 Analysis of Droplet Formation (Positive Pulse) 312 7.2.1 Force (Impulse) Consideration 313 7.2.2 Energy Consideration 316 7.2.3 Droplet Formation Criterion from a Retracted Meniscus 319 7.3 Analysis of Droplet Formation (Negative Pulse) 320 7.3.1 Force Consideration 321 7.3.2 Energy Consideration 324 7.4 Deceleration Due to Elongational and Surface Tension Effects Prior to Pinching Off 326 7.5 Non-linear Two Degrees of Freedom Analysis Including the Effects of Droplet Formation 332 7.6 Non-linear Waveguide Theory Including the Effects of Droplet Formation 335 7.6.1 Results for the Closed End/Closed End Arrangement 336 7.6.2 Results for the Open End/Closed End Type ofWaveguide Pump 340 References 344 8 Droplet Flight, Evaporation, Impact, Spreading, Permeation, and Drying 347 8.1 Introduction 347 8.2 Evaporation of a Free-flying Droplet Exposed to Still Air 348 8.3 Cooling of a Free-flying Droplet During Flight Through Still Air 353 8.4 Deceleration of a Free-flying Droplet due to Air Friction 355 8.5 Spreading 357 8.5.1 Static Spreading 359 8.5.2 Surface-tension-driven Spreading 362 8.5.3 Inertia-controlled Spreading 366 8.6 Permeation into Porous Substrates 389 8.7 Evaporation of Dome-shaped Blobs of Fluid 391 References 393 Appendix A: Solving Algebraic Equations 399 A.1 Second-order Algebraic Equation 399 A.2 Third-order Algebraic Equation 399 A.3 Fourth-order Algebraic Equation 402 References 404 Appendix B: Fourier Decomposition of a Pulse 407 B.1 Pulse with Two Ramps 407 B.2 Exponential Pulse 409 B.3 Pulse with Three Ramps and Two Stationary Levels 413 References 416 Appendix C: Toroidal Co-ordinate System 417 C.1 Introduction 417 C.2 Definition with Respect to Rectangular Co-ordinate System 417 C.3 Scale Factors 417 C.4 Elementary Line Element 418 C.5 Unit Vectors 418 C.6 Nabla Operator ∇ 419 C.7 Gradient of Scalar 419 C.8 Divergence of a Vector Field 419 C.9 Dyadic Product ∇v 420 C.10 Laplacian of Vector Field ∇. ∇v (∇2v) 421 C.11 Indefinite Integrals Involving Hyperbolic Functions 422 References 422 Index 423

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive overview of the research developments in the burgeoning field of metal-air batteries An innovation in battery science and technology is necessary to build better power sources for our modern lifestyle needs. One of the main fields being explored for the possible breakthrough is the development of metal-air batteries. Metal-Air Batteries: Fundamentals and Applications offers a systematic summary of the fundamentals of the technology and explores the most recent advances in the applications of metal-air batteries. Comprehensive in scope, the text explains the basics in electrochemical batteries and introduces various species of metal-air batteries. The author-a noted expert in the field-explores the development of metal-air batteries in the order of Li-air battery, sodium-air battery, zinc-air battery and Mg-O2 battery, with the focus on the Li-air battery. The text also addresses topics such as metallic anode, discharge products, parasitic reactions, electrocatalysts, mediator, and X-ray diffraction study in Li-air battery. Metal-Air Batteries provides a summary of future perspectives in the field of the metal-air batteries. This important resource: -Covers various species of metal-air batteries and their components as well as system designation -Contains groundbreaking content that reviews recent advances in the field of metal-air batteries -Focuses on the battery systems which have the greatest potential for renewable energy storage Written for electrochemists, physical chemists, materials scientists, professionals in the electrotechnical industry, engineers in power technology, Metal-Air Batteries offers a review of the fundamentals and the most recent developments in the area of metal-air batteries. Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction to Metal–Air Batteries: Theory and Basic Principles 1Zhiwen Chang and Xin-bo Zhang 1.1 Li–O2 Battery 1 1.2 Sodium–O2 Battery 5 References 7 2 Stabilization of Lithium-Metal Anode in Rechargeable Lithium–Air Batteries 11Bin Liu,Wu Xu, and Ji-Guang Zhang 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Recent Progresses in Li Metal Protection for Li–O2 Batteries 13 2.2.1 Design of Composite Protective Layers 13 2.2.2 New Insights on the Use of Electrolyte 18 2.2.3 Functional Separators 25 2.2.4 Solid-State Electrolytes 29 2.2.5 Alternative Anodes 30 2.3 Challenges and Perspectives 30 Acknowledgment 32 References 32 3 Li–Air Batteries: Discharge Products 41Xuanxuan Bi, RongyueWang, and Jun Lu 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 Discharge Products in Aprotic Li–O2 Batteries 43 3.2.1 Peroxide-based Li–O2 Batteries 43 3.2.1.1 Electrochemical Reactions 43 3.2.1.2 Crystalline and Electronic Band Structure of Li2O2 44 3.2.1.3 Reaction Mechanism and the Coexistence of Li2O2 and LiO2 47 3.2.2 Superoxide-based Li–O2 Batteries 52 3.2.3 Problems and Challenges in Aprotic Li–O2 Batteries 54 3.2.3.1 Decomposition of the Electrolyte 54 3.2.3.2 Degradation of the Carbon Cathode 55 3.3 Discharge Products in Li–Air Batteries 56 3.3.1 Challenges to Exchanging O2 to Air 56 3.3.2 Effect ofWater on Discharge Products 56 3.3.2.1 Effect of Small Amount ofWater 56 3.3.2.2 Aqueous Li–O2 Batteries 57 3.3.3 Effect of CO2 on Discharge Products 59 3.3.4 Current Li–Air Batteries and Perspectives 60 Acknowledgment 61 References 61 4 Electrolytes for Li–O2 Batteries 65Alex R. Neale, Peter Goodrich, Christopher Hardacre, and Johan Jacquemin 4.1 General Li–O2 Battery Electrolyte Requirements and Considerations 65 4.1.1 Electrolyte Salts 69 4.1.2 Ethers and Glymes 73 4.1.3 Dimethyl Sulfoxide (DMSO) and Sulfones 76 4.1.4 Nitriles 78 4.1.5 Amides 79 4.1.6 Ionic Liquids 80 4.1.7 Solid-State Electrolytes 86 4.2 Future Outlook 87 References 87 5 Li–Oxygen Battery: Parasitic Reactions 95Xiahui Yao, Qi Dong, Qingmei Cheng, and DunweiWang 5.1 The Desired and Parasitic Chemical Reactions for Li–Oxygen Batteries 95 5.2 Parasitic Reactions of the Electrolyte 96 5.2.1 Nucleophilic Attack 97 5.2.2 Autoxidation Reaction 99 5.2.3 Acid–Base Reaction 100 5.2.4 Proton-mediated Parasitic Reaction 100 5.2.5 Additional Parasitic Chemical Reactions of the Electrolyte: Reduction Reaction 102 5.3 Parasitic Reactions at the Cathode 102 5.3.1 The Corrosion of Carbon in the Discharge Process 104 5.3.2 The Corrosion of Carbon in the Recharge Process 106 5.3.3 Catalyst-induced Parasitic Chemical Reactions 106 5.3.4 Alternative Cathode Materials and Corresponding Parasitic Chemistries 110 5.3.5 Additives and Binders 111 5.3.6 Contaminations 111 5.4 Parasitic Reactions on the Anode 112 5.4.1 Corrosion of the Li Metal 114 5.4.2 SEI in the Oxygenated Atmosphere 114 5.4.3 Alternative Anodes and Associated Parasitic Chemistries 115 5.5 New Opportunities from the Parasitic Reactions 116 5.6 Summary and Outlook 117 References 118 6 Li–Air Battery: Electrocatalysts 125Zhiwen Chang and Xin-bo Zhang 6.1 Introduction 125 6.2 Types of Electrocatalyst 126 6.2.1 Carbonaceous Materials 126 6.2.1.1 Commercial Carbon Powders 126 6.2.1.2 Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs) 126 6.2.1.3 Graphene 127 6.2.1.4 Doped Carbonaceous Material 128 6.2.2 Noble Metal and Metal Oxides 129 6.2.3 Transition Metal Oxides 130 6.2.3.1 Perovskite Catalyst 131 6.2.3.2 Redox Mediator 133 6.3 Research of Catalyst 135 6.4 Reaction Mechanism 138 6.5 Summary 141 References 142 7 Lithium–Air BatteryMediator 151Zhuojian Liang, Guangtao Cong, YuWang, and Yi-Chun Lu 7.1 Redox Mediators in Lithium Batteries 151 7.1.1 Redox Mediators in Li–Air Batteries 151 7.1.2 Redox Mediators in Li-ion and Lithium-flow Batteries 153 7.1.2.1 Overcharge Protection in Li-ion Batteries 153 7.1.2.2 Redox Targeting Reactions in Lithium-flow Batteries 154 7.2 Selection Criteria and Evaluation of Redox Mediators for Li–O2 Batteries 156 7.2.1 Redox Potential 156 7.2.2 Stability 157 7.2.3 Reaction Kinetics and Mass Transport Properties 161 7.2.4 Catalytic Shuttle vs Parasitic Shuttle 163 7.3 Charge Mediators 166 7.3.1 LiI (Lithium Iodide) 170 7.3.2 LiBr (Lithium Bromide) 172 7.3.3 Nitroxides: TEMPO (2,2,6,6-Tetramethylpiperidinyloxyl) and Others 176 7.3.4 TTF (Tetrathiafulvalene) 180 7.3.5 Tris[4-(diethylamino)phenyl]amine (TDPA) 182 7.3.6 Comparison of the Reported Charge Mediators 183 7.4 Discharge Mediator 186 7.4.1 Iron Phthalocyanine (FePc) 190 7.4.2 2,5-Di-tert-butyl-1,4-benzoquinone (DBBQ) 192 7.5 Conclusion and Perspective 194 References 195 8 Spatiotemporal Operando X-ray Diffraction Study on Li–Air Battery 207Di-Jia Liu and Jiang-Lan Shui 8.1 Microfocused X-ray Diffraction (μ-XRD) and Li–O2 Cell Experimental Setup 207 8.2 Study on Anode: Limited Reversibility of Lithium in Rechargeable LAB 209 8.3 Study on Separator: Impact of Precipitates to LAB Performance 217 8.4 Study on Cathode: Spatiotemporal Growth of Li2O2 During Redox Reaction 222 References 230 9 Metal–Air Battery: In Situ Spectroelectrochemical Techniques 233IainM. Aldous, Laurence J. Hardwick, Richard J. Nichols, and J. Padmanabhan Vivek 9.1 Raman Spectroscopy 233 9.1.1 In Situ Raman Spectroscopy for Metal–O2 Batteries 233 9.1.2 BackgroundTheory 233 9.1.3 Practical Considerations 235 9.1.3.1 Electrochemical Roughening 235 9.1.3.2 Addressing Inhomogeneous SERS Enhancement 237 9.1.4 In Situ Raman Setup 238 9.1.5 Determination of Oxygen Reduction and Evolution Reaction MechanismsWithin Metal–O2 Batteries 239 9.2 Infrared Spectroscopy 247 9.2.1 Background 247 9.2.2 IR Studies of Electrochemical Interfaces 247 9.2.3 Infrared Spectroscopy for Metal–O2 Battery Studies 249 9.3 UV/Visible Spectroscopic Studies 253 9.3.1 UV/Vis Spectroscopy 254 9.3.2 UV/Vis Spectroscopy for Metal–O2 Battery Studies 255 9.4 Electron Spin Resonance 257 9.4.1 Cell Setup 259 9.4.2 Deployment of Electrochemical ESR in Battery Research 259 9.5 Summary and Outlook 262 References 262 10 Zn–Air Batteries 265Tongwen Yu, Rui Cai, and Zhongwei Chen 10.1 Introduction 265 10.2 Zinc Electrode 266 10.3 Electrolyte 268 10.4 Separator 270 10.5 Air Electrode 271 10.5.1 Structure of Air Electrode 271 10.5.2 Oxygen Reduction Reaction 271 10.5.3 Oxygen Evolution Reaction 272 10.5.4 Electrocatalyst 273 10.5.4.1 Noble Metals and Alloys 274 10.5.4.2 Transition Metal Oxides 275 10.5.4.3 Inorganic–Organic Hybrid Materials 278 10.5.4.4 Metal-free Materials 282 10.6 Conclusions and Outlook 288 References 288 11 Experimental and Computational Investigation of Nonaqueous Mg/O2 Batteries 293Jeffrey G. Smith, Gülin Vardar, CharlesW. Monroe, and Donald J. Siegel 11.1 Introduction 293 11.2 Experimental Studies of Magnesium/Air Batteries and Electrolytes 295 11.2.1 Ionic Liquids as Candidate Electrolytes for Mg/O2 Batteries 295 11.2.2 Modified Grignard Electrolytes for Mg/O2 Batteries 299 11.2.3 All-inorganic Electrolytes for Mg/O2 Batteries 303 11.2.4 Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy 307 11.3 Computational Studies of Mg/O2 Batteries 310 11.3.1 Calculation of Thermodynamic Overpotentials 310 11.3.2 Charge Transport in Mg/O2 Discharge Products 315 11.4 Concluding Remarks 320 References 321 12 Novel Methodologies to Model Charge Transport in Metal–Air Batteries 331Nicolai RaskMathiesen,Marko Melander,Mikael Kuisma, Pablo García-Fernández, and JuanMaria García Lastra 12.1 Introduction 331 12.2 Modeling Electrochemical Systems with GPAW 333 12.2.1 Density FunctionalTheory 333 12.2.2 Conductivity from DFT Data 335 12.2.3 The GPAWCode 337 12.2.4 Charge Transfer Rates with Constrained DFT 338 12.2.4.1 MarcusTheory of Charge Transfer 338 12.2.4.2 Constrained DFT 339 12.2.4.3 Polaronic Charge Transport at the Cathode 341 12.2.5 Electrochemistry at Solid–Liquid Interfaces 342 12.2.5.1 Modeling the Electrochemical Interface 342 12.2.5.2 Implicit Solvation at the Electrochemical Interface 343 12.2.5.3 Generalized Poisson–Boltzmann Equation for the Electric Double Layer 344 12.2.5.4 Electrode PotentialWithin the Poisson–Boltzmann Model 345 12.2.6 Calculations at Constant Electrode Potential 346 12.2.6.1 The Need for a Constant Potential Presentation 346 12.2.6.2 Grand Canonical Ensemble for Electrons 347 12.2.6.3 Fictitious Charge Dynamics 349 12.2.6.4 Model in Practice 350 12.2.7 Conclusions 351 12.3 Second Principles for MaterialModeling 351 12.3.1 The Energy in SP-DFT 352 12.3.2 The Lattice Term (E(0)) 353 12.3.3 Electronic Degrees of Freedom 354 12.3.4 Model Construction 357 12.3.5 Perspectives on SP-DFT 358 Acknowledgments 359 References 359 13 Flexible Metal–Air Batteries 367Huisheng Peng, Yifan Xu, Jian Pan, Yang Zhao, LieWang, and Xiang Shi 13.1 Introduction 367 13.2 Flexible Electrolytes 368 13.2.1 Aqueous Electrolytes 368 13.2.1.1 PAA-based Gel Polymer Electrolyte 369 13.2.1.2 PEO-based Gel Polymer Electrolyte 369 13.2.1.3 PVA-based Gel Polymer Electrolyte 371 13.2.2 Nonaqueous Electrolytes 373 13.2.2.1 PEO-based Polymer Electrolyte 373 13.2.2.2 PVDF-HFP-based Polymer Electrolyte 377 13.2.2.3 Ionic Liquid Electrolyte 377 13.3 Flexible Anodes 378 13.4 Flexible Cathodes 381 13.4.1 Modified Stainless Steel Mesh 381 13.4.2 Modified Carbon Textile 382 13.4.3 Carbon Nanotube 384 13.4.4 Graphene-based Cathode 385 13.4.5 Other Composite Electrode 386 13.5 Prototype Devices 386 13.5.1 Sandwich Structure 387 13.5.2 Fiber Structure 390 13.6 Summary 394 References 394 14 Perspectives on the Development of Metal–Air Batteries 397Zhiwen Chang and Xin-bo Zhang 14.1 Li–O2 Battery 397 14.1.1 Lithium Anode 397 14.1.2 Electrolyte 398 14.1.3 Cathode 398 14.1.4 The Reaction Mechanisms 399 14.1.5 The Development of Solid-state Li–O2 Battery 399 14.1.6 The Development of Flexible Li–O2 Battery 400 14.2 Na–O2 Battery 401 14.3 Zn–air Battery 402 References 403 Index 407

Read more less

Book SynopsisBiological Soft Matter Explore a comprehensive, one-stop reference on biological soft matter written and edited by leading voices in the fieldBiological Soft Matter: Fundamentals, Properties and Applications delivers a unique and indispensable compilation of up-to-date knowledge and material on biological soft matter. The book presents a thorough overview about biological soft matter, beginning with different substance classes, including proteins, nucleic acids, lipids, and polysaccharides. It goes on to describe a variety of superstructures and aggregated and how they are formed by self-assembly processes like protein folding or crystallization.The distinguished editors have included materials with a special emphasis on macromolecular assembly, including how it applies to lipid membranes, and proteins fibrillization. Biological Soft Matter is a crucial resource for anyone working in the field, compiling information about all important substance classes and their respective roles in forming superstructures.The book is ideal for beginners and experts alike and makes the perfect guide for chemists, physicists, and life scientists with an interest in the area. Readers will also benefit from the inclusion of: An introduction to DNA nano-engineering and DNA-driven nanoparticle assembly Explorations of polysaccharides and glycoproteins, engineered biopolymers, and engineered hydrogels Discussions of macromolecular assemblies, including liquid membranes and small molecule inhibitors for amyloid aggregation A treatment of inorganic nanomaterials as promoters and inhibitors of amyloid fibril formation An examination of a wide variety of natural and artificial polymers Perfect for materials scientists, biochemists, polymer chemists, and protein chemists, Biological Soft Matter: Fundamentals, Properties and Applications will also earn a place in the libraries of biophysicists and physical chemists seeking a one-stop reference summarizing the rapidly evolving topic of biological soft matter.Table of ContentsPreface ix Part I Natural and Artificial Polymers 1 1 DNA Nanoengineering and DNA-Driven Nanoparticle Assembly 3Alain Estève and Carole Rossi 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 From the DNA Molecule to Nanotechnologies 6 1.3 DNA Nanostructures: From Holliday Junctions to 3D Origami 7 1.4 DNA-Directed Assembly of Particles: From Concepts to the Realization of Ordered Assemblies 10 1.4.1 DNA/Nanoparticle Assembly: Primary Functionalization Strategies 12 1.4.2 Toward High-Order Crystalline Structures 12 1.4.3 Crystallization of Heterogeneous Systems 16 1.4.4 DNA/Nanoparticle Assembly: Applications 19 1.5 Nanoengineering of DNA Self-Assembled Al/CuO Nanothermite 20 1.5.1 Fundaments and Characterization of DNA/Surface Chemistry and Grafting Strategies 21 1.5.1.1 DNA/Alumina Interaction Evaluation Through Infrared Spectroscopy and First Principles Calculations 22 1.5.1.2 Functionalization Protocol and Colloidal Characterization 24 1.5.1.3 Quantification of Streptavidin and DNA Surface Densities 26 1.5.2 Kinetics of DNA-Directed Assembly of Al and CuO Nanoparticles 28 1.5.2.1 Design and Impact of the DNA Coding Sequence 29 1.5.3 Structural and Energetic Properties of the Al/CuO Bionanocomposite 32 1.6 Conclusion 35 References 36 2 Polysaccharides and Glycoproteins 43Sujit Kootala and Susana C.M. Fernandes 2.1 Introdution 43 2.2 Polysaccharides from Plants 45 2.3 Polysaccharides from Microorganisms 47 2.4 Polysaccharides from Marine Organisms 49 2.5 Glycoproteins from Animal Sources – Mammals 52 2.6 Summary 56 References 56 3 Engineered Biopolymers 65Tugba Dursun Usal, Cemile Kilic Bektas, Nesrin Hasirci, and Vasif Hasirci 3.1 Polyhydroxyalkanoates 65 3.1.1 Medium-Chain-Length Polyhydroxyalkanoates 67 3.1.2 Poly(3-hydroxybutyrate) 70 3.1.3 Poly(4-hydroxybutyrate) 71 3.1.4 Poly(3-hydroxyvalerate) 71 3.1.5 Poly(3-hydroxybutyrate-co-3-hydroxyvalerate) 71 3.2 Poly(lactic acid) (PLA) 72 3.2.1 Poly(L-lactic acid) 73 3.2.2 Poly(D-lactic acid) 75 3.2.3 Poly(DL-lactic acid) 75 3.3 Genetically Modified Polymers 76 3.3.1 Genetically Modified Amino Acid-Based Polymers 76 3.3.1.1 Elastin-Like Recombinamers (ELRs) 76 3.3.1.2 Inorganic-Binding Peptides 78 3.3.2 Genetically Modified Saccharide-Based Polymers 80 3.3.2.1 Bacterial Cellulose 80 3.4 Conclusion 81 References 81 4 Engineered Hydrogels 89Cemile Kilic Bektas, Tugba Dursun Usal, Nesrin Hasirci, and Vasif Hasirci 4.1 Properties of Hydrogels 89 4.1.1 Modification and Functionalization 90 4.1.1.1 Methacrylation 90 4.1.1.2 PEGylation 93 4.1.1.3 PNIPAm Conjugated Hydrogels 95 4.1.1.4 Hydrogels of Recombinant Polymers 96 4.1.2 New Approaches for 3D Hydrogel Preparation 98 4.1.2.1 Cryogels 98 4.1.2.2 Bottom-Up 3D Hydrogel Preparation Methods 100 4.2 Conclusion 106 References 106 Part II Macromolecular Assemblies 115 5 Lipid Membranes: Fusion, Instabilities, and Cubic Structure Formation 117Angelina Angelova, Borislav Angelov, and Yuru Deng 5.1 Introduction to Lipid Self-assembly and Membrane Organization 117 5.2 Lipid Membrane Instabilities and Phase Transitions 120 5.3 Shape Deformations and Membrane Curvature 123 5.4 Membrane Fusion 125 5.5 Cubic Membranes In Vivo and Bio-inspired Materials with Cubic Membrane Topology 132 5.6 Conclusion and Outlook 134 Acknowledgments 135 References 135 6 Small Molecule Inhibitors for Amyloid Aggregation 153Anisha Thomas, Gagandeep Kaur, Rafat Ali, and Sandeep Verma 6.1 Introduction 153 6.2 Targeting Strategies for Inhibition of Amyloid Aggregation 154 6.3 Classes of Inhibitors 155 6.3.1 Peptide-Based Amyloid Inhibitors 156 6.3.1.1 Peptides Derived from the Native Protein Sequence 156 6.3.1.2 Metal Ion Scavenging Peptides 161 6.3.1.3 β-Sheet Breaker Peptides 161 6.3.1.4 Peptides Containing D-Amino Acids 165 6.3.1.5 Molecules Targeting α-Helical State of Amyloid Proteins 165 6.3.1.6 Peptidomimetics 167 6.3.1.7 Cyclic Peptide Amyloid Inhibitors (CPAIs) 171 6.3.2 Non-peptide-Based Small Molecules 174 6.3.2.1 Quinones/Polyphenols/Natural Compounds 175 6.3.2.2 Macrocyclic Inhibitors 179 6.4 Future Outlook 181 Acknowledgments 181 References 182 7 Inorganic Nanomaterials as Promoters/Inhibitors of Amyloid Fibril Formation 195Monika Holubová 7.1 Introduction 195 7.2 Nanodiamonds 201 7.3 Carbon Nanotubes 202 7.3.1 Multiwalled Carbon Nanotubes 203 7.3.2 Single-Walled Carbon Nanotubes 204 7.4 Fullerenes–C60 205 7.5 Graphene/Graphene Oxide 208 7.6 Quantum Dots 209 7.7 Semiconductor Quantum Dots 211 7.8 Carbon/Graphene Quantum Dots 211 7.9 Iron Nanoparticles 212 7.10 Titanium Dioxide Nanoparticles 214 7.11 Gold Nanoparticles 216 7.12 Other Nanoparticles Based on Metals/Metalloids 218 7.13 Conclusion 218 Acknowledgment 221 References 222 Part III Mechanobiology 229 8 Mechanobiology 231Menekşe Ermis, Esen Say𝚤n, Ezgi Antmen, and Vasif Hasirci 8.1 Extracellular Matrix (ECM) 231 8.1.1 ECM Structure and Composition 232 8.1.1.1 Proteins of ECM 232 8.1.1.2 Glycosaminoglycans 235 8.1.1.3 Growth Factors 235 8.1.2 ECM Functions 235 8.1.3 ECM Properties 237 8.1.3.1 Physical Properties 237 8.1.3.2 Chemical Properties 237 8.1.3.3 Mechanical Properties 238 8.2 Cell Adhesion 238 8.2.1 Molecules in Cell Adhesion 238 8.2.2 Cell-to-Cell Interactions 240 8.2.2.1 Cell Junctions 240 8.2.2.2 Cell Polarity 241 8.2.3 Signaling Pathways in Cell Adhesion 241 8.2.3.1 Principles of Cell Adhesion Signaling 241 8.2.3.2 Tissue-Specific Cell Adhesion Molecules 242 8.2.3.3 Cell Migration Guidance 242 8.3 Cell-to-ECM Interactions 243 8.4 Interactions with Substrate and Tissue Engineering 244 8.4.1 Properties of Substrates 245 8.4.1.1 Physical Properties 245 8.4.1.2 Chemical Properties 251 8.4.1.3 Mechanical Properties 252 8.5 Mechanobiology, Mechanotransduction, and Force Transmission 252 8.5.1 Concepts 253 8.5.1.1 Mechanobiology 253 8.5.1.2 Force Transduction 253 8.5.1.3 Mechanotransduction 253 8.5.2 Cell Surface Receptors as Mechanosensors 255 8.5.3 Focal Adhesion Kinase Signaling 257 8.5.4 Cytoskeleton as a Force-Transducing Element 258 8.6 Conclusion 263 References 263 Index 271

Read more less

Book SynopsisDer "kleine" Atkins ist ideal für Bachelor-Studierende der Chemie und Studierende anderer Naturwissenschaften sowie der Ingenieurwissenschaften: das Buch führt ein in die Grundlagen der Physikalischen Chemie, die besonders hohe Anforderungen an die Studentinnen und Studenten stellt. Das erstmals auf Deutsch vorliegende Arbeitsbuch zur 5. Auflage des "kleinen" Atkins ermöglicht die eigenständige Kontrolle des Lernerfolgs dank der ausführlich durchgerechneten Lösungen der mehr als 800 Aufgaben aus dem Lehrbuch. Auch im attraktiven Deluxe-Set mit dem Lehrbuch erhältlich!Trade ReviewDas erstmals auf Deutsch vorliegende Arbeitsbuch zur 5. Auflage des ?kleinen? Atkins ermöglicht die eigenständige Kontrolle des Lernerfolgs dank der ausführlich durchgerechneten Lösungen der Aufgaben aus dem Lehrbuch. METALL (04.08.2021)Table of Contents1 Die Eigenschaften der Gase 1 Lösungen zu den Selbsttests 1 Lösungen zu den Übungen 5 Lösungen zu den Verständnisfragen 16 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 18 Lösungen zu den Projekten 24 2 Thermodynamik: der Erste Hauptsatz 31 Lösungen zu den Selbsttests 31 Lösungen zu den Übungen 38 Lösungen zu den Verständnisfragen 54 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 61 Lösungen zu den Projekten 76 3 Thermodynamik: der Zweite Hauptsatz 87 Lösungen zu den Selbsttests 87 Lösungen zu den Übungen 91 Lösungen zu den Verständnisfragen 99 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 102 Lösungen zu den Projekten 110 4 Physikalische Umwandlungen 113 Lösungen zu den Selbsttests 113 Lösungen zu den Übungen 120 Lösungen zu den Verständnisfragen 133 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 139 Lösungen zu den Projekten 154 5 Chemische Umwandlungen 161 Lösungen zu den Selbsttests 161 Lösungen zu den Übungen 179 Lösungen zu den Verständnisfragen 203 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 212 Lösungen zu den Projekten 275 6 Chemische Kinetik 281 Lösungen zu den Selbsttests 281 Lösungen zu den Übungen 290 Lösungen zu den Verständnisfragen 305 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 317 Lösungen zu den Projekten 342 7 Quantentheorie 353 Lösungen zu den Selbsttests 353 Lösungen zu den Übungen 356 Lösungen zu den Verständnisfragen 363 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 366 Lösungen zu den Projekten 372 8 Der Aufbau der Atome 377 Lösungen zu den Selbsttests 377 Lösungen zu den Übungen 384 Lösungen zu den Verständnisfragen 393 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 396 Lösungen zu den Projekten 404 9 Die chemische Bindung 409 Lösungen zu den Selbsttests 409 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 413 Lösungen zu den Verständnisfragen 417 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 420 Lösungen zu den Projekten 430 10 Molekulare Wechselwirkungen 437 Lösungen zu den Selbsttests 437 Lösungen zu den Übungen 440 Lösungen zu den Verständnisfragen 443 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 447 Lösungen zu den Projekten 460 11 Molekulare Spektroskopie 463 Lösungen zu den Selbsttests 463 Lösungen zu den Übungen 469 Lösungen zu den Verständnisfragen 486 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 491 Lösungen zu den Projekten 504 12 Statistische Thermodynamik 507 Lösungen zu den Selbsttests 507 Lösungen zu den Übungen 515 Lösungen zu den Verständnisfragen 521 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 525 Lösungen zu den Projekten 536 13 Magnetische Resonanz 541 Lösungen zu den Selbsttests 541 Lösungen zu den Übungen 543 Lösungen zu den Verständnisfragen 548 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 550 Lösungen zu den Projekten 555 14 Makromoleküle und Selbstorganisation 557 Lösungen zu den Selbsttests 557 Lösungen zu den Übungen 559 Lösungen zu den Verständnisfragen 562 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 564 Lösungen zu den Projekten 567 15 Festkörper 573 Lösungen zu den Selbsttests 573 Lösungen zu den Übungen 577 Lösungen zu den Verständnisfragen 582 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 585 Lösung zum Projekt 593

Read more less

Book SynopsisMetal Nano 3D Superlattices Unique view on producing metal nano 3D superlattices by differing their morphologies, crystalline structures, chemical, and physical properties After presenting an overview on the various factors involved in producing metal 3D superlattices called supracrystals by differing their morphologies, crystalline structures, chemical, physical, and intrinsic properties, Metal Nano 3D Superlattices: Synthesis, Properties, and Applications reveals the existence of new materials with unexpected properties. Readers will gain insight into the various approaches on the production and on the specific properties of nanocrystals self-assembled in 3D superlattices also called colloidal crystals, supra or super crystals. These properties open up new avenues of research and potentially aiding in major progress. Overall, the work reviews the progress of and gives perspective on assembled nanocrystals, with a concentrated focus on self-assemblies of metal nanocrystals. Sample topics covered by the highly qualified and internationally awarded author include: Syntheses of nanocrystals with low size distribution. The wide variety of self-assembled nanocrystals in 3D superlattices strongly depends on an impressive number of parameters. The intrinsic chemical and physical properties of 3D superlattices of nanocrystals opens the way to the discovery of unexpected properties. This concerns growth processes, coherent breathing of in 3D superlattices, electron transport through thick assemblies, etc. A strong analogy between atomic crystals and 3D superlattices of nanocrystals emerge: incompressible nanocrystals and coating agents act as mechanical springs holding together the nanocrystals and replace respectively, in atomic crystals, atoms and atomic bonds. The intrinsic chemical and physical properties of nanocrystals and their assemblies depend on their crystalline structures called nanocrystallinity. Collective properties due to dipolar interactions between nanocrystals are pointed out. Water soluble suprastructures act as efficient universal nanoheaters. In addition, reconstruction near the cytoplasmic membrane in tumor cells of nanocrystal self-assemblies takes place opening various biomedical applications. The physical (optical, magnetic, electronic, vibrational) properties of isolated nanocrystals remain present in addition to the intrinsic and collective properties. This allows to benefit from the unique properties of nanocrystals while avoiding their potential size-related risks in future applications. Metal Nano 3D Superlattices offers a deep dive into their synthesis, chemical and physical properties, and applications and is an essential resource for inorganic chemists, materials scientists, physical chemists, surface chemists, and medicinal chemists conducting research related to or involved in the practical application of the topics covered within.Table of Contents1. Analogy between atomic crystals and supracrystals 2. Nanocrystals Syntheses 3. Chemical and Physical properties of metal nanocrystals differing by their nanocrystallinities 4. Supracrystal growth processes. 5. Collective properties (optical, magnetic, vibrational) due to dipolar interactions of 2D and 3D supracrystals 6. Intrinsic properties of supracrystals 7. Elastic properties of supracrystals 8. 3D self assemblies of supracrystals in aqueous solution 9. Encapsulation of nanocrystals into liposomes 10. Potential application of such assemblies

Read more less

Book SynopsisNovel Electrochemical Energy Storage Devices Explore the latest developments in electrochemical energy storage device technologyIn Novel Electrochemical Energy Storage Devices, an accomplished team of authors delivers a thorough examination of the latest developments in the electrode and cell configurations of lithium-ion batteries and electrochemical capacitors. Several kinds of newly developed devices are introduced, with information about their theoretical bases, materials, fabrication technologies, design considerations, and implementation presented.You’ll learn about the current challenges facing the industry, future research trends likely to capture the imaginations of researchers and professionals working in industry and academia, and still-available opportunities in this fast-moving area. You’ll discover a wide range of new concepts, materials, and technologies that have been developed over the past few decades to advance the technologies of lithium‑ion batteries, electrochemical capacitors, and intelligent devices. Finally, you’ll find solutions to basic research challenges and the technologies applicable to energy storage industries.Readers will also benefit from the inclusion of: A thorough introduction to energy conversion and storage, and the history and classification of electrochemical energy storage An exploration of materials and fabrication of electrochemical energy storage devices, including categories, EDLCSs, pseudocapacitors, and hybrid capacitors A practical discussion of the theory and characterizations of flexible cells, including their mechanical properties and the limits of conventional architectures A concise treatment of the materials and fabrication technologies involved in the manufacture of flexible cells Perfect for materials scientists, electrochemists, and solid-state chemists, Novel Electrochemical Energy Storage Devices will also earn a place in the libraries of applied physicists, and engineers in power technology and the electrotechnical industry seeking a one-stop reference for portable and smart electrochemical energy storage devices.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Abbreviations xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Energy Conversion and Storage: A Global Challenge 1 1.2 Development History of Electrochemical Energy Storage 3 1.3 Classification of Electrochemical Energy Storage 4 1.4 LIBs and ECs: An Appropriate Electrochemical Energy Storage 6 1.5 Summary and Outlook 10 References 10 2 Materials and Fabrication 15 2.1 Mechanisms and Advantages of LIBs 15 2.1.1 Principles 15 2.1.2 Advantages and Disadvantages 16 2.2 Mechanisms and Advantages of ECs 18 2.2.1 Categories 18 2.2.2 EDLCs 18 2.2.3 Pseudocapacitor 20 2.2.4 Hybrid Capacitors 21 2.3 Roadmap of Conventional Materials for LIBs 22 2.4 Typical Positive Materials for LIBs 23 2.4.1 LiCoO2 Materials 23 2.4.2 LiNiO2 and Its Derivatives 25 2.4.3 LiMn2O4 Material 26 2.4.4 LiFePO4 Material 27 2.4.5 Lithium–Manganese-rich Materials 28 2.4.6 Commercial Status of Main Positive Materials 28 2.5 Typical Negative Materials for LIBs 29 2.5.1 Graphite 29 2.5.2 Soft and Hard Carbon 31 2.6 New Materials for LIBs 33 2.6.1 Nanocarbon Materials 33 2.6.2 Alloy-Based Materials 35 2.6.3 Metal Lithium Negative 39 2.7 Materials for Conventional ECs 39 2.7.1 Porous Carbon Materials 40 2.7.2 Transition Metal Oxides 41 2.7.3 Conducting Polymers 42 2.8 Electrolytes and Separators 42 2.8.1 Electrolytes 42 2.8.2 Separators 45 2.9 Evaluation Methods 46 2.9.1 Evaluation Criteria for LIBs 46 2.9.2 Theoretical Gravimetric and Volumetric Energy Density 46 2.9.3 Practical Energy and Power Density of LIBs 47 2.9.4 Cycle Life 48 2.9.5 Safety 48 2.9.6 Evaluation Methods for ECs 49 2.10 Production Processes for the Fabrication 50 2.10.1 Design 50 2.10.2 Mixing, Coating, Calendering, and Winding 51 2.10.3 Electrolyte Injecting and Formation 51 2.11 Perspectives 51 References 53 3 Flexible Cells: Theory and Characterizations 67 3.1 Limitations of the Conventional Cells 67 3.1.1 Mechanical Properties of Conventional Materials 67 3.1.2 Limitations of Conventional Architectures 68 3.1.3 Limitations of Electrolytes 69 3.2 Mechanical Process for Bendable Cells 69 3.2.1 Effect of Thickness 70 3.2.2 Effect of Flexible Substrates and Neutral Plane 71 3.3 Mechanics of Stretchable Cells 72 3.3.1 Wavy Architectures by Small Deformation Buckling Process 72 3.3.2 Wavy Architectures by Large Deformation Buckling Process 74 3.3.3 Island Bridge Architectures 75 3.4 Static Electrochemical Performance of Flexible Cells 76 3.5 Dynamic Performance of Flexible Cells 77 3.5.1 Bending Characterization 78 3.5.2 Stretching Characterization 78 3.5.3 Conformability Test 79 3.5.4 Stress Simulation by Finite Element Analysis 79 3.5.5 Dynamic Electrochemical Performance During Bending 83 3.5.6 Dynamic Electrochemical Performance During Stretching 85 3.6 Summary and Perspectives 90 References 90 4 Flexible Cells: Materials and Fabrication Technologies 95 4.1 Construction Principles of Flexible Cells 95 4.2 Substrate Materials for Flexible Cells 95 4.2.1 Polymer Substrates 96 4.2.2 Paper Substrate 97 4.2.3 Textile Substrate 98 4.3 Active Materials for Flexible Cells 98 4.3.1 CNTs 98 4.3.2 Graphene 99 4.3.3 Low-Dimensional Materials 99 4.4 Electrolytes for Flexible LIBs 101 4.4.1 Inorganic Solid-state Electrolytes for Flexible LIBs 102 4.4.2 Solid-state Polymer Electrolytes for Flexible LIBs 104 4.5 Electrolytes for Flexible ECs 104 4.6 Nonconductive Substrates-Based Flexible Cells 107 4.6.1 Paper-Based Flexible Cells 108 4.6.2 Textiles-Based Flexible Cells 112 4.6.3 Polymer Substrates-Based Flexible Cells 117 4.7 CNT and Graphene-Based Flexible Cells 121 4.7.1 Free-standing Graphene and CNTs Films for SCs 121 4.7.2 Free-standing Graphene and CNT Films for LIBs 122 4.7.3 Flexible CNTs/Graphene Composite Films for the Cells 125 4.8 Construction of Stretchable Cells by Novel Architectures 127 4.8.1 Stretchable Cells Based onWavy Architecture 127 4.8.2 Stretchable Cells Based on Island-Bridge Architecture 129 4.9 Conclusion and Perspectives 130 4.9.1 Mechanical Performance Improvement 131 4.9.2 Innovative Architecture for Stretchable Cells 132 4.9.3 Electrolytes Development 132 4.9.4 Packaging and Tabs 132 4.9.5 Integrated Flexible Devices 133 References 133 5 Architectures Design for Cells with High Energy Density 147 5.1 Strategies for High Energy Density Cells 147 5.2 Gravimetric and Volumetric Energy Density of Electrodes 149 5.3 Classification of Thick Electrodes: Bulk and Foam Electrodes 151 5.4 Design and Fabrication of Bulk Electrodes 153 5.4.1 Advantages of Bulk Electrodes 153 5.4.2 Low Tortuosity: The Key for Bulk Electrodes 155 5.5 Characterization and Numerical Simulation of Tortuosity 157 5.5.1 Characterization of Tortuosity by X-ray Tomography 157 5.5.2 Numerical Simulation of Tortuosity on Rates by Commercial Software 158 5.6 Fabrication Methods for Bulk Electrodes 159 5.7 Thick Electrodes with Random Pore Structure 160 5.7.1 Pressure-less High-temperature Sintering Process 160 5.7.2 Cold Sintering Process 161 5.7.3 Spark Plasma Sintering Technology 162 5.7.4 Brief Summary for Sintering Technologies 165 5.8 Thick Electrodes with Directional Pore Distribution 165 5.8.1 Iterative Extrusion Method 165 5.8.2 Magnetic-Induced Alignment Method 168 5.8.3 CarbonizedWood Template Method 168 5.8.4 Ice Templates Method 172 5.8.5 3D-Printing for Thick Electrodes 173 5.8.6 Brief Summary for Bulk Electrodes 175 5.9 Carbon-Based Foam Electrodes with High Gravimetric Energy Density 178 5.9.1 Graphene Foam 179 5.9.2 CNTs Foam 181 5.9.3 CNT/Graphene Foam 181 5.10 Carbon-Based Thick Electrodes 182 5.10.1 Low Electronic Conductive Material/Carbon Foam 182 5.10.2 Large Volume Variation Materials/Carbon Foam 186 5.10.3 Compact Graphene Electrodes 188 5.10.4 Summary for Carbon Foam Electrodes 189 5.11 Thick Electrodes Based on the Conductive Polymer Gels 191 5.12 Summary and Perspectives 193 References 195 6 Miniaturized Cells 205 6.1 Introduction 205 6.1.1 Definition of the Miniaturized Cells and Their Applications 205 6.1.2 Classification of Miniaturized Cells 206 6.1.3 Development Trends of the Miniaturized Cells 207 6.2 Evaluation Methods for the Miniaturized Cells 209 6.2.1 Evaluation Methods for Electric Double-layer m-ECs 210 6.2.2 Evaluation methods for m-LIBs and m-ECs 211 6.3 Architectures of Various Miniaturized Cells 212 6.4 Materials for the Miniaturized Cells 213 6.4.1 Electrode Materials 213 6.4.2 Electrolytes for the Miniaturized Cells 214 6.5 Fabrication Technologies for Miniaturized Cells 215 6.5.1 Fabrication of Miniaturized Cells with 2D Parallel Plate Configuration 216 6.6 Fabrication Technologies for 2D Interdigitated Cells 220 6.7 Printing Technologies for 2D Interdigitated Cells 222 6.7.1 Advantages of Printing Technologies 222 6.7.2 Classification of Printing Techniques 222 6.7.3 Screen Printing for Miniaturized Cells 224 6.7.4 Inkjet Printing 228 6.8 Electrochemical Deposition Method for 2D Interdigitated Cells 228 6.9 Laser Scribing for 2D Interdigitated Cells 231 6.10 In Situ Electrode Conversion for 2D Interdigitated Cells 234 6.11 Fabrication Technologies for 3D In-plane Miniaturized Cells 236 6.11.1 3D Printing for 3D Interdigitated Configuration Cells 236 6.11.2 3D Interdigitated Configuration by Electrodeposition 239 6.12 Fabrication of Miniaturized Cells with 3D Stacked Configuration 240 6.12.1 3D Stacked Configuration by Template Deposition 241 6.12.2 3D Stacked Configuration by Microchannel-Plated Deposition Methods 245 6.13 Integrated Systems 247 6.14 Summary and Perspectives 249 References 250 7 Smart Cells 263 7.1 Definition of Smart Materials and Cells 263 7.1.1 Definition of Smart Cells 263 7.1.2 Definition of Smart Materials 263 7.2 Type of Smart Materials 264 7.2.1 Self-healing Materials 264 7.2.2 Shape-memory Alloys 265 7.2.3 Thermal-responding PTC Thermistors 266 7.2.4 Electrochromic Materials 267 7.3 Construction of Smart Cells 268 7.3.1 Self-healing Silicon Anodes 268 7.3.2 Aqueous Self-healing Electrodes 271 7.3.3 Liquid-alloy Self-healing Electrode Materials 273 7.3.4 Thermal-responding Layer 274 7.3.5 Thermal-responding Electrodes Based on the PTC Effect 276 7.3.6 Ionic Blocking Effect-Based Thermal-responding Electrodes 278 7.4 Application of Shape-memory Materials in LIBs and ECs 280 7.4.1 Self-adapting Cells 280 7.4.2 Shape-memory Alloy-Based Thermal Regulator 281 7.5 Self-heating and Self-monitoring Designs 282 7.5.1 Self-heating 283 7.5.2 Self-monitoring 285 7.6 Integrated Electrochromic Architectures for Energy Storage 286 7.6.1 Integration Possibilities 286 7.6.2 Integrated Electrochromic ECs 287 7.6.3 Integrated Electrochromic LIBs 289 7.7 Summary and Perspectives 291 References 292 Index 301

Read more less

Book SynopsisTemplated Fabrication of Graphene-Based aterials for Energy Applications An illuminating look at the latest research on graphene-based materials and their applications in energy In Templated Fabrication of Graphene-Based Materials for Energy Applications, a team of distinguished materials scientists delivers a unique and topical exploration of a versatile fabrication method used to create high-quality graphene and composites. The book offers a three-part approach to current topics in graphene fabrication. The first part introduces graphene-based materials and is followed by cutting-edge discussions of template methods used in the preparation of graphene-based materials. The editors conclude with the latest research in the area of graphene-based materials applications in various energy-related pursuits. Readers will find relevant content that refers to original research conducted by the editors themselves, as well as work from up-and-coming and established researchers that explores the most interesting horizons in the study of graphene-based materials. The book also provides: A thorough introduction to graphene, including its history and physical properties An in-depth analysis of current graphene synthesis strategies, including the classification of graphene preparations Expansive discussions of various kinds of template methods for graphene production, including the study of porous metals and the preparation of graphene in large quantities Comprehensive explorations of the applications of various graphene-based materials, including lithium-ion batteries, lithium-sulfur batteries, and supercapacitors Perfect for materials scientists, electrochemists, and solid-state physicists, Templated Fabrication of Graphene-Based Materials for Energy Applications will also earn a place in the libraries of physical chemists and professionals in the electrotechnical industry.Table of ContentsPART I INTRODUCTION OF GRAPHENE-BASED MATERIALS Chapter 1. Graphene-Based Materials: Structure, Properties Chapter 2. Graphene Synthesis: An Overview of Current Status PART II GRAPHENE-BASED MATERIALS FABRICATED BY TEMPLATE-ASSISTED CHEMICAL METALLURGY METHODS Chapter 3. Nanoporous Metal Template Methods Chapter 4. Soluble Salt Template Methods Chapter 5. Powder Metallurgy Template Methods PART III APPLICATIONS Chapter 6. Graphene-Based Materials for Lithium-Ion Batteries Chapter 7. Graphene-Based Materials for Sodium-Ion Batteries Chapter 8. Graphene-Based Materials for Lithium-Sulfur Batteries Chapter 9. Graphene-Based Materials for Supercapacitors Chapter 10. Graphene-Based Materials for Electrocatalysis

Read more less

Book Synopsis3D and Circuit Integration of MEMS Explore heterogeneous circuit integration and the packaging needed for practical applications of microsystemsMEMS and system integration are important building blocks for the “More-Than-Moore” paradigm described in the International Technology Roadmap for Semiconductors. And, in 3D and Circuit Integration of MEMS, distinguished editor Dr. Masayoshi Esashi delivers a comprehensive and systematic exploration of the technologies for microsystem packaging and heterogeneous integration. The book focuses on the silicon MEMS that have been used extensively and the technologies surrounding system integration.You’ll learn about topics as varied as bulk micromachining, surface micromachining, CMOS-MEMS, wafer interconnection, wafer bonding, and sealing. Highly relevant for researchers involved in microsystem technologies, the book is also ideal for anyone working in the microsystems industry. It demonstrates the key technologies that will assist researchers and professionals deal with current and future application bottlenecks.Readers will also benefit from the inclusion of:A thorough introduction to enhanced bulk micromachining on MIS process, including pressure sensor fabrication and the extension of MIS process for various advanced MEMS devicesAn exploration of epitaxial poly Si surface micromachining, including process condition of epi-poly Si, and MEMS devices using epi-poly SiPractical discussions of Poly SiGe surface micromachining, including SiGe deposition and LP CVD polycrystalline SiGeA concise treatment of heterogeneously integrated aluminum nitride MEMS resonators and filtersPerfect for materials scientists, electronics engineers, and electrical and mechanical engineers, 3D and Circuit Integration of MEMS will also earn a place in the libraries of semiconductor physicists seeking a one-stop reference for circuit integration and the practical application of microsystems.Table of ContentsPart I Introduction 1 1 Overview 3Masayoshi Esashi References 10 Part II System on Chip 13 2 Bulk Micromachining 15Xinxin Li and Heng Yang 2.1 Process Basis of Bulk Micromachining Technologies 16 2.2 Bulk Micromachining Based on Wafer Bonding 20 2.2.1 SOI MEMS 20 2.2.2 Cavity SOI Technology 27 2.2.3 Silicon on Glass Processes: Dissolved Wafer Process (DWP) 29 2.3 Single-Wafer Single-Side Processes 34 2.3.1 Single-Crystal Reactive Etching and Metallization Process (SCREAM) 34 2.3.2 Sacrificial Bulk Micromachining (SBM) 38 2.3.3 Silicon on Nothing (SON) 40 References 45 3 Enhanced Bulk Micromachining Based on MIS Process 49Xinxin Li and Heng Yang 3.1 Repeating MIS Cycle for Multilayer 3D structures or Multi-sensor Integration 49 3.1.1 Pressure Sensors with PS3 Structure 49 3.1.2 P+G Integrated Sensors 52 3.2 Pressure Sensor Fabrication – From MIS Updated to TUB 54 3.3 Extension of MIS Process for Various Advanced MEMS Devices 58 References 58 4 Epitaxial Poly Si Surface Micromachining 61Masayoshi Esashi 4.1 Process Condition of Epi-poly Si 61 4.2 MEMS Devices Using Epi-poly Si 61 References 67 5 Poly-SiGe Surface Micromachining 69Carrie W. Low, Sergio F. Almeida, Emmanuel P. Quévy, and Roger T. Howe 5.1 Introduction 69 5.1.1 SiGe Applications in IC and MEMS 70 5.1.2 Desired SiGe Properties for MEMS 70 5.2 SiGe Deposition 70 5.2.1 Deposition Methods 70 5.2.2 Material Properties Comparison 71 5.2.3 Cost Analysis 72 5.3 LPCVD Polycrystalline SiGe 73 5.3.1 Vertical Furnace 73 5.3.2 Particle Control 75 5.3.3 Process Monitoring and Maintenance 75 5.3.4 In-line Metrology for Film Thickness and Ge Content 76 5.3.5 Process Space Mapping 77 5.4 CMEMS® Process 78 5.4.1 CMOS Interface Challenges 79 5.4.2 CMEMS Process Flow 80 5.4.2.1 Top Metal Module 80 5.4.2.2 Plug Module 84 5.4.2.3 Structural SiGe Module 85 5.4.2.4 Slit Module 85 5.4.2.5 Structure Module 85 5.4.2.6 Spacer Module 85 5.4.2.7 Electrode Module 85 5.4.2.8 Pad Module 86 5.4.3 Release 86 5.4.4 Al–Ge Bonding for Microcaps 87 5.5 Poly-SiGe Applications 88 5.5.1 Resonator for Electronic Timing 88 5.5.2 Nano-electro-mechanical Switches 92 References 94 6 Metal Surface Micromachining 99Minoru Sasaki 6.1 Background of Surface Micromachining 99 6.2 Static Device 100 6.3 Static Structure Fixed after the Single Movement 101 6.4 Dynamic Device 103 6.4.1 MEMS Switch 103 6.4.2 Digital Micromirror Device 104 6.5 Summary 111 References 111 7 Heterogeneously Integrated Aluminum Nitride MEMS Resonators and Filters 113Enes Calayir, Srinivas Merugu, Jaewung Lee, Navab Singh, and Gianluca Piazza 7.1 Overview of Integrated Aluminum Nitride MEMS 113 7.2 Heterogeneous Integration of Aluminum Nitride MEMS Resonators with CMOS Circuits 114 7.2.1 Aluminum Nitride MEMS Process Flow 115 7.2.2 Encapsulation of Aluminum Nitride MEMS Resonators and Filters 116 7.2.3 Redistribution Layers on Top of Encapsulated Aluminum Nitride MEMS 118 7.2.4 Selected Individual Resonator and Filter Frequency Responses 119 7.2.5 Flip-chip Bonding of Aluminum Nitride MEMS with CMOS 121 7.3 Heterogeneously Integrated Self-Healing Filters 123 7.3.1 Application of Statistical Element Selection (SES) to AlN MEMS Filters with CMOS Circuits 123 7.3.2 Measurement of 3D Hybrid Integrated Chip Stack 124 References 127 8 MEMS Using CMOS Wafer 131Weileun Fang, Sheng-Shian Li, Yi Chiu, and Ming-Huang Li 8.1 Introduction: CMOS MEMS Architectures and Advantages 131 8.2 Process Modules for CMOS MEMS 139 8.2.1 Process Modules for Thin Films 140 8.2.1.1 Metal Sacrificial 140 8.2.1.2 Oxide Sacrificial 142 8.2.1.3 TiN-composite (TiN-C) 143 8.2.2 Process Modules for the Substrate 145 8.2.2.1 SF6 and XeF2 (Dry Isotropic) 145 8.2.2.2 KOH and TMAH (Wet Anisotropic) 146 8.2.2.3 RIE and DRIE (Front-side RIE, Backside DRIE) 146 8.3 The 2P4M CMOS Platform (0.35 μm) 148 8.3.1 Accelerometer 148 8.3.2 Pressure Sensor 149 8.3.3 Resonators 150 8.3.4 Others 152 8.4 The 1P6M CMOS Platform (0.18 μm) 154 8.4.1 Tactile Sensors 154 8.4.2 IR Sensor 156 8.4.3 Resonators 158 8.4.4 Others 160 8.5 CMOS MEMS with Add-on Materials 164 8.5.1 Gas and Humidity Sensors 164 8.5.1.1 Metal Oxide 164 8.5.1.2 Polymer 170 8.5.2 Biochemical Sensors 173 8.5.3 Pressure and Acoustic Sensors 175 8.5.3.1 Microfluidic Structures 178 8.6 Monolithic Integration of Circuits and Sensors 180 8.6.1 Multi-sensor Integration 180 8.6.1.1 Gas Sensors 180 8.6.1.2 Physical Sensors 181 8.6.2 Readout Circuit Integration 183 8.6.2.1 Resistive Sensors 183 8.6.2.2 Capacitive Sensors 184 8.6.2.3 Inductive Sensors 188 8.6.2.4 Resonant Sensors 190 8.7 Issues and Concerns 191 8.7.1 Residual Stresses, CTE Mismatch, and Creep of Thin Films 192 8.7.1.1 Initial Deformation – Residual Stress 192 8.7.1.2 Thermal Deformation – Thermal Expansion Coefficient Mismatch 195 8.7.1.3 Long-time Stability – Creep 197 8.7.2 Quality Factor, Materials Loss, and Temperature Stability 199 8.7.2.1 Anchor Loss 201 8.7.2.2 Thermoelastic Damping (TED) 201 8.7.2.3 Material and Interface Loss 201 8.7.3 Dielectric Charging 203 8.7.4 Nonlinearity and Phase Noise in Oscillators 204 8.8 Concluding Remarks 205 References 207 9 Wafer Transfer 221Masayoshi Esashi 9.1 Introduction 221 9.2 Film Transfer 223 9.3 Device Transfer (via-last) 228 9.4 Device Transfer (Via-First) 231 9.5 Chip Level Transfer 236 References 241 10 Piezoelectric MEMS 243T Takeshi Kobayashi (AIST) 10.1 Introduction 243 10.1.1 Fundamental 243 10.1.2 PZT Thin Films Property as an Actuator 244 10.1.3 PZT Thin Film Composition and Orientation 246 10.2 PZT Thin Film Deposition 246 10.2.1 Sputtering 246 10.2.2 Sol–Gel 248 10.2.2.1 Orientation Control 248 10.2.2.2 Thick Film Deposition 249 10.2.3 Electrode Materials and Lifetime of PZT Thin Films 250 10.3 PZT–MEMS Fabrication Process 251 10.3.1 Cantilever and Microscanner 251 10.3.2 Poling 254 References 255 Part III Bonding, Sealing and Interconnection 257 11 Anodic Bonding 259Masayoshi Esashi 11.1 Principle 259 11.2 Distortion 262 11.3 Influence of Anodic Bonding to Circuits 263 11.4 Anodic Bonding with Various Materials, Structures and Conditions 265 11.4.1 Various Combinations 265 11.4.2 Anodic Bonding with Intermediate Thin Films 269 11.4.3 Variation of Anodic Bonding 271 11.4.4 Glass Reflow Process 274 References 276 12 Direct Bonding 279Hideki Takagi 12.1 Wafer Direct Bonding 279 12.2 Hydrophilic Wafer Bonding 279 12.3 Surface Activated Bonding at Room Temperature 283 References 286 13 Metal Bonding 289Joerg Froemel 13.1 Solid Liquid Interdiffusion Bonding (SLID) 290 13.1.1 Au/In and Cu/In 291 13.1.2 Au/Ga and Cu/Ga 294 13.1.3 Au/Sn and Cu/Sn 297 13.1.4 Void Formation 297 13.2 Metal Thermocompression Bonding 298 13.2.1.1 Interface Formation 299 13.2.1.2 Grain Reorientation 299 13.2.1.3 Grain Growth 300 13.3 Eutectic Bonding 301 13.3.1 Au/Si 302 13.3.2 Al/Ge 302 13.3.3 Au/Sn 304 References 304 14 Reactive Bonding 309Klaus Vogel, Silvia Hertel, Christian Hofmann, Mathias Weiser, Maik Wiemer, Thomas Otto, and Harald Kuhn 14.1 Motivation 309 14.2 Fundamentals of Reactive Bonding 309 14.3 Material Systems 311 14.4 State of the Art 312 14.5 Deposition Concepts of Reactive Material Systems 313 14.5.1 Physical Vapor Deposition 313 14.5.1.1 Conclusion Physical Vapor Deposition and Patterning 315 14.5.2 Electrochemical Deposition of Reactive Material Systems 315 14.5.2.1 Dual Bath Technology 316 14.5.2.2 Single Bath Technology 318 14.5.2.3 Conclusion DBT and SBT 319 14.5.3 Vertical Reactive Material Systems With 1D Periodicity 319 14.5.3.1 Dimensioning 320 14.5.3.2 Fabrication 321 14.5.3.3 Conclusion 323 14.6 Bonding With RMS 323 14.7 Conclusion 326 References 326 15 Polymer Bonding 331Xiaojing Wang and Frank Niklaus 15.1 Introduction 331 15.2 Materials for Polymer Wafer Bonding 332 15.2.1 Polymer Adhesion Mechanisms 332 15.2.2 Properties of Polymers for Wafer Bonding 335 15.2.3 Polymers Used in Wafer Bonding 337 15.3 Polymer Wafer Bonding Technology 341 15.3.1 Process Parameters in Polymer Wafer Bonding 341 15.3.2 Localized Polymer Wafer Bonding 348 15.4 Precise Wafer-to-Wafer Alignment in Polymer Wafer Bonding 350 15.5 Practical Examples of Polymer Wafer Bonding Processes 351 15.6 Summary and Conclusions 354 References 354 16 Soldering by Local Heating 361Yu-Ting Cheng and Liwei Lin 16.1 Soldering in MEMS Packaging 361 16.2 Laser Soldering 362 16.3 Resistive Heating and Soldering 365 16.4 Inductive Heating and Soldering 368 16.5 Other Localized Soldering Processes 370 16.5.1 Self-propagative Reaction Heating 370 16.5.2 Ultrasonic Frictional Heating 371 References 374 17 Packaging, Sealing, and Interconnection 377Masayoshi Esashi 17.1 Wafer Level Packaging 377 17.2 Sealing 378 17.2.1 Reaction Sealing 378 17.2.2 Deposition Sealing (Shell Packaging) 380 17.2.3 Metal Compression Sealing 385 17.3 Interconnection 388 17.3.1 Vertical Feedthrough Interconnection 388 17.3.1.1 Through Glass via (TGV) Interconnection 388 17.3.1.2 Through Si via (TSiV) Interconnection 393 17.3.2 Lateral Feedthrough Interconnection 395 17.3.3 Interconnection by Electroplating 401 References 404 18 Vacuum Packaging 409Masayoshi Esashi 18.1 Problems of Vacuum Packaging 409 18.2 Vacuum Packaging by Anodic Bonding 409 18.3 Packaging by Anodic Bonding with Controlled Cavity Pressure 414 18.4 Vacuum Packaging by Metal Bonding 416 18.5 Vacuum Packaging by Deposition 417 18.6 Hermeticity Testing 417 References 420 19 Buried Channels in Monolithic Si 423Kazusuke Maenaka 19.1 Buried Channel/Cavity in LSI and MEMS 423 19.2 Monolithic SON Technology and Related Technologies 425 19.3 Applications of SON 435 References 439 20 Through-substrate Vias 443Zhyao Wang 20.1 Configurations of TSVs 444 20.1.1 Solid TSVs 444 20.1.2 Hollow TSVs 445 20.1.3 Air-gap TSVs 445 20.2 TSV Applications in MEMS 445 20.2.1 Signal Conduction to the Wafer Backside 446 20.2.2 CMOS-MEMS 3D Integration 446 20.2.3 MEMS and CMOS 2.5D Integration 447 20.2.4 Wafer-level Vacuum Packaging 448 20.2.5 Other Applications 450 20.3 Considerations for TSV in MEMS 450 20.4 Fundamental TSV Fabrication Technologies 450 20.4.1 Deep Hole Etching 451 20.4.1.1 Deep Reactive Ion Etching 451 20.4.1.2 Laser Ablation 452 20.4.2 Insulator Formation 454 20.4.2.1 Silicon Dioxide Insulators 454 20.4.2.2 Polymer Insulators 455 20.4.2.3 Air-gaps 455 20.4.3 Conductor Formation 455 20.4.3.1 Polysilicon 456 20.4.3.2 Single Crystalline Silicon 456 20.4.3.3 Tungsten 457 20.4.3.4 Copper 457 20.4.3.5 Other Conductor Materials 459 20.5 Polysilicon TSVs 460 20.5.1 Solid Polysilicon TSVs 460 20.5.2 Air-gap Polysilicon TSVs 463 20.6 Silicon TSVs 464 20.6.1 Solid Silicon TSVs 465 20.6.2 Air-gap Silicon TSVs 467 20.7 Metal TSVs 469 20.7.1 Solid Metal TSVs 470 20.7.2 Hollow Metal TSVs 474 20.7.3 Air-gap Metal TSVs 480 References 481 Index 493

Read more less

Book SynopsisState-of-the-art overview on bioepoxy polymers as well as their blends and composites -- covering all aspects from fundamentals to applications! Bioepoxy polymers is an emerging area and have attracted more and more attention due to their biodegradability and good thermo-mechanical performance. In recent years, research progress has been made in synthesis, processing, characterization, and applications of bioepoxy blends and composites. Bioepoxy polymers are very promising candidates to replace the traditional thermosetting nonbiodegradable polymers. Bio-Based Epoxy Polymers, Blends and Composites summaries recent research progress on bioepoxy polymers as well as their blends and composites. It covers aspects from synthesis, processing, various characterization techniques to broad spectrum of applications. It provides a correlation of physical properties with macro, micro and nanostructures of the materials. Moreover, research trends, future directions, and opportunities are also discussed. Attracts attention: Bioepoxy polymers are environmentally friendly and considered as a promising candidate to replace the traditional thermosetting nonbiodegradable polymers Highly application-oriented: Bioepoxy polymers can be used in a broad range of applications such as polymer foams, construction, aerospace, automobiles, self-healing systems One-stop reference: Covers all aspects of bioepoxy polymer, their blends and composites, such as synthesis, properties, processing, characterization and applications Broad audience: Attracts attention from both academia and industryTable of ContentsPreface xiii About the Authors xv 1 Synthesis of Bio-Based Epoxy Resins 1Piotr Czub and Anna Sienkiewicz 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Plant Oil Bio-Based Epoxy Resins 2 1.3 Substitutes for Bisphenol A Replacement 13 1.3.1 Lignin-Based Phenols 13 1.3.2 Vanilin 23 1.3.3 Cardanol 36 1.3.4 Isosorbide 46 1.3.5 Terpene Derivatives 51 1.4 Bio-Based Epoxy Curing Agents 56 References 66 2 Natural/Synthetic Fiber-Reinforced Bioepoxy Composites 73BoWang, Silu Huang, and Libo Yan 2.1 Introduction 73 2.2 Synthetic and Natural Fibers 73 2.2.1 Synthetic Fibers 74 2.2.1.1 Organic Synthetic Fibers 74 2.2.1.2 Inorganic Synthetic Fibers 77 2.2.2 Natural Fibers 82 2.2.2.1 Plant-Based Natural Fibers 82 2.2.2.2 Animal-Based Natural Fibers 86 2.2.2.3 Mineral-Based Natural Fibers 87 2.2.3 Hybrid Fiber Product 88 2.3 Bioepoxy 89 2.3.1 Natural Oil-Based Epoxy 89 2.3.2 Isosorbide-Based Epoxy (IS-EPO) 90 2.3.3 Furan-Based Epoxy 92 2.3.4 Polyphenolic Epoxy (Vegetable Tannins) 94 2.3.5 Epoxidized Natural Rubber (ENR) 94 2.3.6 Lignin-Based Epoxy 96 2.3.7 Rosin-Based Epoxy 97 2.4 Fiber-Reinforced Bioepoxy Composites 98 2.4.1 Synthetic Fiber-Reinforced Bioepoxy Composites 98 2.4.2 Natural Fiber-Reinforced Bioepoxy Composites 101 2.4.3 Natural–Synthetic Hybrid Fiber-Reinforced Bioepoxy Composites 103 2.5 Future Perspectives 104 2.6 Conclusions 105 Acknowledgments 105 References 106 3 Polymer Blends Based on Bioepoxy Polymers 117Sudheer Kumar and Sukhila Krishnan 3.1 Introduction 117 3.2 Plant Oils 118 3.2.1 Chemical and Physical Properties of Plant Oils 118 3.2.2 Chemical Modification of Plant Oils 120 3.3 Preparation of Bioepoxy Polymer Blends with Epoxy Resins 121 3.3.1 Castor Oil-Based Bioepoxy Polymer Blend 123 3.3.2 Soybean Oil-Based BioepoxyThermoset Polymer Blend 126 3.3.3 Linseed Oil-Based BioepoxyThermoset Polymer Blend 129 3.3.4 Palm Oil-Based Bioepoxy Thermoset Polymer Blend 131 3.4 Application of Bioepoxy Polymer Blends 133 3.4.1 Paints and Coatings 133 3.4.2 Adhesives 133 3.4.3 Aerospace Industry 134 3.4.4 Electric Industry 134 3.5 Conclusion 134 References 135 4 Cure Kinetics of Bio-epoxy Polymers, Their Blends, and Composites 143P.A. Parvathy, SmithaMohanty, and Sushanta K. Sahoo 4.1 Introduction 143 4.2 Fundamentals of Curing Reaction Kinetics 144 4.2.1 Curing Kinetic Theories: Isothermal and Non-isothermal 144 4.3 Curing of Bio-thermosets 147 4.3.1 Curing Agents and Curing Reactions 147 4.4 Curing Kinetics of Bio-epoxies and Blends 149 4.4.1 Curing Kinetics of Bio-epoxy Composites 155 4.5 Case Study: Non-isothermal Kinetics of Plant Oil–Epoxy–Clay Composite 156 4.6 Conclusion and Future Prospective 161 References 161 5 Rheology of Bioepoxy Polymers, Their Blends, and Composites 167Appukuttan Saritha, Battula D.S. Deeraj, Jitha S. Jayan, and Kuruvilla Joseph 5.1 Introduction 167 5.2 Rheology of Bioepoxy-Based Polymers 168 5.2.1 Natural Oil-Based Epoxies 169 5.2.2 Isosorbide-Based Epoxy Resins 172 5.2.3 Phenolic and Polyphenolic Epoxies 175 5.2.4 Epoxidized Natural Rubber-Based Epoxies 176 5.2.5 Epoxy Lignin Derivatives 178 5.2.6 Rosin-Based Resin 181 5.3 Rheology of Bioepoxy-Based Composites 181 5.4 Rheology of Bioepoxy-Based Blends 187 5.5 Conclusions and Future Scope 190 References 190 6 Dynamical Mechanical Thermal Analysis of Bioepoxy Polymers, Their Blends, and Composites 197Angel Romo-Uribe 6.1 Focus 197 6.2 Bioepoxies and Reinforcers 198 6.3 Dynamic Mechanical Analysis and Polymer Dynamics 198 6.4 Applications 207 6.5 Conclusion 210 References 211 7 Mechanical Properties of Bioepoxy Polymers, Their Blends, and Composites 215Ahmad Y. Al-Maharma, Yousef Heider, BerndMarkert, and Marcus Stoffel 7.1 Introduction 215 7.2 Mechanical Properties of Bioepoxy Polymers 216 7.2.1 Effect of Modifying Bioepoxy Chemical Structure 218 7.2.2 Effect of Curing Agents 218 7.3 Blends of Bioepoxy Resin 220 7.3.1 Toughening Effect of EVO-Based Resins 220 7.3.2 Effect of Chemical Interaction in Epoxy Blend 223 7.3.3 Increasing Content Effect of EVOs in Bioepoxy Blend 223 7.4 Bioepoxy-Based Composites 226 7.4.1 Undesirable Effect of Moisture Absorption 226 7.4.2 Fiber-Reinforced Bioepoxy Composite 227 7.4.2.1 Natural Fiber-Reinforced Bioepoxy Composites 227 7.4.2.2 Synthetic Fiber-Reinforced Bioepoxy Composites 229 7.4.2.3 Hybrid Fiber-Reinforced Bioepoxy Composites 230 7.4.3 Bioepoxy-Based Nanocomposites 230 7.4.3.1 Nanoclay-Reinforced Bioepoxy Composites 231 7.4.3.2 Cellulose Nanofiller-Reinforced Bioepoxy Composites 233 7.4.4 Multiscale Bioepoxy Composites 235 7.5 Conclusion 235 7.6 Future Perspectives and Recommendations 237 Acknowledgment 237 References 237 8 Bio-epoxy Polymer, Blends and Composites Derived Utilitarian Electrical, Magnetic and Optical Properties 249RaviPrakashMagisetty and Naga Srilatha CH 8.1 Introduction 249 8.2 Significance of Bioepoxy-Based Materials 250 8.3 Bioepoxy-Derived Utilitarian Electrical, Magnetic, and Optical Properties 252 8.3.1 Bioepoxy-Based Material: Electrical and Electronic Properties 252 8.3.2 Bioepoxy-Based Material: Magnetic and Optoelectronic Properties 257 8.4 Conclusion 262 References 263 9 Spectroscopy and OtherMiscellaneous Techniques for the Characterization of Bio-epoxy Polymers, Their Blends, and Composites 267Mohammad Khajouei, Peyman Pouresmaeel-Selakjani, and Mohammad Latifi 9.1 Introduction 267 9.2 Various Methods for Epoxy Polymer Characterization 268 9.2.1 FTIR Spectroscopy 268 9.2.1.1 How Phase Separation Process Can Affect the IR Spectrum 270 9.2.2 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR) Spectroscopy 270 9.2.3 Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC) 274 9.2.4 Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) 275 9.3 Various Bio-Based Epoxy Polymers,Theirs Uses, and Methods of Characterization in Review 275 9.3.1 Fire-Retardant-Based Epoxy 276 9.3.2 (Lignocellulosic Biomass)-Based Epoxy Polymers 277 9.3.3 Furan-Based Epoxy Resin 278 9.3.4 Rosin Corrosive-Based Epoxy 278 9.3.5 Itaconic Corrosive-Based Epoxy 278 9.3.6 Self-mending Epoxy Resin 279 9.3.7 Other Epoxy Polymers 279 References 280 10 Flame Retardancy of Bioepoxy Polymers, Their Blends, and Composites 283Young-O Kim and Yong Chae Jung 10.1 Introduction 283 10.2 Methods for Analyzing Flame-Retardant Properties 284 10.2.1 LOI (Limiting Oxygen Index) 286 10.2.2 UL-94 287 10.2.2.1 Horizontal Testing (UL-94 HB) 287 10.2.2.2 Vertical Testing (UL-94 V) 288 10.2.3 Cone Calorimeter 288 10.2.3.1 Configuration 288 10.2.3.2 Controlling Factors: Heat Flux,Thickness, and Distance Between Sample Surface and Cone Heater 289 10.2.4 Microscale Combustion Calorimeter 292 10.3 Halogen-Free Flame-RetardantMarket 293 10.4 Bioepoxy Polymers with Flame-Retardant Properties 293 10.4.1 Lignocellulosic Biomass-Derived Epoxy Polymers 294 10.4.1.1 Eugenol 294 10.4.1.2 Vanillin 296 10.4.2 Furan 297 10.4.3 Tannins 298 10.5 Use of Fillers for Improving Flame-Retardant Properties of Bioepoxy Polymers 298 10.6 Conclusion 302 Acknowledgment 303 References 303 11 Water Sorption and Solvent Sorption of Bio-epoxy Polymers, Their Blends, and Composites 309Amirthalingam V. Kiruthika 11.1 Introduction 309 11.2 Bio-epoxy Resins 310 11.2.1 Soybean Oil (SO)-Based Epoxy Resins 310 11.2.2 Cardanol-Based Epoxy 312 11.2.3 Lignin-Based Epoxy 313 11.2.4 Gallic Acid (C7H6O5)-Based Epoxy 314 11.2.5 Itaconic Acid (C5H6O4)-Based Epoxy 314 11.2.6 Natural Rubber (NR)-Based Epoxy 315 11.2.7 Rosin-Based Epoxy 317 11.2.8 Furan-Based Epoxy 317 11.2.9 Hempseed Oil-Based Epoxy 318 11.2.10 Eugenol (C10H12O2)-Based Epoxy 319 11.3 Conclusion 319 References 320 12 Biobased Epoxy: Applications in Mendable and Reprocessable Thermosets, Pressure-Sensitive Adhesives and Thermosetting Foams 323Roxana A. Ruseckaite, Pablo M. Stefani, and Facundo I. Altuna 12.1 Introduction 323 12.2 Mendable and Reprocessable Biobased Epoxy Polymers 324 12.2.1 Extrinsic Self-healing Biobased Epoxies 326 12.2.2 Intrinsic Self-healing Biobased Epoxies 328 12.3 Pressure-Sensitive Adhesives (PSAs) From Biobased Epoxy Building Blocks 333 12.4 Biobased Epoxy Foams 342 12.4.1 Syntactic Foams from Biobased Epoxy Resins 342 12.4.2 Thermosetting Epoxy Foams 345 References 353 Index 361

Read more less

Book SynopsisNanotechnology in Electronics Enables readers to understand and apply state-of-the-art concepts surrounding modern nanotechnology in electronics Nanotechnology in Electronics summarizes numerous research accomplishments in the field, covering novel materials for electronic applications (such as graphene, nanowires, and carbon nanotubes) and modern nanoelectronic devices (such as biosensors, optoelectronic devices, flexible electronics, nanoscale batteries, and nanogenerators) that are used in many different fields (such as sensor technology, energy generation, data storage and biomedicine). Edited by four highly qualified researchers and professionals in the field, other specific sample topics covered in Nanotechnology in Electronics include: Graphene-based nanoelectronics biosensors, including the history, properties, and fundamentals of graphene, plus fundamentals of graphene derivatives and the synthesis of graphene Zinc oxide piezoelectronic nanogenerators for low frequency applications, with an introduction to zinc oxide and zinc oxide piezoelectric nanogenerators Investigation of the hot junctionless mosfets, including an overview of the junctionless paradigm and a simulation framework of the hot carrier degradation Conductive nanomaterials for printed/flexible electronics application and metal oxide semiconductors for non-invasive diagnosis of breast cancer The fundamental aspects and applications of multiferroic-based spintronic devices and quartz tuning fork based nanosensors. Containing in-depth information on the topic and written intentionally to help with the practical application of concepts described within, Nanotechnology in Electronics is a must-have reference for materials scientists, electronics engineers, and engineering scientists who wish to understand and harness the state of the art in the field.Table of ContentsNANOTECHNOLOGY AND ELECTRONICS - INTRODUCTION SEMICONDUCTORS FOR NANOELECTRONICS Nanoelectronics and Semiconductors Devices Application of Air-Sensitive Semiconductors in Nanoelectronics Metals for Nanoelectronics Semiconductor Nanowires: From Macroelectronics to Nanoelectronics SiGe QUANTUM STRUCTURES FOR NANOELECTRONICS GRAPHENE-BASED NANOELECTRONIC BIOSENSORS Graphene-Based Nanoelectronic Biosensors Recent Advances in Graphene-Based Biosensors DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES OF RUBBER-BASED NANOCOMPOSITES Dielectric Properties of Rubbers Dielectric Properties of Natural Rubber-Based Nanocomposites Containing Graphene Dielectric Properties of Silicone Rubber/Tib2 Nanocomposites Dielectric Properties of Tio2/Silicone Rubber Micro- and Nanocomposites DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES OF NON-RUBBER-BASED NANOCOMPOSITES Dielectric Properties of Polymers Dielectric Properties of Composites Dielectric Properties of Nanocomposites Dielectric Properties of Bio-Nanocomposites ELECTRONIC PROPERTIES OF NANOWIRES AND THEIR ELECTRONIC APPLICATIONS Electronics Properties of Nanowires Silicon Nanowires and Their Applications Metallic Nanowires and Their Applications Nanowire Electronic and Optoelectronic Devices Indium Phosphide Nanowires and Their Applications in Optoelectronic Devices Large-Scale Integration of Semiconductor Nanowires for High-Performance Flexible Electronics THEORETICAL ANALYSIS AND MODELING FOR NANOELECTRONICS Theoretical Analysis for Nanoelectronics Modeling for Nanoelectronics HYBRID AND NANOCOMPOSITE MATERIALS FOR FLEXIBLE ORGANIC ELECTRONICS APPLICATIONS Production Methods of Flexible Organic Electronics Properties of Flexible Organic Electronics Limitations of Their Use in Flexible Electronics Applications CARBON NANOTUBE-BASED NANOCOMPOSITES FOR ELECTRONICS APPLICATIONS Carbon Nanotubes (CNT) Based Nanocomposites CNT-Epoxy Composites for Electrically Conductive Adhesives Electrochemical Deposition of CNT-Cu Composites Recent Development of CNT Materials for Li Ion Batteries Polyaniline/Carbon Nanotube Nanocomposite Film-Based Electronic Gas Sensors NANOELECTRONIC DEVICES IN MEDICAL AND BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS Nanoelectronic Devices in Medical Applications Nanoelectronic Devices in Biomedical Applications SILICON-BASED NANOELECTRONICS AND NANOELECTROMECHANICS Silicon-Based Nanoelectromechanics SiO2/Semiconductor Nanoelectronic Materials ENVIRONMENTAL CHALLENGES IN NANOELECTRONICS MANUFACTURING Environmental Problems Effect of Nanoelectronics in Environment ZINC OXIDE PIEZOELECTRIC NANOGENERATORS FOR LOW FREQUENCY APPLICATIONS Zinc Oxide Piezoelectric Nanogenerators Nano-Generators for Low Frequency Applications Zinc Oxide Piezoelectric Nanogenerators for Low Frequency Applications PIEZOELECTRIC ENERGY GENERATION AND HARVESTING AT THE NANO-SCALE: MATERIALS AND DEVICES Piezoelectric Materials and Devices Piezoelectric Energy Generation and Harvesting at The Nano-Scale

Read more less

Book Synopsis2D Functional Nanomaterials Outlines the latest developments in 2D heterojunction nanomaterials with energy conversion applications In 2D Functional Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Characterization, and Applications, Dr. Ganesh S. Kamble presents an authoritative overview of the most recent progress in the rational design and synthesis of 2D nanomaterials and their applications in semiconducting catalysts, biosensors, electrolysis, batteries, and solar cells. This interdisciplinary volume is a valuable resource for materials scientists, electrical engineers, nanoscientists, and solid-state physicists looking for up-to-date information on 2D heterojunction nanomaterials. The text summarizes the scientific contributions of international experts in the fabrication and application of 2D nanomaterials while discussing the importance and impact of 2D nanomaterials on future economic growth, novel manufacturing processes, and innovative products. Provides thorough coverage of graphene chemical derivatives synthesis and applications, including state-of-the-art developments and perspectives Describes 2D/2D graphene oxide-layered double hydroxide nanocomposites for immobilization of different radionuclides Covers 2D nanomaterials for biomedical applications and novel 2D nanomaterials for next-generation photodetectors Discusses applications of 2D nanomaterials for cancer therapy and recent trends ingraphene-latex nanocomposites Perfect for materials scientists, inorganic chemists, and electronics engineers, 2D Functional Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Characterization, and Applications is also an essential resource for solid-state physicists seeking accurate information on recent progress in two-dimensional heterojunction materials with energy conversion applications.Table of ContentsForeword xvii Preface xxi 1 Graphene Chemical Derivatives Synthesis and Applications: State-of-the-Art and Perspectives 1 Maxim K. Rabchinskii, Maksim V. Gudkov, and Dina Yu. Stolyarova 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Graphene Oxide: Synthesis Methods and Chemistry Alteration 3 1.3 Graphene Oxide Reduction and Functionalization 6 1.4 Applications of CMGs 13 1.5 Concluding Remarks 15 Acknowledgments 15 References 16 2 2D/2D Graphene Oxide-Layered Double Hydroxide Nanocomposite for the Immobilization of Different Radionuclides 21 Paulmanickam Koilraj and Keiko Sasaki 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Synthesis of GO/LDH Composite 22 2.2.1 Co-precipitation 22 2.2.2 Hydrothermal Preparation 23 2.2.3 Self-Assembly of LDH Nanosheets with GO Nanosheets 24 2.3 Removal of Radionuclides 24 2.3.1 U(VI) Removal 24 2.3.2 Sorption of Eu(III) with the Presence of GO on LDH 25 2.3.3 Co-remediation Anionic SeO42− and Cationic Sr2+ 26 2.4 Conclusion 29 References 29 3 2D Nanomaterials for Biomedical Applications 31 Poliraju Kalluru and Raviraj Vankayala 3.1 Introduction 31 3.1.1 Photothermal and Photodynamic Therapy 31 3.1.2 Bioimaging and Drug/Gene Delivery 34 3.1.3 Biosensors 37 3.1.4 Antibacterial Activity 39 3.1.5 Tissue Engineering and Regenerative Medicine 41 3.2 Conclusions 43 References 43 4 Novel Two-Dimensional Nanomaterials for Next-Generation Photodetectors 47 Khurelbaatar Zagarzusem and Zumuukhorol Munkhsaikhan 4.1 Introduction 47 4.2 2D Materials for PDs 49 4.2.1 Graphene 49 4.2.2 TMDs (Transition Metal Dichalcogenides) 49 4.2.3 MXenes (2D Transition Metal Carbides/Nitrides) 50 4.2.4 Xenes (Monoelemental 2D Materials) 50 4.3 The Physical Mechanism Enabling Photodetection 50 4.4 Characterization Parameters for Photodetectors 51 4.4.1 Responsivity 51 4.4.2 Detectivity 52 4.4.3 External Quantum Efficiency 52 4.4.4 Gain 52 4.4.5 Response Time 52 4.4.6 Noise Equivalent Power 52 4.5 Synthesis Methods for 2D Materials 53 4.5.1 Mechanical Exfoliation 53 4.5.2 Liquid Exfoliation 53 4.5.3 Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) 53 4.6 Photodetectors Based on 2D Materials 55 4.6.1 Photodetectors Based on Graphene 55 4.6.2 Photodetectors Based on MoS2 55 4.6.3 Photodetectors Based on BP 55 4.7 Photodetectors Based on 2D Heterostructures 56 4.8 Conclusions and Outlook 58 References 58 5 2D Nanomaterials for Cancer Therapy 63 Naresh Kuthala 5.1 Introduction 63 5.2 2D Nanomaterials for Cancer Therapy 64 5.2.1 2D Nanomaterials for Combination PTT with PDT 64 5.2.2 2D-Nanomaterials for Combination PTT Therapy with Radiotherapy (RT) 68 5.2.3 2D Nanomaterials for Combination PTT Therapy with Sonodynamic Therapy (SDT) 70 5.2.4 2D Nanomaterials for Combination PTT Therapy with Immune Therapy (ImT) 73 5.3 Summary and Future Perspectives 76 References 76 6 Graphene and Its Derivatives – Synthesis and Applications 81 Amer Al-Nafiey 6.1 Introduction 81 6.2 Graphite 81 6.2.1 Define 81 6.2.2 Synthetic Graphite 82 6.2.3 Characterized and Properties of Graphite 82 6.2.3.1 Structure 82 6.2.4 Applications 84 6.3 Graphene Oxide 84 6.3.1 Define 84 6.3.2 Synthetic of Graphene Oxide 84 6.3.3 Characterized and Properties of Graphene Oxide 84 6.3.3.1 Structure 84 6.3.3.2 Properties of Graphene Oxide 87 6.3.3.3 Applications of Graphene Oxide 88 6.3.3.4 Few Examples 88 6.4 Reduced Graphene Oxide 89 6.4.1 Define 89 6.4.2 Synthetic of Reduced Graphene Oxide or Reduction of Graphene Oxide 89 6.4.2.1 Thermal Reduction of GO 90 6.4.2.2 Photocatalytic Method 94 6.4.2.3 Electrochemical Method 95 6.4.2.4 Other Methods 95 6.4.3 Characterized, Structure, and Properties of Reduced Graphene Oxide 95 6.4.3.1 Structure 96 6.4.3.2 Properties and Applications of Reduced Graphene Oxide 97 6.5 Graphene 98 6.5.1 Define 98 6.5.2 Synthesis of Graphene 98 6.5.2.1 Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) 101 6.5.2.2 Epitaxial Growth 102 6.5.2.3 Mechanical Exfoliation 104 6.5.2.4 Chemical Reduction of Graphene Oxide (GO) 105 6.5.3 Characterized, Structure, and Properties of Graphene 105 6.5.3.1 Surface Properties 105 6.5.3.2 Electronic Properties 105 6.5.3.3 Optical Properties 106 6.5.3.4 Mechanical Properties 107 6.5.3.5 Thermal Properties 107 6.5.3.6 Photocatalytic Properties 108 6.5.3.7 Magnetic Properties 109 6.5.3.8 Characterizations of Graphene 109 6.5.3.9 Morphology (SEM, TEM, and AFM) 109 6.5.3.10 Raman Spectroscopy 111 6.5.3.11 X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) 111 6.5.3.12 UV–Visible Spectroscopy 112 6.5.3.13 X-ray Diffraction (XRD) 114 6.5.3.14 Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) 114 6.5.3.15 FTIR Spectroscopy 115 6.5.4 Application of Graphene 116 References 116 7 Recent Trends in Graphene – Latex Nanocomposites 125 Anand Krishnamoorthy 7.1 Introduction 125 7.2 Polymer Lattices – An Overview 125 7.3 Graphene – Background 127 7.4 Preparation and Functionalization of Graphene 128 7.5 Graphene – Latex Nanocomposites: Preparation Properties and Applications 129 7.6 Conclusions 137 References 138 8 Advanced Characterization and Techniques 141 Raja Murugesan 8.1 Introduction 141 8.2 Characterization Techniques 141 8.2.1 Optical Techniques – Dynamic Light Scattering (DLS) 141 8.2.2 Optical Spectroscopy 144 8.2.3 NMR-Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy 145 8.2.4 Infrared Spectroscopy (IR) and Raman Spectroscopy 145 8.2.5 X-Ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) 146 8.2.6 Characterization Based on Interactions with Electrons or Electron Microscopy (EM) 147 8.2.6.1 Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) 147 8.2.6.2 Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) 149 8.2.6.3 Scanning Transmission Electron Microscopy (STEM) 150 8.2.6.4 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM) 151 8.2.7 Atomic Force Microscopy (AFM) 151 8.2.8 Kelvin Probe Force Microscopy (KPFM) 152 8.2.9 X-Ray-Based Techniques 152 References 154 9 2D Nanomaterials: Sustainable Materials for Cancer Therapy Applications 157 Mamta Chahar and Sarita Khaturia 9.1 Introduction 157 9.2 Types of 2D Nanomaterials 158 9.3 Methods for the Synthesis of 2D Nanomaterials 160 9.4 Mechanism of Cancer Theranostics 162 9.5 Applications of 2D Nanomaterials 163 9.6 Conclusion 163 References 169 10 Recent Advances in Functional 2D Materials for Field Effect Transistors and Nonvolatile Resistive Memories 175 Adnan Younis, Jawad Alsaei, Basma Al-Najar, Hacene Manaa, Pranay Rajan, El Hadi S. Sadki, Aicha Loucif, and Shama Sehar 10.1 Introduction to 2D Materials 175 10.2 Electronic Band Structure in 2D Materials 176 10.3 Electronic Transport Properties of 2D Materials 178 10.4 Two-Dimensional Materials in Field Effect Transistors 180 10.4.1 Field Effect Transistors 180 10.4.2 The Rise of 2D Materials Research in FETs 180 10.4.3 Graphene-Based Field Effect Transistors 181 10.4.4 2D Transition Metal Dichalcogenides (TMDCs) in Transistors 183 10.5 Two-Dimensional Materials as Nonvolatile Resistive Memories 184 10.5.1 Nonvolatile Resistive Memories Based on Graphene and Its Derivatives 185 10.5.2 Resistive Switching Memories in 2D Materials “Beyond” Graphene 187 10.5.2.1 Solution-Processed MoS2-Based Resistive Memories 187 10.5.2.2 Solution-Processed Black Phosphorous Nonvolatile Resistive Memories 188 10.5.2.3 Emerging NVM Based on Hexagonal Boron Nitride (h-BN) 188 10.6 Conclusions and Outlook 189 References 190 11 2D Advanced Functional Nanomaterials for Cancer Therapy 199 Raj Kumar, Naveen Bunekar, Sunil Dutt, Pulikanti G. Reddy, Abhishek K. Gupta, Keshaw R. Aadil, Vivek K. Mishra, Shivendra Singh, and Chandrani Sarkar 11.1 Introduction 199 11.2 2D Nanomaterials Classification 202 11.2.1 Graphene Family Nanomaterials 202 11.2.2 Transition Metal Dichalcogenides (TMDs) 203 11.2.3 Layered Double Hydroxides (LDHs) 205 11.2.4 Carbonitrides (MXenes) 206 11.2.5 Black Phosphorus (BP) 206 11.3 Cancer Therapy 208 11.3.1 Mechanism of Action in Cancer Therapy 212 11.3.1.1 Mode of Action of 2D Nanomaterials 212 11.3.2 Photodynamic Therapy for Cancer Cell Treatment 215 11.3.2.1 Mechanism of Photodynamic Therapy 215 11.3.2.2 2D Nanomaterials as Photosensitizer for PDT 217 11.3.2.3 Application of 2D Nanomaterials in Photodynamic Therapy 217 11.3.3 2D Nanomaterials-Cancer Detection/Diagnosis/Theragnostic 218 11.4 Tissue Engineering 219 11.5 Conclusion 220 Acknowledgment 221 References 221 12 Synthesis of Nanostructured Materials Via Green and Sol–Gel Methods: A Review 235 Ankit S. Bartwal, Rahul Thakur, Sumit Ringwal, and Satish C. Sati 12.1 Introduction 235 12.2 Methods Used in Nanostructured Synthesis 236 12.2.1 Green Method of Nanoparticles Synthesis 236 12.2.2 Sol–Gel Method of Nanoparticles Synthesis 236 12.2.3 Green Method of Nanocomposites Synthesis 241 12.2.4 Sol–Gel Method of Nanocomposites 241 12.3 Discussion 241 12.4 Conclusion 244 References 244 13 Study of Antimicrobial Activity of ZnO Nanoparticles Using Leaves Extract of Ficus auriculata Based on Green Chemistry Principles 249 Gurpreet Kour, Ankit S. Bartwal, and Satish C. Sati 13.1 Introduction 249 13.2 Materials and Methods 250 13.2.1 Chemicals 250 13.2.2 Methodology 250 13.2.3 Antimicrobial Activity 251 13.3 Results and Discussion 251 13.3.1 Characterization of Synthesized Zinc-Oxide Nanoparticles (ZnONPs) 251 13.3.1.1 XRD Analysis 251 13.3.1.2 FT-IR Analysis 252 13.3.1.3 SEM Analysis 254 13.3.1.4 TEM Analysis 254 13.3.2 Antibacterial Activity 254 13.4 Conclusion 255 Acknowledgments 255 References 255 14 Piezoelectric Properties of Na1−xKxNbO3 near x = 0.475, Morphotropic Phase Region 257 Surendra Singh and Narayan S. Panwar 14.1 Introduction 257 14.2 Experimental Procedure 259 14.3 Results and Discussion 260 References 262 15 Synthesis and Characterization of SDC Nano-Powder for IT-SOFC Applications 265 Bharati B. Patil 15.1 Introduction 265 15.1.1 Solid Oxide Fuel Cells (SOFCs) 265 15.1.2 Intermediate Temperature Solid Oxide Fuel Cells (IT-SOFCs) 266 15.1.3 Why Samarium-Doped Ceria (SDC) Material? 266 15.1.4 Various Synthesis Methods for SDC 267 15.1.5 Why SDC Synthesis by Combustion Process? 268 15.1.6 Why SDC Synthesis by Glycine Nitrate Combustion Process (GNP)? 268 15.1.7 Applications of SDC Material Related to Intermediate Temperature Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 269 15.1.7.1 Applications of SDC as SOFC Electrolyte 269 15.1.7.2 Applications of SDC to Make Composite Anode 269 15.1.7.3 Applications of SDC to Make Composite Cathode 270 15.1.7.4 Applications of SDC as an Interlayer 270 15.1.7.5 Applications of SDC as an Additional Anode Layer 270 15.2 Experimental 270 15.2.1 Powder Synthesis 270 15.2.2 Powder Characterization 271 15.3 Results and Discussion 272 15.3.1 TG-DTG Study 272 15.3.2 XRD Analysis 272 15.3.3 Powder Microstructure 276 15.3.3.1 SEM Analysis 276 15.3.3.2 TEM Analysis 277 15.3.3.3 EDAX Analysis 277 15.3.3.4 BET Analysis 278 15.3.4 Electrical Properties 278 15.4 Conclusions 281 Acknowledgments 281 References 282 16 Introduction of 2D Nanomaterials and Their Photocatalytic Applications 285 Kallappa Ramchandra Sanadi 16.1 Introduction 285 16.2 Definitions of Nanomaterials 286 16.3 History of Nanotechnology 286 16.3.1 Top-down Approach 286 16.3.2 Bottom-up Approach 286 16.4 Classification of Nanomaterials 286 16.4.1 Zero-Dimensional (0-D) 287 16.4.2 One-Dimensional (1-D) 287 16.4.3 Three-Dimensional (3-D) 287 16.4.4 Two-Dimensional (2-D) 287 16.4.4.1 Synthetic Methods 288 16.5 Characterization Techniques for 2D Nanomaterials 290 16.6 Applications of 2D Nanomaterials 291 16.7 Photocatalytic Application 291 16.7.1 Why Photocatalyst? 291 16.7.2 Brief History of Photocatalysis 292 16.7.3 Principles of Heterogeneous Photocatalysis 292 16.7.4 Photocatalytic Study of 2D Nanomaterials 293 16.7.5 Challenges Behind 2D Nanomaterials as a Photocatalyst 294 References 294 17 Graphene and Its Analogous 2D-Layered Materials for Flexible Persistent Energy Storage Devices in Consumer Electronics 297 Himadri Tanaya Das, K. Hariprasad, and T. E. Balaji 17.1 Introduction 297 17.2 Brief Sketch of the Types of SC and Its Working Mechanism 298 17.3 Evolution of Electrode Materials for Flexible Supercapacitors 300 17.4 Developing Graphene Electrodes with Different Nanocomposites 304 17.4.1 Other Carbon-Based Nanomaterials with Graphene 304 17.4.2 Using Organic Composites with Graphene 306 17.4.3 Conductive Polymer with Graphene 306 17.4.4 Combining Graphene with Other Metal Oxides/Hydroxides 308 17.4.5 Combining Graphene with Other 2D-Layered Materials 308 17.5 Novel Technologies to Develop Flexible Graphene-Based Supercapacitors 310 17.6 Conclusion 311 17.7 Future Aspects 313 References 313 18 2D Dichalcogenides 317 Ram S. Singh, Varun Rai, and Arun K. Singh 18.1 Introduction 317 18.1.1 What Are 2D Dichalcogenides? 317 18.1.2 Properties 318 18.2 Methods of Synthesis 321 18.2.1 Top-Down Method 321 18.2.1.1 Micromechanical Exfoliation 321 18.2.1.2 Liquid Exfoliation 322 18.2.1.3 Chemical Intercalation and Exfoliation 322 18.2.1.4 Electrochemical Exfoliation 322 18.2.1.5 Thinning by Thermal Annealing, Laser, and Chemical Etching 323 18.2.2 Bottom-Up Method 323 18.2.2.1 Chemical Vapor Deposition 323 18.2.2.2 Solvo-Thermal 324 18.2.2.3 Molecular Beam Epitaxy 325 18.3 Modification of Properties 325 18.4 Applications 327 18.4.1 Optoelectronics 327 18.4.2 Sensors 329 18.4.3 Spintronics 329 18.4.4 Photocatalysis 329 18.4.5 Biomedical Applications 330 18.5 Conclusion 330 Acknowledgment 330 References 331 19 Recent Trends on Graphene-Based Metal Oxide Nanocomposites Toward Photoelectrochemical Water Splitting Application 335 Kashinath Lellala and Mouni Roy 19.1 Introduction 335 19.1.1 Basic of Photo-Anode/Cathode 335 19.1.2 Properties of PEC 336 19.1.3 Importance of Catalyst/Electrode 336 19.1.4 Fundamental Concept of Photo-Electrochemical Water Splitting 337 19.1.4.1 Light–Catalyst Interaction 337 19.1.4.2 Electron–Hole Pair 337 19.1.4.3 Carrier Transportation-Separation 338 19.1.4.4 Water Splitting Reaction 339 19.1.4.5 Nature of Electrolyte 339 19.1.4.6 Catalysis 339 19.1.4.7 Crystallinity and Size 340 19.1.4.8 Temperature and Pressure 340 19.1.4.9 Heterogeneous Electron Transfer 340 19.1.4.10 pH Dependency 340 19.2 Graphene and Graphene-Based Nanocomposites 340 19.2.1 Graphene 340 19.2.2 Graphene-Based Nanocomposites 341 19.3 Synthesis of Graphene-Based Metal Oxide Nanocomposites 342 19.4 Application of Graphene–Metal Oxide Composites Toward Photoelectrochemical Water Splitting 345 19.5 Summary and Future Perspective 349 References 349 20 2D MOFs Nanosheets 357 Arezou Mohammadinezhad 20.1 Introduction 357 20.2 Synthetic Strategies 357 20.2.1 Top-Down Method 358 20.2.1.1 Sonication Exfoliation 358 20.2.1.2 Mechanical Exfoliation Method 359 20.2.1.3 Chemical Exfoliation 359 20.2.1.4 Langmuir–Blodgett Method 359 20.2.1.5 Solvent-Induced Exfoliation 359 20.2.2 Bottom-Up Method 359 20.2.2.1 Interfacial Synthesis Method 360 20.2.2.2 Surfactant-Assisted Method 360 20.2.2.3 Template Method 360 20.2.2.4 Sonication Synthesis Method 360 20.2.3 Other Synthesis Methods 361 20.3 Applications of 2D MOFs Nanosheets 361 20.3.1 Gas Separation 361 20.3.2 Energy Conversion and Storage 361 20.3.3 Catalysis 362 20.3.4 Sensing Platforms 362 20.3.5 Biomedicine 362 20.4 Composites of 2D MOF Nanosheets 362 20.5 Conclusion 363 References 363 21 Introduction and Applications of 2D Nanomaterials 369 Atta U. Rehman, Fatima Afzal, Muhammad T. Ansar, Amna Sajjad, and Muhammad A. Munir 21.1 Introduction 369 21.2 Applications of 2D Nanomaterials 371 21.2.1 Photodetectors 371 21.2.2 Phototransistors 371 21.2.3 p–n Junction Photodetectors 372 21.2.4 Field-Effect Transistors 373 21.2.5 Gas Sensors 373 21.2.6 Lithium-Ion Batteries 374 21.2.7 Lithium-Ion Battery Anodes 374 21.2.8 Lithium-Ion Battery Cathodes 375 21.2.9 Graphene as Current Collector 376 21.2.10 Graphene in Super capacitors 376 21.2.11 Graphene Nanocomposites with Distinct Materials 377 21.2.12 Doping and Surface Modifications 378 21.2.13 Graphene for Gas Sensors 379 21.3 Conclusion 379 References 380 22 2D Nanomaterials for Photocatalysis and Photoelectrocatalysis 383 Gubbala V. Ramesh, N. Mahendar Reddy, Muvva D. Prasad, D. Saritha, and Kola Ramesh 22.1 Introduction 383 22.2 Photocatalytic CO2 Reduction 385 22.3 Photoelectrocatalytic CO2 Reduction 388 22.4 Photocatalytic Hydrogen Production 391 22.5 Photoelectrocatalytic Hydrogen Production 395 22.6 Photocatalytic Dye Degradation 397 22.7 Conclusion 401 References 402 Index 413

Read more less

Book SynopsisMössbauer Spectroscopy Unique and comprehensive overview of versatile applications of Mössbauer spectroscopy in chemistry and material sciences Mössbauer Spectroscopy provides a comprehensive overview of relevant applications of this physical analysis method in chemistry and material sciences. The book shows the versatility of Mössbauer spectroscopy in finding useful information on electronic structure, structural insights, and solid-state effects of chemical systems. A wide range of chemical applications and applied concepts are covered as well as numerous examples, selected from recent literature. To aid in reader comprehension and accessibility, contents are well-structured and divided in different sections covering energy, catalysis, coordination chemistry, spin crossover, sensing, photomagnetism. Edited by prominent scientists in the field and authored by a group of international experts, Mössbauer Spectroscopy covers sample topics such as: Li-ion batteries, catalysts, fuel cells, Fe based silicides and iron phosphates containing minerals Gold clusters and gold mixed valence complexes Molecule based magnets, photoswitchable spin crossover coordination polymers and molecular sensors for meat freshness control With comprehensive coverage of the developments in the technique, Mössbauer Spectroscopy is a beneficial resource for researchers, professionals, and academics in chemistry related fields, such as material science, sustainable environment, and molecular electronics. It can be used by newcomers as well as for educational purposes at the master and PhD levels.Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 Application of Mössbauer Spectroscopy to Energy Materials 1 Pierre-Emmanuel Lippens, Jean-Claude Jumas, and Josette Olivier-Fourcade 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Mössbauer Spectroscopy for Li-ion and Na-ion Batteries 2 1.2.1 Characterization of Electrode Materials and Electrochemical Reactions 2 1.2.2 Tin-Based Negative Electrode Materials for Li-ion Batteries 3 1.2.2.1 Electrochemical Reactions of Lithium with Tin 3 1.2.2.2 Tin Oxides 7 1.2.2.3 Tin Borophosphates 10 1.2.2.4 Tin-Based Intermetallics 13 1.2.3 Iron-Based Electrode Materials 17 1.2.3.1 LiFePO4 as Positive Electrode Material for Li-ion Batteries 17 1.2.3.2 Fe 1.19 PO4 (OH) 0.57 (H2 O) 0.43 /C as Positive Electrode Material for Li-ion Batteries 18 1.2.3.3 Na 1.5 Fe 0.5 Ti 1.5 (PO4) 3 /C as Electrode Material for Na-ion Batteries 19 1.3 Mössbauer Spectroscopy of Tin-Based Catalysts 21 1.3.1 Reforming Catalysis 21 1.3.2 Redox Properties of Pt-Sn Based Catalysts 22 1.3.3 Trimetallic Pt-Sn-In Based Catalysts 24 1.4 Conclusion 26 Acknowledgments 27 References 27 2 Mössbauer Spectral Studies of Iron Phosphate Containing Minerals and Compounds 33 Gary J. Long and Fernande Grandjean 2.1 Introduction 33 2.2 Thermodynamic Properties of Iron Phosphate Containing Compounds 34 2.3 Room Temperature Mössbauer Spectra of Iron Phosphate Containing Minerals 37 2.4 Analysis of Magnetically Ordered Mössbauer Spectra 50 2.5 Structural and Thermodynamic Properties of the Polymorphs of FePO4 53 2.5.1 Polymorphs of FePO4 53 2.6 Mössbauer Spectra of α-FePO4 55 2.7 Magnetic Structure of α-FePO4 , Obtained by Mössbauer Spectroscopy 57 2.7.1 Magnetic Structure of α-FePO4 57 2.8 Temperature Dependence of the α-FePO4 Structure Tilt Angle 60 2.9 Mössbauer Spectral Studies on Metastable Polymorphs of FePO4 62 2.9.1 Crystallographic Structures of Two Polymorphs of FePO4 ⋅2H2 O 62 2.9.2 Preparation and Crystallographic Structures of the Two Polymorphs, γ-FePO4 and ζ-FePO4 62 2.9.3 Mössbauer Spectral Studies of FePO4 Metastable Polymorphs 64 2.9.4 Preparation and Mössbauer Spectra of Synthetic Heterosite, (Fe,Mn)PO4 67 2.9.5 Fits of the Magnetic Mössbauer Spectra of η-Fe 0.9 Mn 0.1 PO4 68 2.10 Mössbauer Spectral Studies of Various Iron Phosphate Compounds 73 2.10.1 Mössbauer Spectral Properties of α-Fe2 (PO4)O 74 2.10.2 Mössbauer Spectral Properties of Fe3 (PO4)O3 79 2.10.3 Preparation and Structural Properties of Fe9 (PO4)O8 80 2.10.4 Mössbauer Spectral Properties of Fe9 (PO4)O8 81 Acknowledgments 85 References and Notes 85 3 Mössbauer Spectroscopic Investigation of Fe-Based Silicides 93 Xiao Chen, Junhu Wang, and Changhai Liang 3.1 Introduction 93 3.2 Mössbauer Spectroscopic Investigation of Iron Silicides Prepared By Mechanical Alloying and Heat Treatment 95 3.3 Mössbauer Spectra of Iron Silicide on Silica Prepared by Pyrolysis of Ferrocene-Polydimethylsilane Composites 99 3.4 Synthesis and Mössbauer Spectra of Iron Silicides by Temperature-Programmed Silicification 102 3.5 Mössbauer Spectroscopic Investigation of Doped Iron Silicides 104 3.6 Conclusion and Perspective 107 References 108 4 Mössbauer Spectroscopy of Catalysts 113 Károly Lázár 4.1 Introduction 113 4.2 Principles of the Mössbauer Effect and Outlook of Its Application for Catalyst Studies 116 4.2.1 Brief Overview of the Basics of Mössbauer Spectroscopy 116 4.2.2 Mössbauer Spectroscopy from the Point of View of Catalyst Studies – Particular Features 117 4.2.3 The Probability of the Mössbauer Effect – f-Factor and Size Effects 118 4.2.4 Variants of the Technique 120 4.2.4.1 57Co Emission Spectroscopy 120 4.2.4.2 Synchrotron-Based NFS (Nuclear Forward Scattering) 122 4.2.4.3 Conversion Electron Mössbauer Spectroscopy 122 4.2.5 Technical Implementations – Experimental Conditions 123 4.3 Heterogeneous Catalysts 124 4.3.1 Sites on Supported Particles with Different Participation in Catalytic Processes 124 4.3.2 Collective Effects in Particles (Magnetism) 125 4.3.3 Case Studies 126 4.3.3.1 Metals and Alloys 126 4.3.3.2 Oxide Catalysts 130 4.3.3.3 Catalysts with Fe–N, Fe–C, and Fe–N–C Centers 133 4.4 Biocatalysts – Enzymes 135 4.5 Homogeneous Catalysts – Frozen Solutions 135 4.5.1 Studies on Reaction Intermediates – Time-Resolved Freeze-Quenched Spectra 136 4.6 Conclusions 137 Acknowledgment 137 References 138 5 Application of Mössbauer Spectroscopy in Studying Catalysts for CO Oxidation and Preferential Oxidation of CO in H2 145 Kuo Liu, Junhu Wang, and Tao Zhang 5.1 Introduction 145 5.2 Application of Mössbauer Spectroscopy in CO Oxidation 147 5.2.1 57 Fe Mössbauer Spectroscopy 147 5.2.2 119 Sn Mössbauer Spectroscopy 150 5.2.3 197 Au Mössbauer Spectroscopy 151 5.2.4 193 Ir Mössbauer spectroscopy 152 5.3 Application of Mössbauer Spectroscopy in PROX 153 5.3.1 PtFe-Containing Catalysts 153 5.3.2 Au-Based Catalysts 155 5.3.3 IrFe-Containing Catalysts 158 5.3.3.1 Porous Carbon Supported IrFe Catalysts 158 5.3.3.2 SiO2 and Al2 O3 Supported IrFe Catalysts 159 5.3.4 CuO/CeO2 with Fe2 O3 Additive 165 5.4 Concluding Remarks 165 Acknowledgments 166 References 166 6 Application of 57 Fe Mössbauer Spectroscopy in Studying Fe–N–C Catalysts for Oxygen Reduction Reaction in Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells 171 Xinlong Xu, Junhu Wang, Suli Wang, and Gongquan Sun 6.1 Introduction 171 6.2 Advanced 57Fe Mössbauer Spectroscopy Technique 173 6.2.1 Room Temperature 57Fe Mössbauer Spectroscopy 173 6.2.2 Low Temperature and Computational 57Fe Mössbauer Spectroscopy 174 6.2.3 In Situ Electrochemical 57Fe Mössbauer Spectroscopy 175 6.3 Characterization of Fe–N–C Using 57Fe Mössbauer Spectroscopy 177 6.3.1 Identification of Active Sites 177 6.3.2 Investigation of Degradation Mechanism 180 6.3.3 Optimization for Synthesis of Fe–N–C 184 6.3.3.1 Precursor Composition 184 6.3.3.2 Heat Treatment 185 6.4 Summary and Perspective 187 Acknowledgments 188 References 188 7 197 Au Mössbauer Spectroscopy of Thiolate-protected Gold Clusters 195 Norimichi Kojima, Yasuhiro Kobaqyashi, and Makoto Seto 7.1 Introduction 195 7.2 Synthesis of Thiolate Protected Gold Clusters 197 7.3 197 Au Mössbauer Spectroscopy of Gold Nano-clusters 198 7.3.1 Experimental Procedure of 197 Au Mössbauer Spectroscopy 198 7.3.2 197 Au Mössbauer Spectra of Aun (SG)m(n = 10∼55) 198 7.3.3 Molecular Structure and 197 Au Mössbauer Spectra of Au10 (SG)10 198 7.3.4 Molecular Structure and 197 Au Mössbauer Spectra of Au25 (SG)18 200 7.3.5 Structural Evolution of Aun (SG)m(n = 10∼55) Based on 197 Au Mössbauer Spectroscopy 201 7.3.6 197 Au Mössbauer Spectra of Au24 Pd1 (SC12 H25)18 204 7.3.7 197 Au Mössbauer Spectra of Aun (SC12 H25)m 205 7.4 Conclusion 208 Acknowledgments 208 References 209 8 197 Au Mössbauer Spectroscopy of Gold Mixed-Valence Complexes, Cs2 [AuI X2 ][AuIII Y4 ](X, Y = Cl, Br, I) and [NH3 (CH2)n NH3 ]2[(AuI I2)(AuIII I4)(I3)2](n= 7, 8) 213 Norimichi Kojima, Yasuhiro Kobaqyashi, and Makoto Seto 8.1 Introduction 213 8.2 Experimental Procedure 216 8.2.1 Synthesis and Characterization 216 8.2.1.1 Cs2 [AuI X2][AuIII Y4 ](X,Y= Cl, Br, I) 216 8.2.1.2 [NH3 (CH2)n NH3 ]2 [(AuI I2)(AuIII I4)(I3)2 ](n= 7, 8) 217 8.2.2 197 Au Mössbauer Spectroscopy 217 8.3 Crystal Structure of Cs2 [AuI X2][ AuIII X4](X,Y= Cl, Br, I) 218 8.4 Chemical Bond of Au−Xin[AuI X2] − and [AuIII X4] − 221 8.5 Mössbauer Parameters of 197 Au in [AuI X2] − and [AuIII X4 ] − 223 8.5.1 Mössbauer Parameters of 197 Au in (C4 H9)4 N[AuI X2] and (C4 H9)4 N[AuIII Y4] 224 8.5.1.1 Isomer Shift 224 8.5.1.2 Quadrupole Splitting 224 8.5.2 Mössbauer Parameters of 197 Au in Cs2 [AuI X2] [ AuIII Y4] (X = Cl, Br, I) 225 8.5.2.1 Isomer Shift 225 8.5.2.2 Quadrupole Splitting 226 8.5.2.3 Analysis of 197 Au Mössbauer Parameters for Cs2 [AuI X2] [ AuIII Y4] 226 8.6 Charge Transfer Interaction in Cs2 [AuI X2] [ AuIII Y4](X= Cl, Br, I) 227 8.7 197 Au Mössbauer Spectra of Cs2 [AuI X2] [ AuIII Y4](X,Y= Cl, Br, I) 228 8.7.1 Isomer Shift of AuI in Cs2 [AuI X2] [ AuIII Y4] 228 8.7.2 Isomer Shift of AuIII in Cs2 [AuI X2] [ AuIII Y4] 230 8.7.3 Quadrupole Splitting of AuI in Cs2 [AuI X2 ] [AuIII Y4 ] 230 8.7.4 Quadrupole Splitting of AuIII in Cs2 [AuI X2] [AuIII Y4 ] 231 8.8 Single Crystal 197 Au Mössbauer Spectra of Cs2 [AuI I2 ] [AuIII I4 ] 231 8.8.1 Comparison of 197 Au Mössbauer Spectra Between Single Crystal and Powder Crystal 231 8.8.2 Sign of EFG for AuI in [AuI I2 ] − and AuIII in [AuIII X4 ] − 234 8.9 197 Au Mössbauer Spectra of Cs2 [AuI X 2 ] [AuIII X4 ](X= Cl, I) Under High Pressures 235 8.9.1 Phase Diagram of Cs2 [AuI X2 ] [AuIII X4 ](X= Cl, Br, I) 235 8.9.2 Origin of Metallic Mixed-Valence State in Cs2 [AuI Cl2 ] [AuIII Cl4 ] 236 8.9.3 Au Valence Transition in Cs2 [Au II2 ] [AuIII I4 ] 239 8.10 197 Au Mössbauer Spectra of [NH3 (CH2)n NH3 ]2 [(Au II2)(AuIII I4)(I3)2 ] (n = 7, 8) 241 8.11 Conclusion 243 Acknowledgments 244 References 245 9 Temperature- and Photo-Induced Spin-Crossover in Molecule-Based Magnets 251 Hiroko Tokoro, Kenta Imoto, and Shin-ichi Ohkoshi 9.1 Introduction 251 9.2 Spin-Crossover Phenomena in Cesium Iron Hexacyanidochromate Prussian Blue Analog 252 9.3 Light-Induced Spin-Crossover Magnet in Iron Octacyanidoniobate Bimetal Assembly 254 9.4 Chiral Photomagnetism and Light-Controllable Second Harmonic Light in Iron Octacyanidoniobate Bimetal Assembly 258 9.5 Conclusion and Perspective 265 References 265 10 Developing a Methodology to Obtain New Photoswitchable Fe(II) Spin Crossover Complexes 271 Varun Kumar and Yann Garcia 10.1 Introduction and Context 271 10.2 Introduction to a New Photo-responsive Anion: psca 275 10.3 Combining Fe(II) and psca Together in a Single Compound 276 10.4 Fe(II) Mononuclear Complexes with DMPP and psca Ligands 278 10.5 1D Fe(II) Coordination Polymer with psca as Non-Coordinated Anions 281 10.6 Conclusions and Perspectives 284 References 285 11 57 Fe Mössbauer Spectroscopy as a Prime Tool to Explore a New Family of Colorimetric Sensors 291 li Sun, Weiyang li, and Yann Garcia 11.1 Introduction and General Context 291 11.2 Colorimetric Gas Sensors Based on Fe(II) Complexes 292 11.3 Conclusions and Perspectives 306 References 306 Index 311

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book "Nitride Semiconductor Technology" provides an overview of nitride semiconductors and their uses in optoelectronics and power electronics devices. It explains the physical properties of those materials as well as their growth methods. Their applications in high electron mobility transistors, vertical power devices, LEDs, laser diodes, and vertical-cavity surface-emitting lasers are discussed in detail. The book further examines reliability issues in these materials and puts forward perspectives of integrating them with 2D materials for novel high-frequency and high-power devices. In summary, it covers nitride semiconductor technology from materials to devices and provides the basis for further research. Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xv 1 Introduction to Gallium Nitride Properties and Applications 1Fabrizio Roccaforte and Mike Leszczynski 1.1 Historical Background 1 1.2 Basic Properties of Nitrides 4 1.2.1 Microstructure and Related Issues 7 1.2.2 Optical Properties 13 1.2.3 Electrical Properties 16 1.2.4 Two-Dimensional Electron Gas (2DEG) in AlGaN/GaN Heterostructures 19 1.3 Applications of GaN-Based Materials 23 1.3.1 Optoelectronic Devices 24 1.3.2 Power- and High-Frequency Electronic Devices 26 1.4 Summary 30 Acknowledgments 31 References 31 2 GaN-Based Materials: Substrates, Metalorganic Vapor-Phase Epitaxy, and Quantum Well Properties 41Ferdinand Scholz, Michal Bockowski, and Ewa Grzanka 2.1 Introduction 41 2.2 Bulk GaN Growth 42 2.2.1 Hydride Vapor-Phase Epitaxy (HVPE) 43 2.2.2 Sodium Flux Growth Method 45 2.2.3 Ammonothermal Growth 46 2.3 MOVPE Growth 51 2.3.1 Basics About Nitride MOVPE 54 2.3.2 Epitaxy on Foreign Substrates 58 2.3.2.1 Sapphire as a Foreign Substrate 58 2.3.2.2 GaN on SiC and Si 60 2.3.3 Defect Reduction by ELOG, FACELO, etc. 62 2.3.4 In Situ ELOG by SiN Deposition 64 2.3.5 Doping of Nitrides 64 2.3.6 Growth of Other Binary and Ternary Nitrides 67 2.4 InGaN QWs: Growth and Decomposition 72 2.4.1 Growth of InGaN QWs on Polar, Nonpolar, and Semipolar GaN Substrates 72 2.4.2 Origins of In Fluctuations 75 2.4.3 Homogenization of InGaN QWs 78 2.4.4 Decomposition of the QWs 79 2.5 Summary 82 Acknowledgments 82 References 83 3 GaN-Based HEMTs for Millimeter-wave Applications 99Kathia Harrouche and Farid Medjdoub 3.1 Introduction 99 3.2 Targeted Applications for GaN Millimeter-wave Devices 99 3.2.1 High-Power Amplification 100 3.2.2 Broadband Amplifiers 102 3.2.3 5G 103 3.2.3.1 GaN for 5G 104 3.2.3.2 GaN Base Station PAs 106 3.2.3.3 Moving Forward to 6G 108 3.3 GaN-based Material Designs for Millimeter-wave Applications 108 3.3.1 Intrinsic Characteristics and Comparison with Other Materials for RF Devices 108 3.3.2 Specific Material Systems for RF Devices 114 3.4 Device Design and Fabrication of Millimeter-wave GaN Devices 116 3.4.1 Description of Key Processing Steps for Various GaN Device Designs 116 3.4.1.1 Device Scaling for Millimeter Wave 116 3.4.1.2 T-shaped Gate Design 116 3.4.1.3 Advanced Ohmic Contact Technology 117 3.4.1.4 N-polar GaN HEMTs 118 3.4.1.5 AlN-Based Device Performances 119 3.4.1.6 InAlGaN-Based Device Performances 121 3.4.2 State-of-the-art Millimeter-wave GaN Transistors 122 3.5 Overview of MMIC Power Amplifiers 123 3.5.1 MMIC Technology Using III-N Devices 123 3.5.1.1 III–V Material-Based MMIC Technology 123 3.5.1.2 Power Amplifiers 124 3.5.1.3 Low-Noise Amplifier 125 3.5.2 MMIC Examples from Ka-band to D-band Frequencies 125 3.6 Summary 126 References 127 4 Technologies for Normally-off GaN HEMTs 137Giuseppe Greco, Patrick Fiorenza, Ferdinando Iucolano, and Fabrizio Roccaforte 4.1 Introduction 137 4.1.1 Threshold Voltage in AlGaN/GaN HEMTs 138 4.2 GaN HEMT “Cascode” 140 4.3 “True” Normally-off HEMT Technologies 142 4.3.1 Recessed-gate HEMT 142 4.3.2 Fluorinated HEMT 145 4.3.3 Recessed-gate Hybrid MISHEMT 149 4.3.4 p-GaN Gate HEMT 155 4.4 Other Approaches 163 4.5 Summary 164 Acknowledgments 165 References 165 5 Vertical GaN Power Devices 177Srabanti Chowdhury and Dong Ji 5.1 Introduction 177 5.2 Vertical GaN Devices for Power Conversion 177 5.3 Vertical GaN Transistors 178 5.3.1 Current Aperture Vertical Electron Transistor (CAVET) 178 5.3.2 Vertical MOSFETs 182 5.4 High-Voltage Diodes in GaN 185 5.5 Avalanche Electroluminescence in GaN P–N Diodes 186 5.6 Impact Ionization Coefficients in GaN 188 5.6.1 Impact of Impact Ionization Studies on Predictive Modeling 193 5.7 Summary 193 Acknowledgments 193 References 194 6 Reliability Issues in GaN Electronic Devices 199Milan Ťapajna and Christian Koller 6.1 Introduction 199 6.1.1 Reliability Testing and Failure Analysis of GaN HEMTs 200 6.2 Reliability of GaN HEMTs for RF Applications 204 6.2.1 AlGaN/GaN HEMTs 204 6.2.1.1 Trapping Effects 204 6.2.1.2 Gate-edge Degradation 207 6.2.1.3 Hot Electron Degradation 209 6.2.2 InAlN/GaN HEMTs 211 6.2.2.1 Hot Electron Degradation 212 6.2.2.2 Role of Hot Phonons 214 6.2.3 Thermal Issues in RF GaN HEMTs 215 6.3 Reliability and Robustness of GaN Power Switching Devices 219 6.3.1 Parasitic Effects in the Carbon-Doped GaN Buffer 221 6.3.1.1 Insulation of GaN Buffer by Carbon Doping 221 6.3.1.2 Time-Dependent “Dielectric” Breakdown (TDDB) of the GaN Buffer 223 6.3.1.3 Dynamic RDS,ON Due to Buffer Trapping 225 6.3.2 Gate Degradation in p-GaN Switching HEMTs 230 6.3.3 Vth Instabilities in GaN MISHEMTs 233 6.3.3.1 Studies of PBTI in MISHEMTs 237 6.4 Summary 241 Acknowledgments 241 References 241 7 Light-Emitting Diodes 253Amit Yadav, Hideki Hirayama, and Edik U. Rafailov 7.1 Introduction 253 7.2 State-of-the-Art GaN LEDs 254 7.2.1 Blue LEDs 258 7.2.2 Green LEDs 262 7.3 GaN White LEDs: Approaches and Properties 264 7.3.1 Monolithic LEDs 267 7.3.2 Phosphor-Covered LEDs 271 7.4 AlGaN Deep UV LEDs 275 7.4.1 Growth of High-Quality AlN and Increasing in Internal Quantum Efficiency (IQE) 278 7.4.2 AlGaN-based UVC LEDs 281 7.4.3 Increasing the Light Extraction Efficiency (LEE) 282 7.5 Summary 287 Acknowledgments 288 References 288 8 Laser Diodes Grown by Molecular Beam Epitaxy 301Greg Muziol, Henryk Turski, Marcin Siekacz, Marta Sawicka, and Czeslaw Skierbiszewski 8.1 Introduction 301 8.2 III-N Growth Fundamentals by Plasma-Assisted MBE 303 8.2.1 Role of N-Flux for Efficient InGaN QWs 304 8.3 Wide InGaN QWs – Beyond Quantum-Confined Stark Effect 305 8.4 Long-Living Laser Diodes on Bulk Ammono-GaN 313 8.5 Laser Diodes with Tunnel Junctions 316 8.5.1 Stacks of Vertically Interconnected Laser Diodes 319 8.5.2 Distributed Feedback Laser Diodes 321 8.6 Summary 324 Acknowledgments 324 References 325 9 Edge Emitting Laser Diodes and Superluminescent Diodes 333Szymon Stanczyk, Anna Kafar, Dario Schiavon, Stephen Najda, Thomas Slight, and Piotr Perlin 9.1 Laser Diode: History and Development 333 9.1.1 Optoelectronics Background 333 9.1.2 Gallium Nitride Technology Breakthroughs 335 9.1.3 Development of Nitride Laser Diodes 337 9.2 Distributed Feedback Laser Diodes 342 9.3 Superluminescent Diodes 348 9.3.1 History of Superluminescent Diode Development 348 9.3.2 Basic SLD Properties 351 9.3.3 Challenges for SLD Optimization 353 9.4 Semiconductor Optical Amplifiers 354 9.5 Summary 357 References 358 10 Green and Blue Vertical-Cavity Surface-Emitting Lasers 367Yang Mei, Rong-Bin Xu, Huan Xu, and Bao-Ping Zhang 10.1 Introduction 367 10.1.1 Properties and Application of GaN VCSELs 367 10.1.2 Brief History and Current Status of GaN VCSELs 368 10.1.3 GaN VCSELs with Different DBRs 369 10.1.3.1 GaN VCSELs with Hybrid DBR Structure 370 10.1.3.2 GaN VCSELs with Double Dielectric DBR Structure 371 10.2 Efficiency of Heat Dissipation of Different Device Structures 372 10.2.1 Simulation of Heat Profile of the Device 372 10.2.2 Dependence of Rth on Cavity Length 373 10.3 Green VCSELs Based on InGaN QDs 375 10.3.1 Advantages of QDs Compared with QWs 375 10.3.2 Growth and Optical Properties of InGaN QDs 377 10.3.3 Fabrication Process of VCSELs 379 10.3.4 Properties of QD Green VCSELs 379 10.4 Green VCSELs Based on Cavity-Enhanced Emission of Localized States in Blue Emitting InGaN QWs 380 10.4.1 Cavity Effect 380 10.4.2 Properties of Cavity-Enhanced Green VCSELs 381 10.5 Dual-Wavelength Lasing Based on QD-in-QW Active Structure 384 10.5.1 Characteristics of QD-in-QW Structure 384 10.5.2 Lasing Characteristics of VCSELs 386 10.6 Blue VCSELs with Different Lateral Confinements 386 10.6.1 Design of Index-Guided Structure 386 10.6.2 Emission Properties of VCSELs with Lateral Confinement 388 10.7 Summary 389 References 390 11 Integration of 2DMaterials with Nitrides for Novel Electronic and Optoelectronic Applications 397Filippo Giannazzo, Emanuela Schilirò, Raffaella Lo Nigro, Pawel Prystawko, and Yvon Cordier 11.1 Introduction 397 11.2 Fabrication of 2D Material Heterostructures with Nitride Semiconductors 400 11.2.1 Transfer of 2D Materials Grown on a Foreign Substrate 400 11.2.2 Direct Growth of 2D Materials on Group III-Nitrides 403 11.2.3 2D Materials as Templates for the Growth of Nitride Semiconductor Films 407 11.3 Electronic Devices Based on 2D Materials/GaN Heterojunctions 413 11.3.1 Band-to-band Tunneling Diodes Based on MoS2/GaN Heterojunctions 413 11.3.2 Hot Electron Transistors with Graphene Base and Al(Ga)N/GaN Emitter 414 11.4 Optoelectronic Devices Based on 2D Material Junctions with GaN 421 11.4.1 GaN LEDs with Graphene-Transparent Conductive Electrodes 421 11.4.2 MoS2/GaN Deep UV Photodetectors 427 11.5 Applications of Graphene for Thermal Management in GaN HEMTs 428 11.6 Summary 431 Acknowledgments 431 References 432 Index 439

Read more less

Book SynopsisMultifunctional Hydrogels for Biomedical Applications Comprehensive resource presenting a thorough overview of the biomedical applications of hydrogels This book provides an overview of the development and applications of the clinically relevant hydrogels that are used particularly in tissue engineering, regenerative medicine, and drug delivery. Taking a multidisciplinary approach, it goes through the material from chemistry, materials science, biology, medicine, nanotechnology, and bioengineering points of view. Sample topics covered by the three well-qualified editors include: The design, functions, and developments of hydrogels Proteins and polysaccharides that mimic extracellular matrix Generation and applications of supramolecular hydrogels Design and functions of cell encapsulation systems Multifunctional Hydrogels for Biomedical Applications is a useful all-in-one reference work for materials scientists, polymer chemists, and bioengineers which provides a comprehensive, contemporary understanding of hydrogels and their applications targeting a wide variety of pathologies.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Extracellular Matrix Hydrogels from Decellularized Tissues for Biological and Biomedical Applications 1Brendan C. Jones, Nicola Elvassore, Paolo De Coppi, and Giovanni G. Giobbe 1.1 Introduction to Hydrogels 1 1.2 Key Features and Functions of the Extracellular Matrix in Homeostasis and Development 6 1.3 Extracellular Matrix-Based Hydrogels Derived from Decellularization of Organs 8 1.4 Commercially Available Products 18 2 Collagen-Based Systems to Mimic the Extracellular Environment 23Umber Cheema and Vivek Mudera 2.1 Cells in Tissues 23 2.2 Collagen in Tissues 24 2.3 Controlling Collagen Architecture 26 2.4 Engineering Collagen Scaffolds 29 2.5 Conclusions 33 3 Designing Elastin-Like Recombinamers for Therapeutic and Regenerative Purposes 37José Carlos Rodríguez-Cabello, Sara Escalera, Diana Juanes-Gusano, Mercedes Santos, and Alessandra Girotti 3.1 Introduction 37 3.2 ELR-Based Hydrogels in Tissue Engineering 39 3.3 ELR-Based Hydrogels for Drug Delivery 48 3.4 Future Remarks 56 4 Enzyme-Assisted Hydrogel Formation for Tissue Engineering Applications 63Sílvia Pérez-Rafael, Eva Ramon, and Tzanko Tzanov 4.1 Introduction 63 4.2 Enzymatically Cross-Linked Hydrogels 66 4.3 Supramolecular Enzyme-Driven Hydrogelation 75 4.4 Conclusions 81 5 Hierarchical Peptide- and Protein-Based Biomaterials: From Molecular Structure to Directed Self-assembly and Applications 97Yinchen Yuan, Yejiao Shi, and Helena S. Azevedo 5.1 Introduction 97 5.2 Molecular Design/Selection of Building Blocks for Hierarchical Self-assembly 98 5.3 Hierarchical Assembly Through Environmental Manipulation 108 5.4 Techniques for the Characterization of Hierarchically Organized Biomaterials 113 5.5 Application of Hierarchical Self-assembling Peptide- and Protein-Based Biomaterials in Tissue Regeneration 117 5.6 Conclusions 120 6 Short Peptide Hydrogels for Biomedical Applications 127Priyadarshi Chakraborty, Lihi Adler-Abramovich, and Ehud Gazit 6.1 Introduction 127 6.2 Short Peptide Hydrogels 128 6.3 Biomedical Applications of Short Peptide Hydrogels 129 6.4 Conclusions and Outlook 139 7 Supramolecular Assemblies of Glycopeptides as Mimics of the Extracellular Matrix 149Diana Soares da Costa, Alexandra Brito, Rui L. Reis, and Iva Pashkuleva 7.1 Introduction 149 7.2 Glycoproteins and Proteoglycans in the ECM 150 7.3 Design of Self-assembling Peptide--Saccharide Conjugates 151 7.4 Supramolecular Systems Generated by Interfacial Co-assembly 154 7.5 Conclusions 155 8 Supramolecular Assemblies for Cancer Diagnosis and Treatment 161Shuang Liu and Bing Xu 8.1 Introduction 161 8.2 Cancer Diagnosis 162 8.3 Cancer Treatment 173 8.4 Future Perspectives 189 9 Polyzwitterionic Hydrogels as Wound Dressing Materials 195Konstans Ruseva and Elena Vassileva 9.1 Polyzwitterions 195 9.2 Wound Management and Wound Dressings 197 9.3 PZIs as Dressings Materials for AcuteWounds 198 9.4 PZI as Dressings for Chronic Wounds Management 206 9.5 Conclusions 212 10 Hyaluronan-Based Hydrogels as Modulators of Cellular Behavior 217Sara Amorim, Rui L. Reis, and Ricardo A. Pires 10.1 Introduction 217 10.2 Biological Relevance of Hyaluronan 218 10.3 Hyaluronan-Based Systems for Biomedical Applications 220 10.4 Conclusion and Future Remarks 226 11 Hydrogel Fibers Produced via Microfluidics 233Kongchang Wei, Claudio Toncelli, René M. Rossi, and Luciano F. Boesel 11.1 Introduction to Microfluidics and Microfluidic Wet Spinning 233 11.2 Fabrication of Chips for Microfluidic Wet Spinning 237 11.3 Biomedical Applications of Hydrogel Fibers Produced via Microfluidics 242 11.4 Hydrogel Optical Fibers 257 11.5 Conclusions 263 12 Embedding Hydrogels into Microfluidic Chips: Vascular Transport Analyses and Drug Delivery Optimization 275Ana M. Martins, Alexander B. Cook, Martina Di Francesco, Maria Grazia Barbato, Sayanti Brahmachari, Martina Pannuzzo, and Paolo Decuzzi 12.1 Introduction: Microfluidic Chips for Modeling Human Diseases and Developing New Therapies 275 12.2 Hydrogels to Mimic the Extracellular Matrix (ECM) 276 12.3 Fabrication of Microfluidic Chips 277 12.4 Applications of Microfluidic Chips in Biophysical Transport Analysis 282 12.5 Nanoparticle Transport Analyses 284 12.6 Computer Simulations of Nanoparticle and Cell Transport 285 12.7 Conclusions and Future Directions 287 13 Multifunctional Granular Hydrogels for Tissue-Specific Repair 295Rui J. Almeida, Ana Fernandes, Vítor M. Gaspar, and João F. Mano 13.1 Introduction 295 13.2 Granular Hydrogels -- Functional Features and Design 297 13.3 Granular Hydrogels for Tissue-Specific Repair 308 13.4 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 317 14 Injectable Hydrogels as a Stem Cell Delivery Platform for Wound Healing 323Qian Xu, Sigen A., and Wenxin Wang 14.1 Wound Healing 323 14.2 Stem Cells for Skin Wound Healing 328 14.3 Injectable Hydrogel Dressing as a Delivery Platform 331 Index 357

Read more less

Book SynopsisWelded High Strength Steel Structures Understand the impact of fatigue on high strength steel joints with this comprehensive overview High strength steels are highly sought after for industrial and engineering applications ranging from armored vehicles to welded engineering components built to withstand considerable stress. The mechanical properties of welded joints made from high strength steel are integrally linked to the specific welding process, which can have an enormous impact on fatigue performance. Welded High Strength Steel Structures: Welding Effects and Fatigue Performance provides a comprehensive analysis of high strength steel joints and the ramifications of the welding process. It guides readers through the process of performing thermal analysis of high strength steel structures and evaluate fatigue performance in the face of residual stress. The result is a volume with innumerable use cases in engineering and manufacture. Welded High Strength Steel Structures readers will also find: An author with decades of experience in research and engineering Numerous studies of various classes of high strength steel joints Studies on tubular structures for welding residual stress Welded High Strength Steel Structures is a must-own for welding specialists, materials scientists, mechanical engineers, and researchers or industry professionals in related fields.Table of ContentsList of Figures ix List of Tables xvii Preface xix Notation xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Research Background 1 1.2 Objectives and Scope 4 1.3 Contributions and Originality 6 1.4 Organization 7 2 Literature Review 9 2.1 High-Strength Steel 9 2.1.1 Overview 9 2.1.2 Delivery Condition of HSS 10 2.1.3 Fatigue and Fracture of HSS 11 2.1.4 Codes and Standards of HSS Application 12 2.2 Welding and Residual Stress 13 2.2.1 Overview of Arc Welding 13 2.2.2 Weldability of Steel 15 2.2.3 Phase Transformation and Other Phenomena in Welding Procedures 16 2.2.4 The Formation of Residual Stress 20 2.2.4.1 Origin and Types of Residual Stress 20 2.2.4.2 Generation of Welding Residual Stress 22 2.2.5 Residual Stress Investigation Techniques 24 2.2.5.1 Experimental Investigation 24 2.2.5.2 Numerical Modeling 26 2.2.6 Exploration on Residual Stress Effects 28 2.3 Fatigue Analysis of Tubular Joints 31 2.3.1 Classification and Parameters of Tubular Joints 31 2.3.2 Stress Analysis of Intact Tubular Joints 32 3 Experimental Investigation of Residual Stress for High-Strength Steel Plate-to-Plate Joints 37 3.1 Introduction 37 3.2 The Hole-Drilling Method and Specimen Details 38 3.2.1 The ASTM Hole-Drilling Method 38 3.2.2 Specimen Specifications 39 3.2.3 Welding Specifications 41 3.3 Residual Stress Investigation 43 3.3.1 Setup and Modification of the Hole-Drilling Guide 43 3.3.2 Strain Gauge Locations 44 3.3.3 Calibration Test for Residual Stress Measurement 45 3.3.4 Residual Stress Measurement Procedure 46 3.3.5 Cutting of Brace Plate 47 3.4 Experimental Results 47 3.4.1 Distribution of Residual Stress Along the Weld Toe 49 3.4.2 The Effects of Preheating 49 3.4.3 The Effects of Joint Angle 50 3.4.4 The Effects of Plate Thickness 51 3.4.5 The Effects of Brace Plate Cutting 52 3.5 Static Tensile Testing 54 3.5.1 Testing Rig 54 3.5.2 Strain Gauge Locations 54 3.5.3 Testing Procedure 54 3.5.4 Testing Results 56 3.6 The Influence of Residual Stress on SCF Value 57 3.6.1 Analysis Method 57 3.6.2 Results and Conclusions 58 3.7 Conclusion and Summary 60 4 Numerical Study of Residual Stress for High-Strength Steel Plate-to-Plate Joints 63 4.1 Introduction 63 4.2 Modeling Procedure and Results for 2D Models 64 4.2.1 Overview 64 4.2.2 Lumped Technique 64 4.2.3 Weld Filler Addition Technique 67 4.2.4 Heat Transfer Analysis 68 4.2.5 Mechanical Analysis 70 4.2.6 Model Validation and Results 71 4.2.6.1 Model Validation 71 4.2.6.2 Numerical Modeling Results 72 4.3 Modelling Procedure and Results for 3D Models 76 4.3.1 Overview 76 4.3.2 Heat Source Model in 3D Analysis 77 4.3.3 Modeling for the Weld Filler Adding Process 78 4.3.4 Modeling Validation 80 4.3.5 Modeling Results 81 4.3.5.1 Ambient Temperature Joint 81 4.3.5.2 Preheating Joint 83 4.3.5.3 Comparison Between Ambient Temperature and Preheated Joints 84 4.4 Parametric Study 87 4.4.1 Effect of Boundary Condition 91 4.4.2 Effect of Preheating Temperature 91 4.4.3 Effect of Using Different Lumps 93 4.4.4 Effect of Welding Speed 94 4.4.5 Effect of Welding Sequence 95 4.5 Conclusions 96 5 Experimental Investigation of Residual Stress for Welded Box High-Strength Steel T-Joints 99 5.1 Introduction 99 5.2 Experimental Investigation 100 5.2.1 Material Properties 100 5.2.2 Specimen Fabrication 101 5.2.2.1 Overview of the Welding Design 101 5.2.2.2 Fabrication of Box Sections 104 5.2.2.3 Fabrication of Joint Intersection 104 5.2.3 Residual Stress Test Setup and Procedure 105 5.2.4 Strain Gauge Schemes for Residual Stress Measurement 106 5.2.5 Computation of Residual Stress 107 5.3 Testing Results 109 5.3.1 Preheated Specimen 109 5.3.2 Ambient Temperature Specimen 114 5.4 Analyses and Discussion 118 5.4.1 Preheating Effect 118 5.4.2 Chord Edge Effect 120 5.4.3 Corner Effect 120 5.4.4 Stress Variation in Depths 121 5.5 Conclusions 123 6 Numerical Study of Residual Stress for Welded High-Strength Steel Box T/Y-Joints 125 6.1 Introduction 125 6.2 Modeling Procedure 126 6.2.1 Overview 126 6.2.2 Heat Source Modeling 129 6.2.3 Thermal Interactions 129 6.2.4 Arc Touch Movement 130 6.2.5 Modeling Summary 130 6.3 Modeling of Pure Heat Transfer 132 6.4 Fully Coupled Residual Stress Analysis 136 6.4.1 Modeling Validation 136 6.4.2 Modeling Results 137 6.4.2.1 Temperature History 137 6.4.2.2 Residual Stress 138 6.5 Parametric Study 141 6.5.1 Range of the Modeling 141 6.5.2 Variation of the Residual Stress with Respect to Joint Angle 142 6.5.2.1 Variation of the Residual Stress with Respect to Joint Angle and Welding Starting Location 142 6.5.2.2 Variation of the Residual Stress with Respect to Joint Angle and Preheating Temperature 143 6.5.3 Variation of the Residual Stress with Respect to b/c (Ratio of Brace Width to Chord Width) 145 6.5.3.1 Variation of the Residual Stress with b/c and Preheating Temperature 145 6.5.3.2 Variation of the Residual Stress with b/c and Welding Starting Location 146 6.5.4 Variation of the Residual Stress with Respect to Welding Speed 147 6.5.4.1 Variation of the Residual Stress with Welding Speed and Preheating Temperature 147 6.5.4.2 Variation of the Residual Stress with Welding Speed and b/c 148 6.6 Conclusions 149 7 Stress Concentration Factor of Welded Box High-Strength Steel T-Joint 153 7.1 Introduction 153 7.2 Test Setup and Specimens 154 7.3 Strain Gauge Schemes 156 7.4 Test Procedure 158 7.5 Test Results 159 7.6 Comparision of Test Results with CIDECT Guide 161 7.7 Effect of Residual Stress on SCF 162 7.8 Conclusion 163 8 Conclusion and Recommendation 165 8.1 Introduction 165 8.2 Conclusions 166 8.2.1 Experimental Studies 166 8.2.2 Numerical Modeling 167 8.3 Recommendations for Future Research Work 168 Summary 169 Appendix 1 171 Appendix 2 175 Appendix 3 181 References 195 Index 201

Read more less

Book SynopsisModel-Based Optimization for Petroleum Refinery Configuration Design An accessible, easy-to-read introduction to the methods of mixed-integer optimization, with practical applications, real-world operational data, and case studies Interest in model-based approaches for optimizing the design of petroleum refineries has increased throughout the industry in recent years. Mathematical optimization based on mixed-integer programming has brought about the superstructure optimization method for synthesizing petroleum refinery configurations from multiple topological alternatives. Model-Based Optimization for Petroleum Refinery Configuration Design presents a detailed introduction to the use of mathematical optimization to solve both linear and nonlinear problems in the refining industry. The book opens with an overview of petroleum refining processes, basic concepts in mathematical programming, and applications of mathematical programming for refinery optimization. Subsequent chapters address superstructure representations of topological alternatives, mathematical formulation, solution strategies, and various modeling frameworks. Practical case studies demonstrate refinery configuration design, refinery retrofitting, and real-world issues and considerations. Presents linear, nonlinear, and mixed-integer programming approaches applicable to both new and existing petroleum refineries Highlights the benefits of model-based solutions to refinery configuration design problems Features detailed case studies of the development and implementation of optimization models Discusses economic considerations of heavy oil processing, including cash flow analysis of refinery costs and return on capital Includes numerical examples based on real-world operational data and various commercial technologies Model-Based Optimization for Petroleum Refinery Configuration Design is an invaluable resource for researchers, chemical engineers, process and energy engineers, other refining professionals, and advanced chemical engineering students.Table of Contents1 Introduction to Optimization Modeling for Petroleum Refineries 1 1.1 Background 1 1.2 Overview of Refining Processes 4 1.2.1 Atmospheric Crude Oil Distillation 5 1.2.2 Hydroprocessing 5 1.2.3 Sulfur Recovery 9 1.2.4 Reforming 9 1.2.5 Isomerization 10 1.2.6 Blending 11 1.3 Overview of Refinery Optimization Modeling 12 1.3.1 Refinery Optimization Systems, Techniques, and Tools 12 1.3.2 Modeling for Advanced Process Control 14 1.3.3 Modeling for Real-Time Optimization 15 1.3.4 Modeling for Process Simulation 17 1.3.4.1 Modeling for Dynamic Simulation 18 1.3.4.2 Modeling for Operator Training Simulation 19 1.3.5 Modeling for Planning and Scheduling 19 1.3.5.1 Systems Implementation 23 1.3.5.2 Optimization of Crude Oil Scheduling 24 1.3.5.3 Refinery Management 25 1.4 Concluding Remarks 25 References 26 2 Basic Petroleum Refinery Economics 31 2.1 Refinery Economics Overview 31 2.1.1 Refinery Profitability 31 2.1.2 Refinery Margins 32 2.1.3 Refinery Margin Calculations 33 2.1.4 Refinery Margin Trends 34 2.1.5 Refinery Margin Improvement 34 2.2 Marginal Economics for Incremental Optimization 34 2.3 Refinery Economic Analysis 36 2.3.1 Refinery Value Determination 36 2.3.2 Refinery Economic Evaluation 37 2.3.2.1 Simple Example 37 2.3.2.2 Advanced Example 38 2.3.2.3 Further Example 40 2.3.3 Refinery Contracts 41 2.4 Concluding Remarks 41 References 41 3 Superstructure Representation 43 3.1 Introduction to Superstructures 43 3.2 Types of Superstructure Representation 43 3.3 State–Task Network Superstructure Representation 44 3.4 State–Equipment Network Superstructure Representation 45 3.5 Resource–Task Network Superstructure Representation 46 3.6 Superstructure Generation 47 3.7 Other Superstructure Representations 48 3.7.1 State–Space Network Superstructure Representation 48 3.7.2 Unit Operation–Port–State Superstructure Representation 48 3.7.3 Bond Graph Superstructure Representation 48 3.8 Superstructure Representation Example for Naphtha Processing 49 3.9 Chapter Summary 53 References 53 4 Modeling Framework 57 4.1 Modeling of Mixed Continuous and Integer Decision Variables 57 4.2 Superstructure Optimization Modeling 58 4.3 Constructing Superstructures 58 4.4 Modeling of Superstructure Representations 59 4.5 Modeling of Discrete Decisions and Logical Relations 60 4.5.1 Propositional Logics for Superstructure Optimization Modeling 61 4.5.2 Logical Binary Variables 62 4.5.3 Yes/No Type Binary Variables 62 4.5.4 Disjunctive Optimization Modeling 63 4.6 Modeling of Process Units and Operations 67 4.6.1 Process Design Procedure 67 4.6.2 Selecting Modeling Variables 67 4.6.3 Formulating Simple Models 68 4.6.4 Basic Unit Models 68 4.6.4.1 Mixer 68 4.6.4.2 Splitter 69 4.6.4.3 Separator 70 4.6.4.4 Valve 70 4.6.4.5 Multicomponent Splitter 70 4.6.5 Unit Operation Models 72 4.6.5.1 Compressor 72 4.6.5.2 Furnace 72 4.6.5.3 Conversion Reactor 72 4.6.5.4 Heat Exchanger 75 4.6.6 Information Flow Modeling 75 4.6.6.1 Information Flow Diagram 77 4.6.6.2 Choice of Design Variables 79 4.6.6.3 Equation Ordering 79 4.7 Modeling for Numerical Studies 84 4.8 Chapter Summary 86 References 86 5 Model Formulation and Implementation 89 5.1 Mathematical Formulation 89 5.2 Generic Optimization Model Formulation for Refinery Planning 90 5.2.1 Objective Function 91 5.2.2 Production Capacity and Expansion Constraints 91 5.2.3 Mass Balances 92 5.2.4 Demand Constraints 92 5.2.5 Availability Constraints 92 5.2.6 Non-Negativity Constraints 92 5.3 Generic Optimization Model Formulation for Refinery Design 93 5.3.1 Material Balances 93 5.3.2 Mixed-Integer Logical Constraints 93 5.3.3 Logical Constraints on Design and Structural Specifications 94 5.3.4 Logic Propositional Constraints on Design Specifications 95 5.3.4.1 Example 1 95 5.3.4.2 Example 2 100 5.3.5 Logic Propositional Constraints on Structural Specifications 101 5.3.6 Generalized Disjunctive Programming 101 5.4 Numerical Implementation for Computational Experiments 106 5.5 Computational Experiment Examples 110 5.5.1 MILP Model Results 113 5.5.2 GDP Model Results 114 5.6 Chapter Summary 123 References 123 6 Solution Strategies 125 6.1 Convex Relaxation 125 6.2 Lagrangean Decomposition 126 6.3 Global Optimization Techniques 126 6.3.1 Branch and Reduce 128 6.3.2 Spatial Branch and Bound 128 6.3.3 Hybrid Branch and Bound 128 6.3.4 Interval Analysis 129 6.3.5 Extended Cutting Plane 129 6.4 Advancements in Commercial Integer Optimization Solvers 130 6.4.1 Overview 130 6.4.2 Computational Performance of Commercial Integer Optimization Solvers 130 6.4.3 A Commercial Success Story: CPLEX Integer Optimization Solver 130 6.4.4 Solution Methods and Algorithms 131 6.4.4.1 Integer Optimization Algorithms 131 6.4.4.2 Branch and Bound 132 6.4.4.3 Presolve and Cutting Planes 134 6.4.4.4 Heuristics 135 6.4.4.5 Combined Local Search and Heuristics 136 6.4.4.6 Parallelization 136 6.4.4.7 Solution Pools 136 6.4.4.8 Tuning Tools 136 6.4.5 Application Examples 136 6.4.5.1 Example 1: Energy Optimization 137 6.4.5.2 Example 2: Financial Optimization 137 6.4.5.3 Example 3: Manufacturing Optimization 137 6.4.5.4 Concluding Remarks 138 6.5 Chapter Summary 139 References 139 7 Industrial Case Studies with Business-Centric Techno-Commercial Considerations 145 7.1 Industrial Case Study 1: Refinery Configuration for Heavy Oil Processing 145 7.1.1 Background 145 7.1.2 Problem Statement 146 7.1.3 Model Formulation 147 7.1.4 Numerical Example 148 7.1.5 Concluding Remarks 151 7.2 Industrial Case Study 2: Refinery Configuration for Whole Complex Processing 152 7.2.1 Model Formulation 152 7.2.1.1 Superstructure Representation 156 7.2.1.2 Logic Propositions 162 7.2.1.3 Objective Function 164 7.2.2 Computational Results 165 7.2.2.1 Computational Results and Discussion 166 7.2.2.2 Model Validation 171 7.2.2.3 Application Extension to Refinery Upgrade Studies 176 7.2.2.4 Sensitivity Analysis 176 7.2.3 Concluding Remarks 176 7.3 Industrial Case Study 3: Refinery Configuration for Naphtha Upgrading 177 7.3.1 Problem Statement 178 7.3.2 Propositional Logics and Logic Cuts in Process Synthesis Problems 178 7.3.3 Logical Constraints 178 7.3.3.1 General Formulation 178 7.3.3.2 Logical Constraints on Processing Alternatives of Naphtha for Petroleum Refineries 182 7.3.4 Computational Experience 182 7.3.5 Concluding Remarks 183 7.4 Chapter Summary 186 References 186 8 Industrial Case Studies with Environmental-Centric Techno-Commercial Considerations 191 8.1 Industrial Case Study 1: Refinery Configuration with Environmental Considerations 191 8.1.1 Background 191 8.1.2 Problem Statement 192 8.1.3 Model Formulation 192 8.1.3.1 Superstructure Representation 192 8.1.3.2 Material Balance Constraints 192 8.1.3.3 Logical Constraints 194 8.1.3.4 Logic Propositions 194 8.1.3.5 Environmental Performance Assessment for Risk Evaluation of Flowsheets 196 8.1.3.6 Objective Function 197 8.1.4 Numerical Example 197 8.1.5 Concluding Remarks 198 8.2 Industrial Case Study 2: Refinery Configuration with Heat Integration 198 8.2.1 Problem Statement 198 8.2.2 Superstructure Representation 199 8.2.3 Modeling and Computational Strategy 201 8.2.4 Model Formulation 202 8.2.4.1 Flowsheet Optimization 202 8.2.4.2 Heat Integration Constraints 205 8.2.4.3 Objective Function 206 8.2.5 Computational Results 206 8.2.6 Concluding Remarks 209 8.3 Chapter Summary 211 References 212 9 Industrial Case Studies with Engineering-Centric Techno-Commercial Considerations 215 9.1 Industrial Case Study 1: Refinery Configuration for High-Octane Fuel Production 215 9.1.1 Catalytic Reforming Process 216 9.1.2 Data Reconciliation Method 216 9.1.3 Problem Statement 217 9.1.4 Model Formulation 217 9.1.4.1 Data Reconciliation Model 218 9.1.4.2 Feed Characterization 219 9.1.4.3 Reactor Representation 220 9.1.4.4 Reactor Pressure Balance 221 9.1.4.5 Reaction Kinetic Tuning 221 9.1.4.6 Reactor Switch in Cyclic Reformer 221 9.1.4.7 Measurement Models 223 9.1.5 Results and Discussion 224 9.1.5.1 Key Process Variables 224 9.1.5.2 Tuning Strategies 225 9.1.5.3 Reformate Yields 226 9.1.5.4 Reactor Total Endotherms 226 9.1.6 Concluding Remarks 226 9.2 Industrial Case Study 2: Refinery Configuration for Low-Benzene Fuel Production 227 9.2.1 Problem Statement 227 9.2.2 Superstructure Representation 227 9.2.3 Model Formulation 229 9.2.4 Preliminary Computational Results 234 9.3 Chapter Summary 234 References 234 Summary and Conclusions 237 Index 239

Read more less

Book SynopsisBiomedical Engineering An exploration of materials processing and engineering technology across a wide range of medical applications The field of biomedical engineering has played a vital role in the progression of medical development technology. Biomedical Engineering: Materials, Technology, and Applications covers key aspects of the field—from basic concepts to advanced level research for medical applications. The book stands as a source of inspiration for research on materials as well as their development and practical application within specialized industries. It begins with a discussion of what biomedical engineering is and concludes with a final chapter on the advancements of biomaterials technology in medicine. Offers comprehensive coverage of topics, including biomaterials, tissue engineering, bioreceptor interactions, and various medical applications Discusses applications in critical industries such as biomedical diagnosis, pharmaceutics, drug delivery, cancer detection, and more Serves as a reference for those in scientific, medical, and academic fields Biomedical Engineering takes an interdisciplinary look at how biomedical science and engineering technology are integral to developing novel approaches to major problems, such as those associated with disease diagnosis and drug delivery. By covering a full range of materials processing and technology-related subjects, it shares timely information for biotechnologists, material scientists, biophysicists, chemists, bioengineers, nanotechnologists, and medical researchers.Table of Contents1. CONCEPTS of BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING 1.1 Introduction 1.2 What is Biomedical Engineering 1.3 Frontiers in Biomedical Engineering 1.4 Impact of Biomedical Engineering 1.4.1 Target Drug Delivery 1.4.2 Early Stage Detection 1.4.3 Personalized Medicine 1.5 General Applications of Biomedical Engineering 1.5.1 Pharmaceutic 1.5.2 Medicine 1.5.3 Consumer Goods 1.6 Summary and Challenges References 2. BIOMATERIALS 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Biomedical Materials 2.2.1 Polymers 2.2.2 Metals 2.2.3 Composites 2.2.4 Non-Metal Materials 2.3 Biomaterials in Medicine 2.3.1 Surgical Devices 2.3.2 Implantable and Injectable Materials 2.4 Summary and Challenges References 3 BIOMOLECULE RESPONSIVE MATERIALS 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Glucose Responsive Materials 3.2.1 Glucose Oxidase Materials 3.2.2 Phenylboronic Acid Materials 3.3 Protein Responsive Materials 3.3.1 Enzyme-Responsive Materials 3.3.2 Antigen-Responsive Materials 3.4 Nucleic Acid Responsive Materials 3.4.1 RNA-Responsive Materials 3.4.2 DNA-Responsive Materials 3.4.3 Aptamers-Responsive Materials 3.4.4 PNA-Responsive Materials 3.5 Summary and Challenges References 4. SURFACE CHEMISTRY of BIOMATERIALS for MEDICAL APPLICATION 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Chemical Method 4.2.1 Radiation Grafting 4.2.2 Silanization 4.3 Electrochemical Method 4.3.1. Conversion Coatings 4.3.2. Electroplating 4.4. Plasma Method 4.4.1 High-Energy Plasma Treatments 4.4.2 Immobilization of Molecules 4.5 Ion Beam Implantation 4.6 Summary and Challenges References 5 DRUG DELIVERY TECHNOLOGY 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Biodegradable Polymers in Drug Delivery 5.2.1 Gene Delivery 5.2.2 siRNA Delivery 5.3 Target Drug Delivery 5.3.1 Target Therapy in Cancer 5.3.2 Target Therapy in Diabetes 5.4 Drug Delivery in Imaging Technology 5.4.1 MRI Technology 5.4.2 Ultrasound Technology 5.5 Summary and Challenges References 6 EARLY STAGE DETECTION TECHNOLOGY 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Sensors Biological Application 6.3 Fabrication Methods 6.3.1 Lithography Technology 6.3.2 Printing Technology 6.4 Current Approaches 6.4.1 Lab-on-Chip 6.4.2 Organ-on-Chip 6.4.3 Drug Screening 6.5 Summary and Challenges References 7 REGENERATIVE MEDICINE 7.1 Introduction 7.2 The Source of Stem Cells and Its Therapeutic Application 7.3 Tissue Engineering Principals in Stem Cells Technology 7.4 Tissue Engineered Scaffolds 7.5 Tissue Engineered Nano-scaffolds 7.6 Summary and Challenges References 8 NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Classification of Nanomaterials 8.2.1 Nanoparticles 8.2.2 Nanofibers, Nanowires, Nanorods 8.2.3 Self-Assembled Nanomaterials 8.3 Specific Mediated Nanomaterials 8.4 Biomineralization Nanomaterials 8.5 Summary and Challenges References 9 ADVANCES in BIOMATERIALS TECHNOLOGY in MEDICINE 9.1 Introduction 9.2 Advances in Synthesis of New Biomaterials 9.3 Biocompatibility Polymers 9.4 Proteins and Peptides in Medicine 9.5 Limitations of Nanomaterials Technology in Nature and Medicine 9.6 Summary and Challenges Reference

Read more less

Book SynopsisTargeted Drug Delivery Novel approaches in targeted drug delivery for both small molecule and biopharmaceutical drugs Targeted Drug Delivery explores a new frontier in drug research that has become a focus for developing novel medications. The work discusses a wide range of approaches for targeting small molecules as well as peptide and macromolecular drugs, from prodrugs to drug conjugates to drug carriers and devices, helping readers to stay up to date on the latest developments in the field. The following key topics are addressed: Antibody conjugates, prodrugs, and suicide gene therapeutics Protac technology for selectively degrading target proteins Delivery of nucleic acid drugs Novel drug carriers, such as liposomes, vesicles, and nanoparticles Unmet medical needs for which there is a large market potential, such as viral infections and cancer For chemists, pharmacologists, and professionals in the wider pharmaceutical industry, Targeted Drug Delivery is a comprehensive guide on how to solve the greatest challenge in treating many diseases: delivering a pharmaceutically active substance to the target tissue in the body.Table of ContentsA Personal Foreword xiii Preface xv 1 Basics of Targeted Drug Delivery 1 Kshama A. Doshi 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 Concept of Bioavailability and Therapeutic Index 2 1.2 Targeted Drug Delivery 2 1.3 Strategies for Drug Targeting 3 1.3.1 Passive Targeting 4 1.3.1.1 Reticuloendothelial System (RES) System 4 1.3.1.2 Enhanced Permeability and Retention (EPR) Effect 4 1.3.1.3 Localized Delivery 4 1.3.2 Active Targeting 5 1.3.3 Physical Targeting 5 1.3.3.1 Ultrasound for Targeting 6 1.3.3.2 Magnetic Field for Targeting 6 1.4 Therapeutic Applications of Targeted Drug Delivery 6 1.4.1 Diabetes Management 6 1.4.2 Neurological Diseases 7 1.4.3 Cardiovascular Diseases 8 1.4.4 Respiratory Diseases 9 1.4.5 Cancer Indications 9 1.5 Targeted Dug-Delivery Products 10 1.6 Challenges 11 1.6.1 Passive Targeting and EPR Effect 12 1.6.2 Active Targeting 12 1.7 Scale-up and Challenges 13 1.8 Current Status 14 1.9 Conclusion and Prospects 15 References 16 2 Addressing Unmet Medical Needs Using Targeted Drug-Delivery Systems: Emphasis on Nanomedicine-Based Applications 21 Chandrakantsing Pardeshi, Raju Sonawane, and Yogeshwar Bachhav 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Targeted Drug-Delivery Systems for Unmet Medical Needs 23 2.2.1 Targeting Ligands 25 2.2.1.1 Small Molecules as Targeting Ligands 25 2.2.1.2 Aptamers as Targeting Ligands 27 2.2.1.3 Antibodies as Targeting Ligands 28 2.2.1.4 Lectins as Targeting Ligands 28 2.2.1.5 Lactoferrins as Targeting Ligands 29 2.2.2 Targeting Approaches 29 2.2.2.1 Disease-Based Targeting 29 2.2.2.2 Location-Based Targeting 32 2.3 Regulatory Aspects and Clinical Perspectives 35 2.4 Conclusion and Future Outlook 38 List of Abbreviations 38 References 39 3 Nanocarriers-Based Targeted Drug Delivery Systems: Small and Macromolecules 45 Preshita Desai 3.1 Nanocarriers (Nanomedicine) – Overview and Role in Targeted Drug Delivery 45 3.2 Passive Targeting Approaches 50 3.2.1 Enhanced Permeability and Retention-Effect-Based Targeting 50 3.3 Active Targeting Approaches 52 3.4 Stimuli Responsive Targeted NCs 54 3.4.1 Redox Stimuli Responsive Targeted NCs 55 3.4.2 pH Stimuli Responsive Targeted NCs 56 3.4.3 Enzyme Stimuli Responsive Targeted NCs 57 3.4.4 Temperature Stimuli Responsive Targeted NCs 58 3.4.5 Ultrasound Stimuli Responsive Targeted NCs 59 3.4.6 Magnetic Field Stimuli Responsive Targeted NCs 59 3.5 Conclusion and Future Prospects 60 References 60 4 Liposomes as Targeted Drug-Delivery Systems 69 Raghavendra C. Mundargi, Neetika Taneja, Jayeshkumar J. Hadia, and Ajay J. Khopade 4.1 Introduction 69 4.2 Liposome Commercial Landscape 72 4.3 Important Considerations in Development and Characterization of Liposomes 80 4.3.1 Selection of Lipids 80 4.3.2 Drug: Lipid Ratio 81 4.3.3 PEGylation 82 4.3.4 Ligand Anchoring 83 4.3.5 Drug-Loading Techniques 84 4.3.6 Physicochemical Characterization 85 4.3.7 Manufacturing Process 86 4.3.8 Product Stability 87 4.4 Targeted Delivery of Liposomes 88 4.4.1 Passive Targeting 89 4.4.2 Active-Targeted Delivery 92 4.4.2.1 Cancer Cell Targeting 94 4.4.2.2 Tumor Endothelium Targeting 98 4.5 Recent Clinical Trials with Liposomes with Investigational Liposome Candidates 102 4.6 Factors Influencing the Clinical Translation of Liposomes for Targeted Delivery 103 4.7 Conclusions and Future of Prospects of Targeted Liposomal-Delivery Systems 108 List of Abbreviations 110 References 112 5 Antibody–Drug Conjugates: Development and Applications 127 Rajesh Pradhan, Meghna Pandey, Siddhanth Hejmady, Rajeev Taliyan, Gautam Singhvi, Sunil K. Dubey, and Sachin Dubey 5.1 Introduction 127 5.2 Design of ADCs 128 5.2.1 Antibody 129 5.2.2 Linker 130 5.2.3 Payload 132 5.3 Mechanism of Action 133 5.4 Pharmacokinetic Considerations for ADCs 134 5.4.1 Heterogeneity of ADCs 134 5.4.2 Bioanalytical Considerations for ADCs 135 5.4.3 Pharmacokinetic Parameters of ADCs 136 5.4.3.1 Absorption 136 5.4.3.2 Distribution 136 5.4.3.3 Metabolism and Elimination 136 5.5 Applications of ADCs 137 5.5.1 Approved ADCs in the Market 137 5.5.1.1 Gemtuzumab Ozogamicin 137 5.5.1.2 Brentuximab Vedotin 139 5.5.1.3 Ado-Trastuzumab Emtansine (T-DM1) 139 5.5.1.4 Inotuzumab Ozogamicin 139 5.5.1.5 Polatuzumab Vedotin-piiq 140 5.5.1.6 Enfortumab Vedotin 140 5.5.1.7 Trastuzumab Deruxtecan 140 5.5.2 Use of ADCs in Rheumatoid Arthritis 141 5.5.3 Use of ADCs in Bacterial Infections 141 5.5.4 Use of ADCs in Ophthalmology 141 5.6 Resistance of ADC 142 5.7 Regulatory Aspects for ADCs 143 5.7.1 Role of ONDQA 143 5.7.2 Role of OBP 144 5.8 Conclusion and Future Direction 144 References 145 6 Gene-Directed Enzyme–Prodrug Therapy (GDEPT) as a Suicide Gene Therapy Modality for Cancer Treatment 155 Prashant S. Kharkar and Atul L. Jadhav 6.1 Introduction 155 6.2 GDEPT for Difficult-to-Treat Cancers 159 6.2.1 High-Grade Gliomas (HGGs) 159 6.2.2 Triple-Negative Breast Cancer (TNBC) 161 6.2.3 Other Cancers 162 6.3 Novel Enzymes for GDEPT 164 6.4 Conclusions 165 References 165 7 Targeted Prodrugs in Oral Drug Delivery 169 Milica Markovic, Shimon Ben-Shabat, and Arik Dahan 7.1 Introduction 169 7.1.1 Classic vs. Modern Prodrug Approach 170 7.2 Modern, Targeted Prodrug Approach 171 7.2.1 Prodrug Approach-Targeting Enzymes 171 7.2.1.1 Valacyclovirase-Mediated Prodrug Activation 172 7.2.1.2 Phospholipase A 2 -Mediated Prodrug Activation 173 7.2.1.3 Antibody, Gene, and Virus-Directed Enzyme–Prodrug Therapy 175 7.2.2 Prodrug Approach Targeting Transporters 176 7.2.2.1 Peptide Transporter 1 177 7.2.2.2 Monocarboxylate Transporter Type 1 179 7.2.2.3 Bile Acid Transporters 180 7.3 Computational Approaches in Targeted Prodrug Design 181 7.4 Discussion 182 7.5 Future Prospects and Clinical Applications 183 7.6 Conclusion 183 References 184 8 Exosomes for Drug Delivery Applications in Cancer and Cardiac Indications 193 Anjali Pandya, Sreeranjini Pulakkat, and Vandana Patravale 8.1 Extracellular Vesicles: An Overview 193 8.1.1 Evolution of Exosomes 194 8.1.2 Exosomes as Delivery Vehicles for Therapeutics 195 8.1.2.1 Endogenous Loading Methods 198 8.1.2.2 Exogenous Loading Methods 198 8.2 Exosomes as Cancer Therapeutics 199 8.2.1 Influence of Donor Cells 202 8.2.2 Different Therapeutic Cargo Explored in Cancer Therapy 202 8.2.2.1 Delivery of Proteins and Peptides 203 8.2.2.2 Delivery of Chemotherapeutic Cargo 204 8.2.2.3 Delivery of RNA 204 8.3 Exosome Based Drug Delivery for Cardiovascular Diseases 206 8.3.1 Delivery of Cardioprotective RNAs 207 8.3.2 Exosomes Modified with Cardiac Targeting Peptides 208 8.4 Clinical Evaluations and Future Aspects 210 8.5 Conclusion 211 Acknowledgments 212 References 212 9 Delivery of Nucleic Acids, Such as siRNA and mRNA, Using Complex Formulations 221 Ananya Pattnaik, Swarnaparabha Pany, A. S. Sanket, Sudiptee Das, Sanghamitra Pati, and Sangram K. Samal 9.1 Introduction 221 9.2 NA-Based Complex Delivery System 228 9.2.1 Classical NA-Based Complex Delivery System 229 9.2.1.1 Polymer-Based NA-Complex Delivery System 229 9.2.1.2 Lipid-Based Complex NA Delivery System 230 9.2.1.3 Peptide-Based Complex NA Delivery System 231 9.2.2 Advanced NA-Based Complex Delivery Systems 232 9.2.2.1 Inorganic and Hybrid NPs 232 9.2.2.2 Self-Assembled NA Nanostructures 233 9.2.2.3 Exosomes and NanoCells 233 9.3 Applications of NA-Complex Delivery Systems 234 9.3.1 Genome Editing 235 9.3.2 Cancer Therapy 237 9.3.3 Protein Therapy 238 9.4 Future Prospective 239 9.5 Conclusion 240 Acknowledgments 240 References 240 10 Application of PROTAC Technology in Drug Development 247 Prashant S. Kharkar and Atul L. Jadhav 10.1 Introduction 247 10.2 Design of PROTACS: A Brief Overview 252 10.3 Therapeutic Applications of PROTACs 254 10.3.1 Cancer 255 10.3.2 Neurodegenerative Disorders 261 10.3.3 Immunological Diseases 263 10.3.4 Viral Infections 264 10.4 Challenges and Limitations in the Development PROTACs 265 10.5 Future Perspectives 266 References 266 11 Metal Complexes as the Means or the End of Targeted Delivery for Unmet Needs 271 Trevor W. Hambley 11.1 Introduction 271 11.2 Class 1: Chaperones 272 11.2.1 Chaperones that Protect Drugs 273 11.2.2 Delivery to the Cells or Environments to Be Targeted 275 11.2.3 Release from the Metal Where and When Required 276 11.3 Class 2: Active Metal Complexes 276 11.3.1 Targeted Platinum Agents 277 11.4 Class 3: Dual-Threat Metal Complexes 279 11.5 Targeting Strategies: The Chemical and Physical Environment 280 11.5.1 Hypoxia 281 11.5.2 pH-Based Targeting 282 11.5.3 The EPR Effect 283 11.6 Targeting Strategies: Transporters 284 11.7 Targeting Strategies: Enzyme Activation 286 11.8 Other Targeting Strategies 287 11.9 Conclusions 288 References 289 12 Formulation of Peptides for Targeted Delivery 299 Pankti Ganatra, Karen Saiswani, Nikita Nair, Avinash Gunjal, Ratnesh Jain, and Prajakta Dandekar 12.1 Introduction 299 12.2 Peptides Used in Cancer Therapy 302 12.2.1 Lung Cancer 303 12.2.2 Melanoma 304 12.2.3 Pancreatic Cancer 306 12.2.4 Brain Cancer 307 12.2.5 Breast Cancer 309 12.2.6 Leukemia 312 12.3 Peptide-Targeting Based on Site of Action 315 12.3.1 Topical Delivery of Peptides 315 12.3.2 Ocular Delivery of Peptides 317 12.3.3 Brain Delivery of Peptides 319 12.3.4 Lung-Targeted Delivery of Peptides 321 12.4 Conclusion and Future Prospects 323 References 324 13 Antibody-Based Targeted T-Cell Therapies 327 Manoj Bansode, Kaushik Deb, and Sarmistha Deb 13.1 Introduction 327 13.2 Immune-Directed Cancer Cell Death 328 13.3 Immunotherapy Strategies in Cancer 328 13.4 T-Cell Therapy 329 13.5 Naturally Occurring T Cells 329 13.6 Genetically Modified Occurring T Cells 330 13.7 Clinical Implication of T-Cell and CAR-T-Cell Therapy: 330 13.8 Antibody-Induced T-Cell Therapy 332 13.9 A Bispecific Antibody (BsAbs)-Induced T-Cell Therapy 332 13.10 Formats of BsAbs 335 13.11 Triomab Antibodies in T-Cell Therapy 335 13.12 Bispecific Antibodies in T-Cell Therapy 336 13.13 Clinically Approved T-Cell-Activating Antibodies 337 13.14 Prospects 337 13.15 Conclusion 339 References 339 14 Devices for Active Targeted Delivery: A Way to Control the Rate and Extent of Drug Administration 349 Jonathan Faro Barros, Phedra F. Sahraoui, Yogeshvar N. Kalia, and Maria Lapteva 14.1 Introduction 349 14.2 Macrofabricated Devices – Drug Infusion Pumps 351 14.2.1 Peristaltic Pumps 351 14.2.2 Gas-Driven Pumps 352 14.2.3 Osmotic Pumps 353 14.2.4 Insulin Pumps 354 14.2.4.1 Diabetes and Insulin Product Development 354 14.2.4.2 Open-Loop Insulin Delivery Systems 355 14.2.4.3 Closed-Loop Insulin Delivery Systems 360 14.3 Microfabricated and Nanofabricated Drug Delivery Devices 364 14.3.1 Microelectromechanical Systems (MEMS) 364 14.3.1.1 Microchip-Based MEMS 364 14.3.1.2 Pump-Based MEMS 366 14.3.1.3 MEMS – Efforts to Close the Loop 368 14.3.2 Nanofabricated Drug Delivery Devices 369 14.4 Noninvasive Active Drug Delivery Systems: Iontophoresis 372 14.5 Conclusions 376 Acknowledgments 377 List of Abbreviations 377 References 378 15 Drug Delivery to the Brain: Targeting Technologies to Deliver Therapeutics to Brain Lesions 389 Nishit Pathak, Sunil K. Vimal, Cao Hongyi, and Sanjib Bhattacharyya 15.1 Introduction 389 15.2 Brain Tumor 390 15.2.1 Obstacles to Brain Tumor-Targeted Delivery 391 15.2.2 Brain-Tumor-Focused Nano-Drug Delivery 393 15.3 Neurodegenerative Diseases 396 15.3.1 Alzheimer’s Disease (AD) 396 15.3.1.1 Alzheimer’s Disease Focused on Drug Delivery 396 15.3.2 Parkinson’s Disease 399 15.3.2.1 Drug Delivery Focussed on Parkinson’s Drug Disease 399 15.3.3 Cerebrovascular Disease 400 15.3.3.1 Drug Delivery for Cerebrovascular Disease 400 15.3.4 Inflammatory Diseases (ID) 402 15.3.4.1 Inflammatory Diseases (ID) Focused on Drug Delivery 402 15.3.4.2 Drug Delivery for the Treatment of Neuro-AIDS 403 15.3.5 Drug Delivery for Multiple Sclerosis (MS) 403 15.4 Drug Delivery for CNS Disorders 404 15.4.1 Tau Therapy 405 15.4.2 Immunotherapy 407 15.4.3 Gene Immunotherapy (GIT) 407 15.4.4 Chemotherapy (CT) 408 15.4.5 Photoimmunotherapy (PIT) 408 15.5 Future Prospects 410 15.6 Conclusions 410 List of Abbreviations 411 References 412 Index 425

Read more less

Book SynopsisSchlägt die Brücke zwischen Quantentheorie und Spektroskopie! Spektroskopie ist das Arbeitspferd zur Struktur- und Eigenschaftsaufklärung von Molekülen und Werkstoffen. Um die verschiedenen spektroskopischen Methoden verstehen, kompetent anwenden und die Ergebnisse interpretieren zu können, ist grundlegendes Wissen der Quantenmechanik erforderlich: Konzepte wie stationäre Zustände, erlaubte und verbotene Übergänge, Elektronenspin und Elektron-Elektron-, Elektron-Photon- und Elektron-Phonon-Wechselwirkung sind die Grundlagen jeglicher spektroskopischen Methode. Quantenmechanische Grundlagen der Molekülspektroskopie führt ein in die quantenmechanischen Grundlagen der Molekülspektroskopie, geschrieben vom Standpunkt eines erfahrenen Anwenders spektroskopischer Methoden. Das Lehrbuch vermittelt das notwendige Hintergrundwissen, um Spektroskopie zu verstehen: Energie-Eigenzustände, Übergänge zwischen diesen Zuständen, Auswahlregeln und Symmetrie. Zahlreiche Spektroskopiearten werden diskutiert, etwa Fluoreszenz-, Oberflächen-, Raman-, IR- und Spin-Spektroskopie. * Perfekte Balance: ausreichend Physik und Mathematik, um Spektroskopie zu verstehen, ohne die Leserinnen und Leser mit unnötigem Formalismus zu überfrachten * Relevantes Thema: spektroskopische Methoden werden in allen Bereichen der Chemie, Biophysik, Biologie und Materialwissenschaften angewandt * Auf die Bedürfnisse Studierender zugeschnitten: der Autor ist ein erfahrener Hochschullehrer, der auch schwierige Aspekte verständlich vermittelt * Hervorragende Didaktik: detaillierte Erklärungen und durchgerechnete Beispiele unterstützen das Verständnis; zahlreiche Aufgaben mit Lösungen im Anhang erleichtern das Selbststudium Geschrieben für Studierende der Chemie, Biochemie, Materialwissenschaften und Physik, bietet Quantenmechanische Grundlagen der Molekülspektroskopie umfassendes Lernmaterial zum Verständnis der Molekülspektroskopie. Trade ReviewDas vorliegende Buch hilft, die komplexen Zusammenhänge zu verstehen. DGZfP (07.07.2021)Table of ContentsVorwort xi Einleitung xv 1 Übergang von der klassischen Physik zur Quantenmechanik 1 1.1 Beschreibung von Licht als elektromagnetische Welle 2 1.2 Strahlung des Schwarzen Körpers 3 1.3 Der photoelektrische Effekt 6 1.4 Absorptions- und Emissionsspektren von Wasserstoffatomen 8 1.5 Molekülspektroskopie 11 1.6 Zusammenfassung 13 Aufgaben 13 Literatur 15 2 Grundlagen der Quantenmechanik 17 2.1 Postulate der Quantenmechanik 18 2.2 Die potenzielle Energie und Potenzialfunktionen 22 2.3 Demonstration der quantenmechanischen Prinzipien für ein einfaches, eindimensionales Ein-Elektronen-Modellsystem: Das Teilchen im Kasten 24 2.4 Das Teilchen in einem zweidimensionalen Kasten, das ungebundene Teilchen und das Teilchen in einem Kasten mit endlichen Energiebarrieren 31 2.5 Reale Teilchen im Kasten: Konjugierte Polyene, Quantenpunkte und Quantenkaskadenlaser 35 Aufgaben 38 Literatur 40 3 Störung stationärer Zustände durch elektromagnetische Strahlung 41 3.1 Zeitabhangige Störungstheorie stationarer Zustande durch elektromagnetische Strahlung 41 3.2 Dipolerlaubte Absorptions- und Emissionsübergange und Auswahlregeln für das Teilchen im Kasten 45 3.3 Einstein-Koeffizienten für die Absorption und Emission von Licht 47 3.4 Laser 50 Aufgaben 52 Literatur 53 4 Der harmonische Oszillator, ein Modellsystem für die Schwingungen von zweiatomigen Molekülen 55 4.1 Klassische Beschreibung eines schwingenden zweiatomigen Modellsystems 55 4.2 Die Schrödinger-Gleichung, Energieeigenwerte und Wellenfunktionen für den harmonischen Oszillator 57 4.3 Übergangsmoment und Auswahlregeln für Absorption für den harmonischen Oszillator 63 4.4 Der anharmonische Oszillator 66 4.5 Schwingungsspektren von zweiatomigen Molekulen 69 4.6 Zusammenfassung 72 Aufgaben 73 Literatur 74 5 Infrarot und Raman-Schwingungsspektroskopie mehratomiger Moleküle 75 5.1 Schwingungsenergie mehratomiger Moleküle: Normalkoordinaten und normale Schwingungsmoden 75 5.2 Quantenmechanische Beschreibung molekularer Schwingungen in mehratomigen Molekülen 79 5.3 Infrarotabsorptionsspektroskopie 82 5.3.1 Symmetrieüberlegungen für dipolerlaubte Übergange 83 5.3.2 Bandenformen für Absorption und anomale Dispersion 84 5.4 Raman-Spektroskopie 88 5.4.1 Allgemeine Aspekte der Raman-Spektroskopie 88 5.4.2 Makroskopische Beschreibung der Polarisierbarkeit 89 5.4.3 Quantenmechanische Beschreibung der Polarisierbarkeit 90 5.5 Auswahlregeln für IR- und Raman-Spektroskopiemehratomiger Molekule 94 5.6 Beziehung zwischen Infrarot- und Raman-Spektren: Chloroform 96 5.7 Zusammenfassung: Molekulare Schwingungen inWissenschaft und Technologie 98 Aufgaben 98 Literatur 100 6 Rotation von Molekülen und Rotationsspektroskopie 101 6.1 Klassische Rotationsenergie von zwei- und mehratomigen Molekülen 102 6.2 Quantenmechanische Beschreibung des Drehimpulsoperators 105 6.3 Die Schrödinger-Gleichung für Rotation, Eigenfunktionen und Energieeigenwerte 107 6.4 Auswahlregeln für Rotationsübergange 112 6.5 Rotationsabsorptionsspektren (Mikrowellenspektren) 113 6.5.1 Starre zweiatomige und lineare Moleküle 113 6.5.2 Prolate und oblate symmetrische Kreisel 116 6.5.3 Asymmetrische Kreisel 118 6.6 Rotationsschwingungsübergange 119 Aufgaben 121 Literatur 123 7 Atomstruktur: Das Wasserstoffatom 125 7.1 Die Schrödinger-Gleichung für das Wasserstoffatom 126 7.2 Lösungen der Schrödinger-Gleichung für das Wasserstoffatom 128 7.3 Dipolerlaubte Übergange für das Wasserstoffatom 134 7.4 Diskussion der Ergebnisse für das Wasserstoffatom 135 7.5 Elektronenspin 136 7.6 Raumliche Quantisierung des Drehimpulses 140 Aufgaben 140 Literatur 142 8 Kernspinresonanzspektroskopie (Nuclear Magnetic Resonance, NMR) 143 8.1 Allgemeine Bemerkungen 143 8.2 Rückblick auf Drehimpuls und Spindrehimpuls von Elektronen 144 8.3 Kernspin 146 8.4 Auswahlregeln, Übergangsenergien, Magnetisierung und Spinpopulationsanalyse 150 8.4.1 Auswahlregeln für den elektrischen Dipolübergang für ein Ein-Spin-Kern-System 150 8.4.2 Übergangsenergien 151 8.4.3 Magnetisierung 152 8.4.4 Analyse der Besetzung (Population) der Spinzustande 152 8.5 Chemische Verschiebung 153 8.6 Multispinsysteme 155 8.6.1 Nicht wechselwirkende Spins 155 8.6.2 Wechselwirkende Spins: Spin-Spin-Kopplung 157 8.6.3 Wechselwirkung mehrerer Spins 158 8.7 Puls-FT-NMR Spektroskopie 160 8.7.1 Allgemeine Bemerkungen 160 8.7.2 Beschreibung der NMR-Vorgange durch die ,,Nettomagnetisierung“ 161 Aufgaben 162 Literatur 163 9 Atomstruktur: Mehr-Elektronen-Systeme 165 9.1 Der Zwei-Elektronen-Hamilton-Operator, die Abschirmung und die effektive Kernladung 165 9.2 Das Pauli-Prinzip 167 9.3 Das Aufbauprinzip 168 9.4 Periodische Eigenschaften von Elementen 169 9.5 Atomenergieniveaus 171 9.5.1 Gute und schlechte Quantenzahlen und Termsymbole 171 9.5.2 Auswahlregeln für atomare Übergange 174 9.6 Atomspektroskopie 175 9.7 Atomspektroskopie in der analytischen Chemie 176 Aufgaben 177 Literatur 178 10 Elektronische Energieniveaus und Spektroskopie mehratomiger Moleküle 179 10.1 Molekülorbitale und chemische Bindung im H2 +-Molekülion 180 10.2 Molekülorbitaltheorie für homonukleare zweiatomige Moleküle 184 10.3 Termsymbole und Auswahlregeln für homonukleare zweiatomige Moleküle 187 10.4 Elektronische Spektren von zweiatomgen Molekülen 189 10.4.1 Das vibronische Absorptionsspektrumvon Sauerstoff 189 10.4.2 Vibronische Übergange und das Franck-Condon-Prinzip 192 10.5 Qualitative Beschreibung elektronischer Spektren mehratomiger Moleküle 194 10.5.1 Auswahlregeln für elektronische Übergange 195 10.5.2 Gangige elektronische Chromophore 195 10.6 Fluoreszenzspektroskopie 199 10.6.1 Diagramm der Fluoreszenzenergieniveaus (Jablonski-Diagramm) 199 10.6.2 Interkombination (intersystem crossing) und Phosphoreszenz 200 10.6.3 Zwei-Photonen-Fluoreszenz (Two-Photon Fluorescence, TPF) 201 10.6.4 Zusammenfassung der Mechanismen für Raman-, Resonanz-Ramanund Fluoreszenzspektroskopie 201 10.7 Optische Aktivitat: elektronischer Zirkulardichroismus (ECD) und optische Rotation 203 10.7.1 Zirkular polarisiertes Licht und Chiralitat 203 10.7.2 Manifestation der optischen Aktivitat: optische Rotation, optische Rotationsdispersion und Zirkulardichroismus 204 10.7.3 Optische Aktivitat asymmetrischer Moleküle: das magnetische Übergangsmoment 206 10.7.4 Optische Aktivitat dissymmetrischer Moleküle: Übergangskopplung und Exzitonmodell 208 10.7.5 Optische Aktivitat in Molekülschwingungen 210 Aufgaben 211 Literatur 215 11 Gruppentheorie und Symmetrie 217 11.1 Symmetrieoperationen und Symmetriegruppen 218 11.2 Darstellung einer Gruppe 222 11.3 Symmetriedarstellungen molekularer Schwingungen 230 11.4 Symmetriebasierte Auswahlregeln für dipolzulassige Prozesse 234 11.5 Auswahlregeln für die Raman-Streuung 236 11.6 Charaktertafeln von gangigen Punktgruppen 237 Aufgaben 239 Literatur 240 Lösungen zu den Aufgaben 241 Anhang A Konstanten und Umrechnungsfaktoren 285 Anhang B Näherungsmethoden: Variations- und Störungstheorie 287 B.1 Allgemeine Bemerkungen 287 B.2 Variationsmethode 288 B.3 Zeitunabhangige Störungstheorie für nicht entartete Systeme 289 B.4 Detailliertes Beispiel für eine zeitunabhangige Störung: das Teilchen im Kasten mit geneigter Potenzialfunktion 290 B.5 Zeitabhangige Störung molekularer Systeme durch elektromagnetische Strahlung 295 Literatur 296 Anhang C Nicht lineare spektroskopische Methoden 297 C.1 Allgemeine Formulierung nicht linearer Effekte 297 C.2 Nicht koharente, nicht lineare Effekte: Hyper-Raman-Spektroskopie 298 C.3 Koharente nicht lineare Effekte 300 C.3.1 Frequenzverdopplung 300 C.3.2 Koharente Anti-Stokes-Raman-Streuung (CARS) 302 C.3.3 Stimulierte Raman-Streuung (SRS) und femtosekundenstimulierte Raman-Streuung (FSRS) 305 C.4 Nachbemerkung 306 Literatur 307 Anhang D Fourier-Transformationsmethodik 309 D.1 Einführung in die Fourier-Transformationsspektroskopie 309 D.2 Datendarstellung in verschiedenen Domanen 310 D.3 Fourier-Serie 310 D.4 Fourier-Transformation 313 D.5 Diskrete und schnelle Fourier-Transformationsalgorithmen 315 D.6 FT-Implementierung in EXCEL oder MATLAB 316 Literatur 317 Anhang E Beschreibung der Spinwellenfunktionen durch Pauli-Spinmatrizen 319 E.1 Die Formulierung der Spin-Eigenfunktionen 𝛼 und 𝛽 als Vektoren 320 E.2 Form der Pauli-Spinmatrizen 321 E.3 Eigenwerte der Spinmatrizen 323 Literatur 324 Stichwortverzeichnis 325

Read more less

Book SynopsisLaser-Based Additive Manufacturing Explore laser-based additive manufacturing processes via multi-scale modeling and computer simulation In Laser-Based Additive Manufacturing: Modeling, Simulation, and Experiments, a distinguished team of researchers delivers an incisive framework for understanding materials processing using laser-based additive manufacturing (LAM). The book describes the use of computational modeling and simulation to explore and describe the LAM technique, to improve the compositional, phase, and microstructural evolution of the material, and to enhance the mechanical, chemical, and functional properties of the manufactured components. The accomplished authors combine a comprehensive overview of multi-scale modeling and simulation with experimental and practical observations, offering a systematic review of laser-material interactions in advanced LAM processes. They also describe the real-world applications of LAM, including component processing and surface functionalization. In addition to explorations of residual stresses, three-dimensional defects, and surface physical texture in LAM, readers will also find: A thorough introduction to additive manufacturing (AM), including the advantages of AM over conventional manufacturing and the challenges involved with using the technology A comprehensive exploration of computation materials science, including length- and time-scales in materials modeling and the current state of computational modeling in LAM Practical discussions of laser-material interaction in LAM, including the conversion of light energy to heat, modes of heat dissipation, and the dynamics of the melt-pool In-depth examinations of the microstructural and mechanical aspects of LAM integrated with modeling Perfect for materials scientists, mechanical engineers, and physicists, Laser-Based Additive Manufacturing: Modeling, Simulation, and Experiments is perfect for anyone seeking an insightful treatment of this cutting-edge technology in the areas of alloys, ceramics, and composites.Table of Contents1 INTRODUCTION TO ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 1.1 Manufacturing Techniques 1.2 What is Additive Manufacturing (AM)? 1.3 Laser-based Additive Manufacturing (LAM)? 1.4 Advantages of AM over Conventional Manufacturing 1.5 Current Challenges Associated with AM 1.6 Importance of Computational Modeling in AM 1.7 References 2 COMPUTATIONAL MATERIALS SCIENCE 2.1 Introduction to Computational Materials Science 2.2 Length- and Time-Scale in Materials Modeling 2.3 Current State of Computational Modeling in LAM 2.4 References 3 LASER-MATERIAL INTERACTION IN LAM 3.1 Conversion of Light Energy to Heat 3.2 Modes of Heat Dissipation 3.3 Dynamics of the Melt-Pool 3.4 References 4 MICROSTRUCTURAL AND MECHANICAL ASPECTS IN LAM INTEGRATED WITH MODELING 4.1 Solidification 4.2 Microstructural Variation and its Prediction 4.3 Effects of Laser Parameters 4.4 Scanning Strategy and Texture Evolution in the Microstructure 4.5 Mechanical Properties 5 RESIDUAL STRESSES AND THREE-DIMENSIONAL DEFECTS IN LAM 5.1 Design of Precursors in LAM 5.2 Thermal Stress Modeling 5.3 Optimum Laser Parameters and Scanning Strategy Prediction by Modeling 5.4 References 6 SURFACE PHYSICAL TEXTURE IN LAM 6.1 Effect of Melt-Pool Dynamics on Surface Texture 6.2 Surface Physical Texture Variation in LAM 6.3 References

Read more less

Book SynopsisIn-Situ Transmission Electron Microscopy Experiments Design and execute cutting-edge experiments with transmission electron microscopy using this essential guide In-situ microscopy is a recently-discovered and rapidly-developing approach to transmission electron microscopy (TEM) that allows for the study of atomic and/or molecular changes and processes while they are in progress. Experimental specimens are subjected to stimuli that replicate near real-world conditions and their effects are observed at a previously unprecedented scale. Though in-situ microscopy is becoming an increasingly important approach to TEM, there are no current texts combining an up-to-date overview of this cutting-edge set of techniques with the experience of in-situ TEM professionals. In-Situ Transmission Electron Microscopy Experiments meets this need with a work that synthesizes the collective experience of myriad collaborators. It constitutes a comprehensive guide for planning and performing in-situ TEM measurements, incorporating both fundamental principles and novel techniques. Its combination of technical detail and practical how-to advice makes it an indispensable introduction to this area of research. In-Situ Transmission Electron Microscopy Experiments readers will also find: Coverage of the entire experimental process, from method selection to experiment design to measurement and data analysis Detailed treatment of multimodal and correlative microscopy, data processing and machine learning, and more Discussion of future challenges and opportunities facing this field of research In-Situ Transmission Electron Microscopy Experiments is essential for graduate students, post-doctoral fellows, and early career researchers entering the field of in-situ TEM.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xvii List of Abbreviations xix About the Author xxiii 1 In-Situ TEM 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 General Scope of the Book 2 1.3 Why In-Situ TEM 3 1.4 TEM: Overview 4 1.4.1 Historical Perspective 4 1.4.2 Electron–Sample Interactions 4 1.4.3 Overview of Modern TEM 5 1.4.3.1 Electron Source or Electron Gun 5 1.4.3.2 Lenses 7 1.4.3.3 Lens Aberrations 7 1.4.3.4 Aberration Correctors 9 1.4.4 Data Acquisition Systems 9 1.4.4.1 Types of Detectors 9 1.5 TEM/STEM-Based Characterization Techniques 11 1.5.1 Diffraction 11 1.5.2 TEM Imaging Modes 12 1.5.3 Stem 14 1.5.4 Analytical TEM 14 1.5.4.1 Chemical Analysis 15 1.5.4.2 Eftem 19 1.5.4.3 Spectrum Imaging (SI) 20 1.6 Other Techniques 20 1.6.1 Lorentz Microscopy 20 1.6.2 Holography 22 1.6.2.1 In-Line Holography 22 1.6.2.2 Off-Axis Holography 22 1.6.3 UEM and DTEM 23 1.7 Introduction to Different Stimuli Used for In-Situ TEM 24 1.7.1 Heating (Chapter 3) 24 1.7.2 Cooling (Cryo TEM – Chapter 4) 24 1.7.3 Interactions with Liquid/Electrochemistry (Chapter 6) 24 1.7.4 Interaction with Gas Environment/Catalysis (Chapter 7) 25 1.7.5 Other Stimuli Not Included in this Book 25 1.7.5.1 Mechanical Testing 25 1.7.5.2 Ion Radiation/Implantation 25 1.7.5.3 Biasing 27 1.7.5.4 Magnetization 28 1.8 Potential Limitations and Cautions 29 1.9 Take-Home Messages 31 References 31 2 Experiment Design Philosophy 41 2.1 General 41 2.2 Choice of Technique and the Microscope 44 2.2.1 Stimulus and Technique Selection 44 2.2.2 Microscope Selection 45 2.2.2.1 Operating Voltage 45 2.2.2.2 TEM/STEM and Pole-Piece Gap 46 2.2.2.3 Image Acquisition System and Detectors 46 2.2.3 Development or Modification of New Tool 47 2.3 TEM Holder Design and Selection 47 2.4 Specimen Design and Preparation 48 2.4.1 Direct Dispersion on a TEM Grid 48 2.4.2 Sintering Pallets 49 2.4.3 Ultramicrotomy 50 2.4.4 Electropolishing 50 2.4.5 Mechanical and Ion Milling 50 2.4.6 Focused Ion Beam (FIB) 52 2.4.7 Tripod Polishing 54 2.4.8 Cryo Sample Preparation 54 2.5 Guidelines for Experimental Setup 55 2.5.1 Electron Beam Effects 55 2.5.2 Choice of TEM Grid and Support Material 56 2.5.2.1 Reactivity of Sample with Grid and/or Support Material 56 2.5.2.2 Reactivity of TEM Grids Upon Heating 57 2.5.2.3 Reactivity of TEM Grids in Gaseous Environment 58 2.5.2.4 Reactivity of Liquids with the Windows 59 2.5.2.5 Reactivity of Gases/Liquids with the TEM Holder Parts 59 2.5.3 Purity of Gases 60 2.5.4 Liquid Cell Experiments 62 2.5.5 Experiments Using Other Stimuli 63 2.6 Practical Example of Designing In-Situ TEM Experiment 63 2.6.1 Growth of GaN Nanowires Using ETEM 63 2.6.2 Applications of Quantitative Data 64 2.6.2.1 Physical and Materials Science 66 2.6.2.2 Catalysis 67 2.7 Review 67 References 68 3 In-Situ Heating 77 3.1 History 77 3.2 Currently Available Heating Holders 78 3.2.1 Direct Heating Holder 79 3.2.2 Indirect Heating Holders 79 3.2.2.1 Furnace Heating Holders 79 3.2.2.2 MEMS-Based Heating Holders 82 3.3 Experimental Considerations 84 3.3.1 General 84 3.3.2 Electron Beam 86 3.3.3 Sample Temperature at Nanoscale 88 3.3.4 Specimen Design and Selection 90 3.3.5 Thermal Drift 91 3.4 Select Applications 92 3.4.1 Dislocation Motion 93 3.4.2 Nucleation, Precipitation, and Crystallization 94 3.4.3 Sintering 98 3.4.4 Thermal Stability of Materials 100 3.4.4.1 Alloys 100 3.4.4.2 Core–Shell Structures 100 3.4.4.3 2-D Materials 102 3.4.5 Phase Transformation 102 3.4.6 Materials Synthesis 104 3.5 Limitations and Possibilities 105 3.6 Chapter Summary 106 References 106 4 In-Situ Cryo-TEM 115 4.1 Historical Perspective 116 4.2 Specimen Holder Design and Function 116 4.3 Specimen Design and Preparation 119 4.4 Practical Aspects of Performing Cryogenic Cooling 121 4.5 Some Noteworthy Applications 122 4.5.1 Mitigating Radiation Damage 123 4.5.1.1 Structure of Polymers 124 4.5.1.2 Structure of MOF and Zeolites 125 4.5.1.3 Cryo-TEM for Energy Materials 126 4.5.1.4 Reactions in Liquids 128 4.5.1.5 Quantum and 2-D Materials 129 4.5.2 Phase Transformations Below RT 132 4.5.3 Correlative In-Situ Experiments at Low Temperature 135 4.5.3.1 Mechanical Testing 135 4.5.3.2 Magnetic Field 136 4.6 Benefits and Limitations 137 4.7 Chapter Summary 138 References 138 5 Designing Liquid and Gas Cell Holders 145 5.1 Historical Perspective 146 5.2 Design Philosophy 146 5.3 Windows 149 5.3.1 Image Resolution: Thickness and Material Properties of the Windows 149 5.3.2 Strength and Flexibility 150 5.3.3 Tolerance for the Pressure Difference 151 5.3.4 Inert or Corrosion Resistant 153 5.4 Microfabricated Window Cell (Microchips) 154 5.4.1 Static Cells 157 5.4.2 Flow Cells 159 5.4.3 Incorporation of Other Stimuli 161 5.4.4 Monolithic Microchips 162 5.5 Examples of Modified Window Holders 163 5.5.1 Redesigning the Microchips for Commercial Holder 164 5.5.2 Modified Window Microchips and TEM Holder Combination 166 5.5.3 Non-window Cell Holder to Incorporate Other Stimuli 166 5.6 Take Home Message 167 References 168 6 In-Situ Solid–Liquid Interactions 173 6.1 Historical Perspective 173 6.2 Holder Design and Selection 175 6.2.1 Closed Cells 175 6.2.1.1 Graphene Cells 175 6.2.1.2 Microfabricated Window Cell 178 6.2.2 Limitations of Closed Cells and Need for External Stimuli 178 6.2.3 Flow Reactors: Microfluidic Design 178 6.2.4 Electrochemical Cell: Biasing 181 6.2.5 Heating in Liquids 182 6.3 Specimen Design and Preparation 184 6.4 Data Acquisition 185 6.5 Practical Challenges 185 6.5.1 Sample Loading 185 6.5.2 Electron Beam Effects 187 6.5.3 Windows Bulging 188 6.5.4 Interaction of Sample with Windows 189 6.6 Select Examples of Applications 190 6.6.1 Nucleation and Growth of Nanoparticles 190 6.6.2 Corrosion/Oxidation 192 6.6.3 Galvanic Replacement Reactions 193 6.6.4 Growth of Core–Shell Nanoparticles 194 6.6.5 Soft Nanomaterials Analyzed by In-Situ Liquid TEM 195 6.6.6 Quantitative Electrochemical Measurements 197 6.6.7 Battery Research 198 6.6.7.1 Open Cell 199 6.6.7.2 Closed Liquid Cell 200 6.7 Limitations 201 6.8 Take-Home Messages 202 References 203 7 In-Situ Gas–Solid Interactions 215 7.1 Historical Perspective 215 7.2 Current Strategies 218 7.2.1 Window Holders 218 7.2.1.1 Incorporation of Other Stimuli 221 7.2.1.2 Specimen Design and Preparation 221 7.2.1.3 Practical Challenges for Gas-Cell Holders 221 7.2.1.4 Review of Benefits and Limitations of Gas-Cell Holders 222 7.2.2 Environmental Microscopes (Open Cell) 223 7.2.2.1 ETEM Combined with Gas Injection Sample Holder 223 7.2.2.2 Differentially Pumped TEM 224 7.3 Gas Manifold Design and Construction 227 7.4 Practical Aspects of Performing Experiments in Gas Environment 228 7.4.1 Electron Beam Effects 229 7.4.2 Gas Pressure and Resolution 231 7.4.3 Sample Temperature and Cell Pressure 232 7.4.4 Anticontamination Device 233 7.5 Select Examples of Applications 234 7.5.1 Effect of Gas Environment on Catalyst Nanoparticles 234 7.5.2 Carbon Nanotube (CNT) Growth 236 7.5.3 Nanowire Growth 237 7.5.4 Electron-Beam-Induced Deposition 238 7.5.5 REDOX Reactions 239 7.5.6 Gas Adsorption Sites 241 7.6 Review of Benefits and Limitations 243 7.7 Take-Home Messages 244 References 245 8 Multimodal and Correlative Microscopy 255 8.1 Multimodal TEM 256 8.1.1 Parallel Ion Electron Spectrometry (PIES) 257 8.1.2 Hybrid Microscope 258 8.1.3 Alternatives to Free Space Approach 260 8.1.4 Introducing Light for Other Applications 263 8.1.4.1 Through Sample Chamber Port 263 8.1.4.2 Through Sample Holder 264 8.1.5 Laser Alignment 269 8.2 Correlative Approaches 269 8.2.1 TEM and SEM 270 8.2.2 Electron and X-ray Microscopies and Spectroscopies 272 8.2.2.1 Portable Reactor for Various Platforms 274 8.2.2.2 Independent Correlative Measurements 278 8.3 Take Home Messages 280 References 280 9 Data Processing and Machine Learning 285 9.1 History of Image Simulation and Processing 285 9.1.1 Image Simulations 286 9.1.2 Image Processing 286 9.2 Current Status 289 9.2.1 Progress for Image Simulations 289 9.2.2 Progress in Data (Image) Processing 290 9.3 Data Management 291 9.4 Data Processing and Machine Learning (ML) 292 9.4.1 What Is Machine Learning? 293 9.4.1.1 Unsupervised ml 293 9.4.1.2 Supervised ml 294 9.4.2 Motivation 296 9.4.3 Current Status 298 9.5 Select Applications 300 9.5.1 Noise Reduction 300 9.5.2 Structure Determination 301 9.5.2.1 Diffraction Pattern Analysis 302 9.5.2.2 Image Analysis 303 9.5.2.3 Atomic Column Heights (3-D Structure) 305 9.5.2.4 Other Applications 305 9.6 Future Needs 307 9.7 Limitations 309 9.8 Take Home Messages 309 References 310 10 Future Vision 317 10.1 Historical Aspect 318 10.2 Current Status 318 10.2.1 Etem 318 10.2.2 UEM and DTEM 319 10.2.3 Stroboscopic TEM 319 10.2.4 Pies 319 10.3 Technical Challenges 319 10.3.1 List of Major Workshops 320 10.3.2 Open Challenges and Technical Roadmaps 323 10.3.2.1 Specific for Battery Research 323 10.3.2.2 Specific for Liquid-Cell TEM 324 10.3.2.3 Specific for Catalysis 324 10.3.2.4 Specific for Quantum Materials 325 10.4 Developing Relevant Strategies 326 10.4.1 Modifying Base TEM/STEM Unit 327 10.4.2 TEM Holders with Multiple Stimuli 332 10.4.3 Automation and Autonomous Operation 336 10.4.3.1 Automation 336 10.4.3.2 Autonomous Experiments 338 10.5 Take Home Messages 340 References 340 Index 349

Read more less

Book SynopsisMaterial Characterization using Electron Holography Exploration of a unique technique that offers exciting possibilities to analyze electromagnetic behavior of materials Material Characterization using Electron Holography addresses how the electromagnetic field can be directly visualized and precisely interpreted based on Maxwell’s equations formulated by special relativity, leading to the understanding of electromagnetic properties of advanced materials and devices. In doing so, it delivers a unique route to imaging materials in higher resolution. The focus of the book is on in situ observation of electromagnetic fields of diverse functional materials. Furthermore, an extension of electron holographic techniques, such as direct observation of accumulation and collective motions of electrons around the charged insulators, is also explained. This approach enables the reader to develop a deeper understanding of functionalities of advanced materials. Written by two highly qualified authors with extensive first-hand experience in the field, Material Characterization using Electron Holography covers topics such as: Importance of electromagnetic fields and their visualization, Maxwell’s equations formulated by special relativity, and de Broglie waves and wave functions Outlines of general relativity and Einstein’s equations, principles of electron holography, and related techniques Simulation of holograms and visualized electromagnetic fields, electric field analysis, and in situ observation of electric fields Interaction between electrons and charged specimen surfaces and interpretation of visualization of collective motions of electrons For materials scientists, analytical chemists, structural chemists, analytical research institutes, applied physicists, physicists, semiconductor physicists, and libraries looking to be on the cutting edge of methods to analyze electromagnetic behavior of materials, Material Characterization using Electron Holography offers comprehensive coverage of the subject from authoritative and forward-thinking topical experts.Table of ContentsPART I THEORY AND PRINCIPLES 1.1 Importance of electromagnetic field and its visualization 1.2 Maxwell?s equations formulated by special relativity 1.3 de Broglie waves and wave function 1.4 Outlines of general relativity and Einstein?s equations 1.5 Principles of electron holography 1.6 Related techniques 1.7 Simulation of holograms and visualized electromagnetic field PART II APPLICATION 2.1 Electric field analysis 2.2 In situ observation of electric field 2.3 Magnetic field analysis 2.4 In situ observation of magnetic field 2.5 Control and visualization of collective motions of electrons 2.6 Interaction between electrons and charged specimen surfaces 2.7 Interpretation of visualization of collective motions of electrons

Read more less

Book SynopsisBattery Technologies A state-of-the-art exploration of modern battery technology In Battery Technologies: Materials and Components, distinguished researchers Dr. Jianmin Ma delivers a comprehensive and robust overview of battery technology and new and emerging technologies related to lithium, aluminum, dual-ion, flexible, and biodegradable batteries. The book offers practical information on electrode materials, electrolytes, and the construction of battery systems. It also considers potential approaches to some of the primary challenges facing battery designers and manufacturers today. Battery Technologies: Materials and Components provides readers with: A thorough introduction to the lithium-ion battery, including cathode and anode materials, electrolytes, and binders Comprehensive explorations of lithium-oxygen batteries, including battery systems, catalysts, and anodes Practical discussions of redox flow batteries, aqueous batteries, biodegradable batteries, and flexible batteries In-depth examinations of dual-ion batteries, aluminum ion batteries, and zinc-oxygen batteries Perfect for inorganic chemists, materials scientists, and electrochemists, Battery Technologies: Materials and Components will also earn a place in the libraries of catalytic and polymer chemists seeking a one-stop resource on battery technology.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Li-Ion Battery 1 Ruiping Liu 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 History of the Lithium-Ion Battery 1 1.1.2 Basic Structure of Lithium-Ion Battery 1 1.1.3 Working Mechanisms of Lithium-Ion Battery 2 1.1.4 Characteristics of Lithium-Ion Batteries 3 1.2 Cathode Materials for Lithium-Ion Batteries 4 1.2.1 Layer-Structured Cathode Materials 4 1.2.2 Spinel-Structured Cathode Materials 7 1.2.3 Olivine-Structured Cathode Materials 9 1.3 Anode Materials for LIBs 9 1.3.1 Intercalation Anode Materials 11 1.3.2 Alloy Anode Materials 13 1.3.3 Conversion Anode Materials 14 1.3.4 Lithium Metal Anode 17 1.4 Electrolyte 19 1.4.1 Liquid Electrolyte 19 1.4.1.1 Lithium Salts 19 1.4.1.2 Organic Solvent 20 1.4.1.3 Functional Additives 22 1.4.2 Solid Electrolyte 23 1.4.2.1 Polymer Electrolyte 25 1.4.2.2 li 3 N and its Derivatives 25 1.4.2.3 Perovskite Solid Electrolyte 26 1.4.2.4 Lisicon 27 1.4.2.5 Nasicon 27 1.4.2.6 Garnet 28 1.4.2.7 Glassy Inorganic Solid Electrolyte 29 1.5 Separators 31 1.5.1 Polyolefin Separator 34 1.5.2 Polymers with High Melting Points for Separators 36 1.5.3 Inorganic Composite Separators 36 1.6 Conclusions and Perspective 38 Acknowledgments 39 References 39 2 Li–O 2 Battery 47 Zhijia Zhang, Jun Wang, Shaofei Zhang, Shihao Sun, and Xia Ma 2.1 Li–O 2 Battery 47 2.1.1 Introduction 47 2.1.2 Cathode Materials 49 2.1.2.1 Carbon-Based Materials 49 2.1.2.2 Noble Metal-Based Materials 54 2.1.2.3 Non-noble Metal-Based Materials 57 2.1.3 Anode Materials 64 2.1.4 Electrolyte 67 2.1.4.1 Organic Electrolyte 67 2.1.4.2 Quasi-Solid-State Electrolyte 67 2.1.4.3 Solid-State Electrolyte 72 2.1.5 Separator 73 2.1.6 From Li–O 2 Batteries to Li–Air Batteries 76 2.1.7 Summary and Perspective 76 Acknowledgments 78 References 78 3 Li–Sulfur Battery 87 Xiaoqun Qi, Fengyi Yang, and Long Qie 3.1 Introduction 87 3.2 Fundamentals 88 3.3 Cathodes 89 3.3.1 S Cathodes 89 3.3.1.1 Physical Confinement 90 3.3.1.2 Physical Blocking 90 3.3.1.3 Polymeric Organosulfur 92 3.3.1.4 Chemical Adsorption and Catalysis 93 3.3.2 Li2S Cathodes 97 3.4 Electrolytes 98 3.4.1 Ether Electrolyte 98 3.4.2 Carbonate-Based 99 3.4.3 Nitrile-Based 100 3.4.4 Sulfones/Sulfoxides-Based 101 3.4.5 Ionic Liquids 105 3.4.6 Polymer/Solid-State Electrolytes 105 3.4.7 Additives 108 3.5 Anodes 109 3.5.1 Li Anodes 109 3.5.2 Carbon Anodes 112 3.5.3 Silicon Anodes 113 3.6 Challenges and Perspectives 113 References 116 4 Na-Ion Battery 125 Xiaochuan Duan, Lei Wang, and Jianmin Ma 4.1 Introduction 125 4.1.1 History of Sodium-Ion Batteries 125 4.1.2 Composition and Working Mechanism of SIBs 126 4.2 Cathode Materials for SIBs 127 4.2.1 Layered Transition Metal Oxide 128 4.2.2 Polyanionic Compounds 130 4.2.3 Hexacyanoferrates 132 4.2.4 Organic Compounds 133 4.3 Anode Materials for SIBs 133 4.3.1 Insertion Anode Materials 134 4.3.1.1 Carbon Materials 134 4.3.1.2 Titanium-Based Oxide 137 4.3.2 Alloyed Anode Materials 138 4.3.3 Conversion-Type Anode Materials 140 4.4 Electrolytes for SIBs 142 4.4.1 Aqueous Electrolytes 144 4.4.2 Organic Electrolytes 144 4.4.3 Solid-State Electrolytes 145 4.4.3.1 Solid Polymer Electrolytes 145 4.4.3.2 Inorganic Solid Electrolytes 146 4.5 Separators for SIBs 147 4.5.1 Glass Fiber Separator 147 4.5.2 Modified Polyolefin Separator 147 4.5.3 Other Separator 148 References 149 5 Na–O 2 Battery 153 Haiying Lu, Xianghong Chen, Yu Lei, Feng Xiao, Weiyin Gao, Jiakui Zhang, Sai Zhao, Min Yan, Chenxin Ran, and Jiantie Xu 5.1 Introduction 153 5.2 Fundamental Principles 154 5.3 Cathode Materials 155 5.3.1 Carbon Materials 156 5.3.2 Metals and Their Oxides 164 5.3.2.1 Noble Metals and Their Oxides 164 5.3.2.2 Non-noble Metals and Their Oxides 165 5.3.2.3 Dual Functional Composites 168 5.4 Anode Materials 169 5.4.1 Modification of Na Metal Anode 170 5.4.2 Carbon Materials Modified Na Anode 174 5.4.3 Metal Alloys/Composites/Hybrids 177 5.5 Electrolytes 178 5.5.1 Carbonate-Based Electrolyte 179 5.5.2 Ether-Based Electrolyte 179 5.5.3 DMSO- and ACN-Based Electrolytes 183 5.5.4 Ionic Liquid-Based Electrolyte 185 5.6 Mechanism Studies 189 5.7 Conclusion and Perspectives 192 Acknowledgments 194 References 195 6 Zn-Ion Battery 201 Gaoxue Jiang, Yurong Ren, Xiaobing Huang, and Jianmin Ma 6.1 Introduction 201 6.2 Fundamentals 202 6.3 Cathode Materials 204 6.3.1 Manganese-Based Materials 204 6.3.2 Vanadium-Based Materials 208 6.3.3 Prussian Blue Analogous 210 6.3.4 Other Types of Cathode Materials 212 6.4 Zn Anode 212 6.4.1 Zinc Alloy Anode 214 6.4.2 Surface Modification of Zn Anode 215 6.4.3 Structural Optimization of the Zn Anode 216 6.5 Aqueous Electrolytes 217 6.5.1 Types of Zinc Salts 217 6.5.2 Concentration of Zinc Salt 218 6.5.3 Electrolyte Additives 219 6.6 Challenges and Perspectives 222 References 223 7 Zn–Air Battery 229 J. Alberto Blázquez, Aroa R. Mainar, and Elena Iruin 7.1 Introduction 229 7.1.1 Metal–Air Batteries 230 7.1.2 History of Zinc-Based Technologies 232 7.1.3 Secondary Zinc–Air Batteries 233 7.1.3.1 Rechargeability 233 7.1.3.2 Industrial Approximations 234 7.1.3.3 Limitations 234 7.2 Electrolyte System 237 7.2.1 Mechanisms for Zinc Dissolution 237 7.2.2 Strategies for Developing An Optimal Electrolyte System for Secondary Zinc–Air Batteries 239 7.2.2.1 Additives 239 7.2.2.2 Alternatives to Alkaline Aqueous Electrolyte 240 7.3 Bifunctional Air Electrode 242 7.3.1 Mechanism for Bifunctional Air Electrode 242 7.3.2 Materials for Bifunctional Air Electrode 243 7.3.2.1 Catalysts 243 7.3.2.2 Binder 244 7.3.2.3 Conductive Agents 246 7.3.2.4 Current Collector 246 7.3.3 Electrode Structure 247 7.4 Zinc Anode 247 7.4.1 Zinc Electrode Configuration 247 7.4.2 Materials for Zinc Anode 249 7.4.2.1 Active Material 249 7.4.2.2 Additives 249 7.4.2.3 Gelling Agents and Binders 250 7.4.2.4 Current Collector 251 7.4.3 Zinc Anode Processing 251 7.5 Membranes 252 7.6 Summary and Perspectives 253 Acronyms and Abbreviations 254 References 255 8 Al-Ion Battery 269 David Muñoz-Torrero, Rebeca Marcilla, and Edgar Ventosa 8.1 Introduction 269 8.2 Historical Development of Aluminum Batteries 269 8.2.1 Primary Aluminum Batteries: Aqueous Systems 270 8.2.2 Rechargeable Aluminum Batteries: Non-aqueous Systems 270 8.3 Electrolytes for Al-Based Batteries 272 8.3.1 Al Electrodeposition in CILs and Their Use in Rechargeable Al-Based Batteries 273 8.3.2 Al Electrodeposition Using Alternative Electrolytes and Their Use in Rechargeable Al-Based Batteries 274 8.4 Rechargeable Aluminum Batteries Classification 276 8.4.1 Metal Oxide/Sulfide-Based Aluminum Batteries 276 8.4.2 Polymer-Based Aluminum Batteries 279 8.4.3 Graphite-Based Aluminum Batteries 281 8.5 Rechargeable Aluminum Batteries Based on Graphitic Cathodes 283 8.5.1 Carbon Paper 283 8.5.2 Pyrolytic Graphite 284 8.5.3 Graphitic Foam 286 8.5.4 Graphene-Based Cathode 287 8.5.5 Graphite Flakes-Based Cathodes 290 8.6 Conclusions 291 References 293 9 Al-Air Batteries 299 Pengyu Meng, Jianmin Ren, Min Jiang, and Chaopeng Fu 9.1 Introduction 299 9.2 Aluminum Anodes 300 9.2.1 Al Alloying Elements 300 9.2.2 Research Progress of Al Anodes 301 9.2.2.1 Aluminum Microalloying 301 9.2.2.2 Heat Treatment of Al Anodes 302 9.2.2.3 Processing of Al Anodes 302 9.2.2.4 Surface coating on Al anodes 302 9.3 Air Cathodes 302 9.3.1 Structure of Air Cathodes 303 9.3.2 Integrated Cathode 304 9.3.3 Oxygen Reduction Reaction 304 9.3.4 Electrocatalysts 305 9.3.4.1 Precious Metals and Alloys 305 9.3.4.2 Transition Metal Oxides 306 9.3.4.3 Carbon-Based Catalysts 307 9.3.4.4 Single-Atom Catalysts 308 9.4 Electrolytes 309 9.4.1 Aqueous Electrolytes 309 9.4.2 Corrosion Inhibitors 309 9.4.3 Polymer Electrolytes 310 9.5 Al–Air Battery Structure Design 310 9.6 Recycle of Al–Air Batteries 312 9.7 Rechargeable Al–Air Batteries 312 9.8 Summary and Outlook 315 References 315 10 Dual-Ion Battery 317 Haitao Wang, Luojiang Zhang, and Yongbing Tang 10.1 Cation–Anion Dual-Ion Battery 317 10.1.1 Introduction 317 10.1.2 Cathode Materials 320 10.1.2.1 Graphitic Materials 320 10.1.2.2 Organic Materials 324 10.1.2.3 Other Materials 326 10.1.3 Anode Materials 327 10.1.3.1 Metallic Materials 328 10.1.3.2 Alloying-Type Materials 330 10.1.3.3 Intercalation-Type Materials 335 10.1.3.4 Conversion-Type Materials 336 10.1.4 Electrolyte 337 10.1.4.1 Organic Electrolyte 338 10.1.4.2 Ionic Liquid Electrolyte 339 10.1.4.3 Aqueous Electrolyte 341 10.2 Multi-Ion Battery 342 10.2.1 Triple-Ion Battery 343 10.2.1.1 Dual Cation–Anion Battery 343 10.2.1.2 Dual Anion–Cation Battery 346 10.2.2 Quadruple-Ion Battery 348 10.3 Summary and Perspective 350 Acknowledgments 351 References 351 Index 359

Read more less

Book SynopsisLED Packaging Technologies Up-to-date practitioner’s guide on LED packaging technologies, with application examples from relevant industries, historical insight, and outlook LED Packaging Technologies provides expert insight into current and future trends in LED packaging technologies, discussing the fundamentals of LED packaging technologies, from electrical contact design, thermal management and optical emission, and extraction, to manufacturing technologies, including the JEDEC testing standards, followed by accounts on the main applications of these LED packages in the automotive, consumer electronics, and lighting industries. LED Packaging Technologies includes information on: History of primitive lighting in human civilization to the invention of modern LEDs based lighting, and historic evolution of LED packaging technology Basic light emission and extraction technology in LED packages, covering package design impacting light emission and extraction Medical industry applications of LEDs, especially in healthcare treatments, such as in skin rejuvenation and wound healing and closures Quantum confinement phenomena and size-dependent optical properties of quantum dots, and the advancement of future quantum dot LEDs Covering the fundamentals, design, and manufacturing of LED packaging technology and assisting in removing some of the barriers in the development of LED packaging and new applications, LED Packaging Technologies is an essential source of information for engineers in the LED and lighting industries, as well as researchers in academia.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors vii Preface ix Acknowledgments xiii 1 A Brief History of Artificial Light and LED Packaging 1 1.1 Evolution in Artificial Light 1 1.2 Impact of Light-Emitting Diode on the World 4 1.3 LED Industrial Chain 6 1.4 Evolution in LED Packaging Technology 8 1.4.1 Low-Power Package Evolution 12 1.4.2 Mid-Power LED Packages 14 1.4.3 LED High-Power and Ultra-High-Power Packages 15 1.5 Summary 17 References 18 2 Fundamentals of LED Packaging Technology 19 2.1 Effective Light Extraction 19 2.1.1 Theory of Light Conversion in LED 21 2.1.2 Light Extraction Based on Chip Technology 23 2.1.2.1 Chip Surface Roughing 25 2.1.2.2 Buried Micro-Reflectors Chip 26 2.1.2.3 Chip Geometrical Shaping and Type 26 2.1.3 Light Extraction Based on High Reflective Packaging Material 28 2.1.3.1 Leadframe Plating Surface Influence 28 2.1.3.2 Housing Material Reflectivity 29 2.1.3.3 Encapsulation Material Light Extraction Efficacy 29 2.1.4 Optical Interface Enhancing Light Extraction 31 2.2 Package Design and Encapsulation Technology 32 2.2.1 Package Design 32 2.2.1.1 Design for Cost 33 2.2.1.2 Design for Reliability 34 2.2.1.3 Design for Manufacturing 34 2.2.1.4 Design for Testing 34 2.2.1.5 Design for Environment 36 2.2.1.6 Design for Assembly at Second Level PCB Board 36 2.2.1.7 Design for Effective Light Extraction 37 2.2.2 Encapsulation of LED 37 2.2.2.1 Epoxy, Silicone, and Hybrid Compound Encapsulation 37 2.2.2.2 Hermetic Sealed Package – Metal Can 40 2.2.2.3 Epoxy Cap Encapsulation 41 2.2.2.4 Glass Cap on Ceramic or Aluminum Encapsulation 41 2.3 LED Thermal Management 42 2.3.1 Fundamental of the LED Thermal Behaviors 42 2.3.2 Thermal Design in LED Package 46 2.3.3 Impact of Thermal Behavior of an LED on Its Performance 48 2.4 Electrical Contact Design 49 2.5 LED Light Conversion Principle 50 2.6 Summary 50 References 51 3 LED Packaging Manufacturing Technology 53 3.1 LED Packaging Process Flow 53 3.1.1 Die-Attach Process 53 3.1.1.1 Die-Attach and Glue Curing Process 55 3.1.2 Wire Bonding Process 56 3.1.3 Surveillance Checking Using Statistical Process Control 58 3.1.4 Encapsulation Process and Post-Mold Curing Process 60 3.1.5 Singulation Process 62 3.1.6 Final Test and Auto Vision System Process 62 3.1.7 Packing Process 63 3.2 Common Defects in LED Packaging Industry 65 3.2.1 Die-crack: Impact on the Electrical and Optical Properties of LED 65 3.2.2 Lifted Die or Glue: Impact on LED Thermal Behavior and LED Performance 67 3.2.3 Wire Interconnect Defects: Impact on LED Electro-optical Quality 69 3.3 Summary 70 References 70 4 LED Automotive Lighting Application Technology 71 4.1 Basic Science of Light for Automotive – The Photometric 72 4.1.1 Light Intensity 72 4.1.2 Luminous Flux 73 4.1.3 Illuminance 74 4.1.4 Luminance 74 4.1.5 Luminous Efficacy 74 4.2 Lighting – Light Projection “To See” 74 4.2.1 Headlamp 75 4.2.2 Adaptive Front-Lighting System – Headlamp 77 4.2.3 Optical Concept Automotive Front Lighting – Headlamp 80 4.2.4 Future of LED Headlamp Technology 81 4.2.5 LED Headlamp Thermal Management 82 4.3 Signaling – Lights That Are “To Be Seen” 83 4.3.1 AFL – Day Running Light 84 4.3.2 ARL – Signaling Lights 85 4.3.3 Optic Concepts of Signaling Light “To Be Seen” 86 4.3.3.1 Reflective and Refractive Optics 86 4.3.3.2 Light Guide Optics 87 4.4 Interior Lighting 92 4.5 Summary 93 References 93 5 LED Application For Consumer Industry 95 5.1 Consumer Indoor Lighting 95 5.2 Health Care and Medical Treatments 96 5.3 Safety and Security 98 5.3.1 Led in Iris Recognition System 98 5.3.2 LED in Food Processing 100 5.3.3 Treatment in Solid and Liquid Foods 101 5.3.4 Water Treatment 102 References 102 6 LED Application for General Lighting 105 6.1 RETROFIT Lighting 105 6.1.1 RETROFIT Lamp 107 6.1.2 Hospitality Lighting – Architecture Lighting 111 6.2 LEDfit Lighting 112 6.2.1 Residential Lighting – Living Room Down Lighting 112 6.2.2 LED Street Lighting 113 6.2.3 Exterior Architectural Lighting 117 6.2.4 Horticulture Lighting Application 118 6.2.4.1 Photosynthesis 119 6.2.5 Photomorphogenesis 120 6.2.5.1 Impact of LED Light on Horticulture Industry 121 6.3 Summary 122 References 123 7 Quantum LEDs 125 7.1 Quantum LED as the Alternative to Organic LED 125 7.2 Fundamentals of Quantum Dot 125 7.3 Quantum Dots in LED 129 7.4 Quantum LED Structures 130 7.5 QD-LED Fabrication 132 References 134 8 Ultraviolet LED Packaging and Application 137 8.1 UV LED Application 137 8.2 UV-A and B LED Packaging Technology 140 8.3 UV-C Packaging Technology 142 8.4 Future Application of UV-LED and Packaging Design Evolution 143 8.4.1 Novel Liquid Packaging Structure 143 8.5 Impact of UV-LED to UV Light Source Business 144 8.6 Summary 144 References 145 9 Lifecycle Analysis and Circular Economy of LEDs 147 9.1 Introduction 147 9.2 LCA of LEDs 148 9.2.1 Materials Footprint 149 9.2.2 Embodied Energy and Carbon Footprint 151 9.3 Circular Economy of LEDs 152 9.3.1 Lower Material Quantities by Design and Enhanced Material Properties 153 9.3.2 Materials with Multifunctionalities 154 9.3.3 Materials of Higher Circularity 155 9.3.4 Materials with Enhanced Durability 156 9.3.5 Materials with Reduced Carbon Footprint and Embodied Energy 156 9.3.6 Material Miles 157 9.3.7 Sustainable Materials from Renewable, Recycled, and Recovered Sources 157 9.3.8 Materials with Higher Environmental Benignity 157 9.3.9 Materials with No Adverse Human Health Effects 157 9.3.10 Materials Enabling Healthy Natural Habitat 158 References 158 Index 159

Read more less

Book SynopsisSodium-Ion Batteries An essential resource with coverage of up-to-date research on sodium-ion battery technology Lithium-ion batteries form the heart of many of the stored energy devices used by people all across the world. However, global lithium reserves are dwindling, and a new technology is needed to ensure a shortfall in supply does not result in disruptions to our ability to manufacture reliable, efficient batteries. In Sodium-Ion Batteries: Energy Storage Materials and Technologies, eminent researcher and materials scientist Yan Yu delivers a comprehensive overview of the state-of-the-art in sodium-ion batteries (SIBs), including their design principles, cathode and anode materials, electrolytes, and binders. The author discusses high-performance rechargeable sodium-ion battery technology in the contexts of energy, power density, and electrochemical stability for commercialization. Exploring a wide range of literature on the recent progress made by researchers on sodium-ion battery technology, the book provides valuable perspectives on designing better materials for SIBs to unlock their practical capabilities. A thorough introduction to sodium-ion batteries, including their key materials and likely future developments Comprehensive explorations of design principles of electrode materials and electrolytes for sodium-ion batteries Practical discussions of cathode materials for sodium-ion batteries, including transition metal oxides, polyanionic compounds, Prussian blue analogues and organic compounds In-depth examinations of anode materials for sodium-ion batteries, including carbon-based materials, metal chalcogenides, metal alloys, phosphorus and Na metal anodes Perfect for materials scientists, inorganic chemists, electrochemists, and physical chemists, Sodium-Ion Batteries: Energy Storage Materials and Technologies will also earn a place in the libraries of catalytic and polymer chemists.Table of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv 1 Introduction to Sodium-Ion Batteries 1 1.1 Brief Outline 1 1.2 Key Materials 4 1.3 Toward Future Development 13 References 14 2 Design Principles for Sodium-Ion Batteries 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Basic Design Principles 18 2.2.1 Energy Density 18 2.2.2 Power Density 20 2.2.3 Cycling Life 20 2.2.4 Safety 21 2.2.5 Cost 21 2.3 Design Principles for Electrode Materials 22 2.3.1 Transport Properties 22 2.3.2 Size Effects 26 2.3.3 Morphology and Structure 28 2.4 Design Principles for Electrolytes 33 2.4.1 Transport Properties 33 2.4.2 Electrochemical Stability Window 35 2.4.3 Thermal Stability 36 2.4.4 Interfacial Compatibility 37 2.4.5 Safety Issues 37 2.5 Conclusions 38 References 38 3 Transition Metal Oxide Cathodes for Sodium-Ion Batteries 41 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 Sodium-free Transition Metal Oxides 43 3.2.1 Vanadium Oxides 43 3.2.2 Manganese Dioxides 47 3.3 Sodium-inserted Layered Metal Oxides 48 3.3.1 NaFeO2 51 3.3.2 NaxCoO2 54 3.3.3 NaxMnO2 55 3.3.4 NaxNiO2 61 3.3.5 NaxVO2 65 3.3.6 NaxCrO2 66 3.3.7 Mixed Cation Oxides 69 3.3.8 Other Emerging Metal Oxides 70 3.4 Concluding Remarks 72 References 73 4 Polyanion-Type Cathodes for Sodium-Ion Batteries 79 4.1 Introduction 79 4.2 Phosphates 80 4.2.1 NaMPO4 (M = Fe and Mn) 80 4.2.2 NASICON-Type Phosphates 83 4.2.2.1 NASIClON-type Na3V2(PO4)3 83 4.2.2.2 NASICON-type Na3MnTi(PO4)3 89 4.3 Pyrophosphates 90 4.3.1 NaMP2O7 (M = Fe, V, and Ti) 91 4.3.2 Na2MP2O7 (M = Co, Fe, Mn, Cu, and Zn) 93 4.3.3 Na4M3(PO4)2P2O7 (M = Fe, Co, Mn, Ni, and Mg) 98 4.3.4 Other Pyrophosphates 102 4.4 Fluorinated Phosphate Cathodes 105 4.4.1 NaVPO4F 105 4.4.2 Na2MPO4F (M = Fe, Mn, and Ni) 107 4.4.3 Na3(VO1−xPO4)2F1+2x (0≤ x ≤1) 110 4.5 Sulfates 116 4.5.1 NaxFey(SO4)z 116 4.5.2 Fluorosulfates 119 4.6 Silicates 119 4.7 Other Polyanion-Type Compounds 121 4.8 Concluding Remarks 125 References 126 5 Prussian Blue Analogue Cathodes for Sodium-Ion Batteries 137 5.1 Introduction 137 5.2 Crystal Structure 138 5.3 Electrochemistry Mechanisms 142 5.4 Preparation Approaches 144 5.4.1 Coprecipitation 145 5.4.2 Self-decomposition of Precursors 147 5.5 Optimizing Electrochemical Performance 148 5.5.1 Effect of Lattice Architecture on Electrochemistry 149 5.5.1.1 Substitution of Cation 149 5.5.1.2 Inserting Cation 150 5.5.1.3 Vacancy 151 5.5.1.4 Water Molecules 151 5.5.2 Effect of Morphological Optimizations on Electrochemistry 152 5.5.3 NaxMFe-PBAs with Two Na+ Insertion Sites 154 5.5.4 NaxMFe-PBAs with One Na+ Insertion Sites 155 5.6 Concluding Remarks 156 References 157 6 Organic Cathodes for Sodium-Ion Batteries 161 6.1 Introduction 161 6.2 C=O Reaction 163 6.2.1 Quinones 164 6.2.2 Carboxylates 173 6.2.3 Anhydrides 175 6.2.4 Amides 177 6.3 Doping Reaction 181 6.3.1 Conductive Polymers 182 6.3.2 Organic Radical Compounds 188 6.3.3 Microporous Polymers 192 6.4 C=N Reaction 194 6.4.1 Schiff Base Organic Compounds 194 6.4.2 Pteridine Derivatives 196 6.5 Concluding Remarks 197 References 198 7 Intercalation-Type Anode Materials for Sodium-Ion Batteries 203 7.1 Introduction 203 7.2 Carbon-Based Anode Materials 203 7.2.1 Graphite Anode 204 7.2.2 Hard Carbon Anode 205 7.2.3 Soft Carbon Anode 210 7.3 Titanium-Based Anode Materials 211 7.3.1 TiO2 212 7.3.1.1 Amorphous TiO2 212 7.3.1.2 Anatase TiO2 213 7.3.1.3 TiO2-B 214 7.3.1.4 Rutile TiO2 216 7.3.2 Li4Ti5O12 218 7.3.3 Na2Ti3O7 221 7.3.3.1 Surface Modifications 224 7.3.3.2 Micro-Nano Structure Design 224 7.3.3.3 Self-Supported Electrode Design 225 7.3.3.4 Anion Doping 228 7.3.3.5 Cation Doping 230 7.3.4 NaTi2(PO4)3 231 7.3.4.1 Structure and Properties of NaTi2(PO4)3 231 7.3.4.2 Modification Strategies of NaTi2(PO4)3 232 7.3.5 TiNb2O7 237 7.3.5.1 Structure and Properties of TiNb2O7 237 7.3.5.2 Modification Strategies of TiNb2O7 237 7.4 Concluding Remarks 239 References 239 8 Phosphorus/Phosphide Anodes for Sodium–Ion Batteries on Alloy and Conversion Reactions 245 8.1 Introduction 245 8.2 Phosphorus Anodes 246 8.2.1 Phosphorus Allotropes 246 8.2.2 Na-Storage Mechanism for Phosphorus-Based Materials 249 8.2.2.1 Na-Storage Mechanism for Red Phosphorus 249 8.2.2.2 Na-Storage Mechanism for Black Phosphorus 250 8.2.3 Phosphorus-Based Materials for Na–Ion Batteries 253 8.2.3.1 Red Phosphorus for Na–Ion Batteries 253 8.2.3.2 Black Phosphorus and Phosphorene for Na-Ion Batteries 258 8.3 Metal Phosphide Anodes 261 8.3.1 Na-Storage Mechanism for Metal Phosphides 261 8.3.2 Metal Phosphides for Na-Ion Batteries 262 8.3.2.1 Tin Phosphide Materials 262 8.3.2.2 Cobalt Phosphide Materials 265 8.3.2.3 Iron Phosphide Materials 266 8.3.2.4 Nickel Phosphide Materials 267 8.3.2.5 Copper Phosphide Materials 268 8.4 Concluding Remarks 269 References 270 9 Metal Oxides/Chalcogenides/Alloys for Sodium-Ion Batteries on Alloy and Conversion Reactions 273 9.1 Introduction 273 9.2 Metal Oxides 273 9.2.1 Conversion-type Oxides 273 9.2.2 Conversion-alloy-type Oxides 277 9.3 Metal Chalcogenides 278 9.3.1 Metal Sulfides 278 9.3.1.1 SnS/SnS2 279 9.3.1.2 Sb2S3/Bi2S3 281 9.3.1.3 MoS2/WS2 282 9.3.1.4 FeSx/CoSx/NiSx 283 9.3.1.5 Other Monometal Sulfides Including CuSx/VSx/TiS2 286 9.3.1.6 Bimetallic Sulfides 288 9.3.2 Metal Selenides 290 9.3.2.1 SnSe/SnSe2 291 9.3.2.2 Sb2Se3/Bi2Se3 291 9.3.2.3 MoSe2/WSe2 292 9.3.2.4 FeSex/CoSe2/NiSe2 293 9.3.2.5 Other Monometal Selenides 295 9.3.2.6 Bimetallic Selenides 296 9.3.3 Metal Tellurides 298 9.4 Metal Alloys 299 9.4.1 Tin (Sn) 299 9.4.2 Antimony (Sb) 302 9.4.3 Bismuth (Bi) 304 9.4.4 Intermetallic Compounds 307 References 309 10 Effective Strategies to Restrain Dendrite Growth of Na Metal Anodes 315 10.1 Introduction 315 10.2 Liquid Electrolyte Optimization for Na Metal Anodes 316 10.2.1 Traditional Electrolyte 316 10.2.2 High-concentration Electrolyte 319 10.2.3 Ionic Liquids 322 10.3 Construction of Novel Current Collectors for Na Metal Anodes 323 10.3.1 Metallic Current Collectors 323 10.3.2 Carbon-Based Current Collectors 324 10.3.3 3D Scaffolds/Na Metal 325 10.4 Alloy-Based Na Metal Anodes 327 10.4.1 Alkali-metal Alloys 327 10.4.2 Other Metals/Na Alloys 332 10.5 Conclusions 335 References 335 11 Organic Liquid Electrolytes for Sodium-Ion Batteries 339 11.1 Introduction 339 11.2 Electrolyte Properties 339 11.3 Sodium Salts 340 11.4 Solvents 346 11.4.1 Carbonate Ester-Based Electrolytes 346 11.4.2 Carboxylate Ester-Based Electrolytes 347 11.4.3 Ether-Based Electrolytes 352 11.5 Functional Additives 358 11.5.1 Basic Characteristics of Additives 358 11.5.2 Additives for Na-Ion Batteries 359 11.5.2.1 SEI-Forming Additives for Anodes 360 11.5.2.2 CEI-Forming Additives for Cathodes 363 11.5.3 Additives for Na Metal 365 11.5.4 Safety Inspired Additives 369 11.6 Novel Concentration Electrolyte Systems 372 11.6.1 High-Concentration Electrolytes 372 11.6.2 Local High-Concentration Electrolytes 373 11.6.3 Low-Concentration Electrolytes 376 11.7 Concluding Remarks 377 References 378 12 Ionic Liquid Electrolytes for Sodium-Ion Batteries 383 12.1 Introduction 383 12.2 The Cationic Species in Ionic Liquids 384 12.3 The Anionic Species in Ionic Liquids 385 12.4 Electrolyte Properties 388 12.4.1 Physicochemical Properties 388 12.4.2 Electrochemical Properties 389 12.4.3 Thermal Properties 391 12.5 Stability of Ionic Liquids 392 12.5.1 Thermal and Electrochemical Stability 392 12.5.2 Electrochemical Properties 393 12.5.3 Electrolyte/Electrode Interfaces 396 12.6 Concluding Remarks 398 References 399 13 Solid-State and Gel Electrolytes for Sodium-Ion Batteries 401 13.1 Introduction 401 13.2 Electrolyte Characteristics 401 13.2.1 Energy Density 401 13.2.2 Ionic Conductivity 403 13.2.3 Chemical Stability 404 13.2.4 Mechanical Stability 406 13.2.5 Thermal Stability 406 13.3 Polymer Electrolytes 406 13.3.1 Solid Polymer Electrolytes (SPEs) 406 13.3.1.1 PEO-Based Electrolyte 407 13.3.1.2 PVA-Based Electrolyte 411 13.3.1.3 PAN-Based Electrolyte 414 13.3.1.4 PVP-Based Electrolyte 414 13.3.1.5 PVDF-Based Electrolyte 414 13.3.2 Na Polymer Single-Ion Conductors 415 13.3.3 Adding Ceramic Additives to Polymer Electrolytes 417 13.3.4 Gel Polymer Electrolytes (GPEs) 420 13.3.4.1 PMMA-Based GPE 420 13.3.4.2 PVDF-Based GPE 421 13.3.4.3 Nafion-Based GPE 424 13.3.5 Adding Ceramic Filler to GPEs 424 13.3.6 Cross-linked GPEs 425 13.3.7 Ionic Liquid-Based GPEs 425 13.4 Inorganic Solid-State Electrolytes 427 13.4.1 Oxide-Based Solid-State Electrolytes 427 13.4.1.1 Beta-Alumina 427 13.4.1.2 NASICON 429 13.4.2 Sulfide-Based Solid-State Electrolytes 433 13.4.2.1 Na3PS4 433 13.4.2.2 Na3SbS4 439 13.4.2.3 Na10SnP2S12 440 13.4.3 Complex Hydrides 441 13.5 Concluding Remarks 443 References 444 14 Binders for Sodium-Ion Batteries 449 14.1 Introduction 449 14.2 Main Functions and Performance Requirements of Binders 450 14.3 Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) 453 14.3.1 Chemical Properties of PVDF 453 14.3.2 Application of PVDF in Na-Ion Batteries 454 14.4 Polyacrylic Acid (PAA) 455 14.5 Carboxymethyl Cellulose (CMC) 458 14.6 Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) 461 14.7 Other Binders 462 14.7.1 Sodium Alginate (SA) 462 14.7.2 Xanthan Gum (XG) 463 14.7.3 Guar Gum (GG) 463 14.7.4 Polyimide (PI) 463 14.8 Concluding Remarks 464 References 464 15 Sodium-Ion Full Batteries 467 15.1 Introduction 467 15.2 Aqueous Sodium-Ion Full Batteries 468 15.3 Nonaqueous Sodium-Ion Full Batteries 482 15.3.1 Carbon-Anode-based Sodium-Ion Full Batteries 483 15.3.2 Non-Carbon-Anode-based Sodium-Ion Full Batteries 486 15.4 Solid-state Sodium-Ion Full Batteries 493 15.4.1 Quasi-Solid-State Sodium-Ion Full Batteries 493 15.4.2 All-Solid-state Sodium-Ion Full Batteries (ASSSIFBs) 498 15.4.2.1 Polymer-Electrolyte-based ASSSIFBs 498 15.4.2.2 Ceramic-Electrolyte-based ASSSIFBs 498 15.4.2.3 Composite-Electrolyte-based ASSSIFBs 503 15.4.2.4 New Types of ASSSIFBs 504 References 506 16 Perspectives for Sodium-Ion Batteries 509 Index 519

Read more less